tour for 4 days

Expedia Rewards is now One Key™

• 4 Day Getaways
• Things to do

I only need accommodations for part of my trip

Everyone needs to getaway sometimes

Where can i go for a quick vacation.

Expedia has stacks of 4 day vacation ideas, ready to go. Just think, from the East Coast, you can be in Bermuda in a couple of hours, soaking up the sunshine and local rum. Maybe you prefer something rich in festivals, circuses, and with a distinct European flavor— Montreal is super easy to get to from many US cities, making it a great 4 day getaway. You could head to Nashville for some Southern charm with a shot of Dolly or Billy Ray and that amazing hot chicken.

How do I find the best 4 day getaways?

Pop in your starting location, destination, and travel dates then hit search to see all the exciting 4 day vacation packages. Or you can design your own 4 day getaway by clicking on hotels, car rental, things to do, or flights. With Expedia, it’s easy to find the best 4 day vacations for you then just click to book.

What are the best 4 day vacations for couples?

Picture yourself walking hand in hand through New Orleans to the sound of jazz before retreating to your romantic hotel in the French Quarter —an area rich in historic architecture. Imagine watching the sunset with your special one from the balcony of your oceanfront vacation rental in Myrtle Beach . Treat your loved one to candlelit dinners and wine tastings in Napa Valley where a 4 day getaway is the perfect couple’s retreat.

How do I get great 4 day vacation deals?

With incredible 4 day getaway deals on a brilliant selection of packages, accommodation, and flights, you can craft your ideal four day vacation. Simply enter your location, destination, and travel dates and hit search. Use the filters to refine your results by price, so if you want for cheap 4 day vacations, you see the budget options first. You can also use the filters to choose your neighborhood, favorite amenities, and more.

Why should I book a 4 day getaway with Expedia?

At Expedia, we help you save money on booking your dream 4 day getaway. With many flights and properties offering free cancellation, you have the freedom to book now and change or cancel if you need to. It’s easy to compare prices and simply click to book your favorite. So, book your 4 day getaway today.

• Vacation packages currently trending

Save with our bundle deals!

Car, Stay, Flight... book everything you need for your perfect weekend getaway with Expedia and save!

Vacation rental

Apartments, Villas, Cabins... we have everything you need!

Car Rentals

Hit the road with one of our car rental deals

Explore other types of vacation packages

All Inclusive Vacations

Beach Vacations

Kid Friendly Vacations

Golf Vacations

Luxury Vacations

Romantic Vacations

Ski Vacations

Adventure Vacations

Gay & Lesbian Vacations 

Where to go when

• More Vacation Ideas
• Getaway Ideas
• Vacation Deals & Tips
• Top Vacation Destinations
• Best Travel Destinations by Month
• New Year's vacation deals
• Christmas vacation deals
• Spring travel deals
• Spring break vacation deals
• National Park Vacation Deals
• Northern Lights Vacations
• Memorial Day Weekend Getaways
• Fourth of July Weekend Getaways
• Labor Day Weekend Getaways
• MLK Day Weekend Getaways
• Thanksgiving Getaways
• Weekend Getaways
• 1 Day Getaways
• 2 Day Getaways
• 3 Day Getaways
• 5 Day Getaways
• 6 Day Getaways
• One Week Getaways
• 8 Day Getaways
• Las Vegas Getaway
• Vacation Rental Deals
• Vacations under $1000
• Vacations under $500
• Last Minute Vacation Deals
• Last Minute Hotel Deals
• Travel Deals + Vacation Ideas
• Plan a vacation
• Deposit and Vacation Payment Plans
• London Vacations
• Paris Vacations
• Cabo San Lucas Vacations
• Playa Del Carmen Vacations
• New York Vacations
• New Orleans Vacations
• Punta Cana Vacations
• Montego Bay Vacations
• Puerto Vallarta Vacations
• Honolulu Vacations
• Orlando Vacations
• Miami Vacations
• Cancun Vacations
• Los Angeles Vacations
• Fort Lauderdale Vacations
• January Vacations
• February Vacations
• March Vacations
• April Vacations
• May Vacations
• June Vacations
• July Vacations
• August Vacations
• September Vacations
• October Vacations
• November Vacations
• December Vacations

Additional information about Expedia Group

• North America Tours
• USA 4-Day Itinerary And Tours

USA 4-Day Tours and Itineraries

Discover the best 4-Day multi-day tours in USA with Bookmundi. We offer a total of 13 USA 4-Day tours and itineraries with 23 customer reviews.

• USA Travel Guide
• 12 Things to do in the USA

13 Trips in USA with 23 Reviews

• Starts New York, USA
• Ends New York, USA

Niagara Falls, Washington DC, Philadelphia & Amish Country 4D/3N (from New York)

• Best price guaranteed
• No booking fees
• Tour Type Small Group Tour
• Activities Adventure & Cultural, religious and historic sites Adventure , Cultural, religious and historic sites & Explorer 'data-more-tripid='32264'>+1 more
• Accommodation Hotel
• Transport Bus & Boat
• Age Range 18-99 yrs
• Operated in English
• Mar 27 10+ seats left
• Mar 28 10+ seats left
• View More Jan 1, 2019 Jan 2, 2019 Jan 3, 2019

• Starts Honolulu, USA
• Ends Honolulu, USA

Honolulu Hawaii Experience 4D/3N

• Activities Adventure
• Transport Private Vehicle

New York Uncovered

• Tour Type Group Tour
• Activities Festivals and events
• Transport Coach, Ferry & Train
• Age Range 18-35 yrs
• May 27 Only 9 seats left
• Jul 01 Only 8 seats left

• Starts Las Vegas, USA
• Ends Las Vegas, USA

Zion Glamping Adventure

• Activities Horseback riding
• Accommodation Lodge, Tent & Resort
• Age Range 15-99 yrs
• Apr 18 Only 1 seat left
• May 23 Only 6 seats left

• Starts Jackson, USA
• Ends Jackson, USA

Yellowstone and Grand Tetons

• Activities National parks & Wildlife
• Transport Coach
• Brochure Price: US$ 1,255
• Special Deal (5%): - US$ 63
• Total Price from: US$ 1,192
• Jun 21 10+ seats left
• Jul 19 Only 8 seats left

Hiking and Camping in Joshua Tree

• Activities Trekking and Hiking
• Accommodation Camping & Hotel
• Age Range 12-99 yrs
• Apr 22 Only 3 seats left
• Nov 04 Only 2 seats left

• Starts Flagstaff, USA
• Ends Grand Canyon, USA

Hiking in Sedona and the Grand Canyon

• Activities Natural landmarks sightseeing & Trekking and Hiking
• Apr 08 Only 9 seats left
• Apr 16 Only 1 seat left

Hiking and Backpacking in Yellowstone

• Accommodation Camping
• May 31 Only 1 seat left
• Jun 18 Only 1 seat left

• Starts Yosemite National Park, USA
• Ends Yosemite National Park, USA

Winter Hiking and Snowshoeing in Yosemite

• Accommodation Lodge
• Nov 25 Only 6 seats left
• Dec 24 Only 6 seats left

Hiking and Backpacking Yosemite's North Rim

• May 02 Only 1 seat left
• Jun 28 Only 2 seats left

Hiking and Camping in Death Valley

• Accommodation Camping & Tent
• Oct 29 Only 2 seats left

Special Las Vegas with Grand Canyon

• Activities Explorer
• Transport Bus & Flight
• Apr 22 10+ seats left
• May 06 10+ seats left

• Starts Los Angeles, USA
• Ends Los Angeles, USA

Western Classics

Usa 4-days tour reviews.

• USA budget tours
• Eco tours in USA
• USA guided tours
• USA family tour packages
• USA luxury tours
• USA private tours
• USA self-guided tours
• USA small group tours
• USA solo trips
• USA tailor-made vacation packages
• USA tours for senior citizens
• USA tours for young adults
• USA group tours
• USA last minute deals
• USA travel deals

Best price guaranteed - No booking fees

Free cancellation on most trips

Sign-in to unlock instant trip discounts. Create wish lists and save up to USD 1,500.

Discover Which Colorado Mountain Town is right for you

The Only 4-Day Colorado Road Trip Itinerary You’ll Ever Need

• January 8, 2024
• By foxintheforest

Last Updated on January 15, 2024 by foxintheforest

If you only have 4 days in Colorado, you’ll see quite a bit with this locally-curated Colorado road trip itinerary.

Believe me, there are so many different stops to make on a Colorado road trip, that it’s hard to boil it down to just 4 days. Like me, you could spend a lifetime here and still not see everything.

This 4 day Colorado road trip itinerary delivers you a taste of the different areas of Colorado without feeling too rushed. You’ll be in a new place each day so you can really get a flavor for the epic beauty the Centennial State has to offer.

There is a lot of ground to cover with just 4 days in Colorado so be prepared to drive and spot amazing scenery along the way.

I’ve lived in Colorado for over 13 years and I road trip in this state constantly – in the summer, I’m on the road every 4 days. Once a weekend warrior, I turned my passion for road-tripping Colorado into a full-time gig as a writer for the outdoor industry.

As a seasoned pro and local, it’s my mission to empower you to make the most of your 4 days in Colorado like a local, not a tourist.

I know all of the best Colorado road trip spots and you won’t find better advice about traveling in Colorado anywhere else on the web.

So here’s how to see the most of Colorado in just 4 days.

How to Use this Colorado Road Trip Itinerary Guide

This 4-day Colorado road trip itinerary brings you a taste of the highlights. Are there other amazingly beautiful place in Colorado to explore ?

Sure, but this 4-day itinerary is designed to give you a taste of the unique landscapes of Colorado and maximize your time exploring this amazing state. This itinerary includes:

• How to make the most of 4 days in Colorado
• 2 of the best national parks in Colorado
• Incredibly Instagrammable views
• Delicious eats
• Colorado hot springs
• 2 of the most scenic drives in Colorado
• Quick tips to make the most of your Colorado road trip
• Ideas for additional amazing Colorado road trip stops if you have more time

When is the Best Time to Go on a Colorado Road Trip?

The Rocky Mountains of Colorado typically have snow from October through June. Although it’s a pretty time to visit, it’s also a dangerous time to hike due to avalanche hazards and many of the scenic drives close down for the season. Therefore, the best time to go on a Colorado road trip is from July through early September.

Colorado Road Trip Map

Although this route has ample driving, you’ll see plenty of amazing scenery along the way. This diverse itinerary spans many exceptional landscapes on your 4-day itinerary in Colorado.

Day One: Denver to Estes Park

Since you’ve only got 4 days to explore Colorado, pick up your vehicle and drive straight to Estes Park – one of the most beautiful Colorado mountain towns . Make sure to drink plenty of water and take things slow to get properly acclimated to the altitude.

Keep in mind the Denver International Airport (DIA) is pretty far from…well…anything. If you’re arriving late, consider spending the night in Denver, and prepare for an early morning to make the most of Estes Park , Colorado.

Things to do : Catch a sunset at Sprauge Lake or the Many Parks Curve Overlook in Rocky Mountain National Park, spot wildlife in Estes Park , take a short hike at Lumpy Ridge, relax and grab a drink at the Stanley Hotel (the inspiration for The Shining – some say this place is haunted if you’re looking for spooky vibes).

Drive time: 1 hr 40 mins

Where to Stay: Camp at a campground near Estes Park, find dispersed camping along Highway 34, stay in Estes Park (generally quite pricey during the high season), or stay in nearby Lyons, Colorado (cheaper, great AirBnBs).

Where to eat: Smokin’ Daves BBQ and Brew (mid-range brewhouse), Scratch Deli and Bakery (breakfast, lunch, coffee), Burgers and Gyros on Moraine (cheap lunch or dinner), Notchtop Bakery and Cafe (excellent breakfast or brunch).

Day Two: One Day in Rocky Mountain National Park

Rise and shine before the sun to make the most of your time on this 4 day Colorado itinerary.

As one of the most beautiful national parks in the US , Rocky Mountain National Park gets crowded year-round, but if you’re willing to get up before dawn, you can savor a few moments of solitude in the park.

Today you’ll go for a hike at one of the many amazing hiking trails in Rocky Mountain National Park, then continue onwards along Trail Ridge Road – one of the most scenic drives near Denver – to the west end of the park.

Local Tip: Trail Ridge Road is not maintained in the winter. Always be sure to check that the road is open before heading out. You can still hike, but you’ll have to drive around the west end of the park to get to Glenwood Springs if the road is closed.

Things to do in Rocky Mountain National Park : Sunrise at either Bear Lake (no walking) or continue onwards to Dream Lake and Emerald Lake (3.2 miles RT). Hikers looking for a challenge should check out Sky Pond via Glacier Gorge – a classic Colorado lake hike , or the Loch Lake Trail.

Drive time: Approximately 3 hr 30 min to Glenwood Springs with stops.

Where to eat: Pack snacks and grab a late lunch at Grand Lake. Check out Cy’s Deli or Sagebrush BBQ and Grill.

Heads Up: You’ll need a timed entry permi t to enter Rocky Mountain National Park during certain times, so plan in advance!

Local Tip: Got extra time? You’ll find plenty to do with 3 days in and around Rocky Mountain National Park.

Local Tip: If you’re planning on visiting more than 3 national parks in a year, snag the America the Beautiful Parks Pass to get into RMNP for free.

Glenwood Springs Overnight with Hot Springs

After a day in Rocky Mountain National Park, head to Glenwood Springs and relax with a soak in the Iron Mountain Hot Springs.

If you’ve got some spare time and energy, snag a permit to hike to Hanging Lake (book at least 4 months in advance), one of Colorado’s most beautiful hikes.

Things to do : Hike to Hanging Lake (near Glenwood Springs, advanced permit and paid parking or bus ride required), soak in the Glenwood Springs hot springs or ride the scenic Gondola to the top of the Canyon.

Where to eat: Sweet Coloradough (delicious donuts), Native Son Restaurant and Bar (tapas and great drinks), Slope & Hatch (delicious street tacos).

Where to Stay: The Hotel Glenwood Springs (pricey but convenient), two rest areas just east of town (free camping, budget option. Bathrooms are clean and it is very safe), Hanging Lake Inn (budget hotel).

  Local Tip: Hanging Lake has been experiencing temporary closures due to trail maintenance from the 2021 landslides (yup, even in 2024). Always check on the permit website for the most accurate and up-to-date info!

Day 3: Black Canyon of the Gunnison

In the morning, make the 2.5-hour drive to the Black Canyon of the Gunnison. Touted as the “Grand Canyon of the Rockies” this beautiful canyon plunges 2,722-feet down and is only 40 feet across at its narrowest section. It’s a must-see stop on any Colorado road trip.

Dr i ve Time: 2.5 hours to the more developed south rim, or 2 hours to the more remote north rim.

Things to do : Snap photos along the 12 scenic overlooks on the Rim Drive (Chasm and Sunset view are spectacular), hike to the bottom of the canyon (difficult, 5 hours, obtain a permit on arrival), go fishing, go to a ranger program and learn about the area (the night program is amazing), go for a scenic boat ride or white water raft, rock climb in the canyon (intermediate level), check out the historic town of Cimarron and see what life was like in 1882.

Where to eat: Crash Burger (casual, tasty burger joint), Colorado Boy Pizzeria, Guru’s Nepalese Restaurant (tasty Nepali food), Mimo’s (breakfast burritos, a Colorado breakfast staple).

Where to Stay: Reserve a camp spot at the East Portal Campground or stay in nearby Montrose. Stay at the Canyon Creek Bed and Breakfast (highly rated, but pricier), The Country Lodge (mid-range), or one of the many standard hotel chains.

Local Tip : With extra time on your Colorado road trip you can explore nearby Crested Butte (a charming mountain town famous for mountian biking) or the jaw-dropping San Juan Mountains.

Day 4: Explore Breweries in Denver

It’s time to head back to Denver today. If you’re short on time, make your way directly to DIA (keep in mind traffic is poor in the city around rush hour, and it’s an average of 45 minutes to the airport from Denver) or stop by one of Denver’s most amazing local breweries for a delicious beer and some food.

Dr i ve Time: 4 hrs and 45 minutes to downtown Denver. 5 hours and 20 minutes to Denver International Airport

Things to do : There’s a wide array of things to do in Denver , but if you’re short on time check out Red Rocks Amphitheater in nearby Morrison (you’ll pass it on the way to the city), grab a drink at a local brewery, visit the Denver Botanical Gardens, or wander around the RiNo District or Union Station area.

Where to eat: Lowdown Brewery (tasty pizza and beer), The Great Divide Brewery (a Colorado classic), The Post Brewing Co (the best fried chicken and soul food).

Local Tip: If you’re coming home on a Sunday and you’re traveling along I-70 the traffic is extremely bad from 11 am until 5 pm every weekend. Be sure to plan accordingly!

Bonus: Colorado Springs and the Garden of the Gods

After enjoying all the big city excitement of Denver during your Colorado road trip itinerary, you could head south to Pikes Peak. It’s a gorgeous mountain that is accessible via car, or hiking trail, and that sits right near the Garden of the Gods.

Just under an hour and a half from Denver, the Garden of the Gods is home to a series of quirky red rock formations that can be enjoyed via easy-to-navigate hiking trails. Just use I-15 to get here and hop on the Ridge Loop Trail which is a great way to get an overview of the park.

In total, there are over 15 miles of trails here that include everything from easy walks to intense climbs. This is also one of the best free things to do in Colorado since the former owner, Charles Perkins, gifted the land to the public.

Local Tip: Try to spend 2-3 days in Colorado Springs to fully enjoy all that the area has to offer. I would also avoid visiting Garden of the Gods in the summer since it is packed with people.

Additionally, golden hour is the best time for photos since the red rocks contrast beautifully against the sky.

Bonus: Great Sand Dunes National Park

Not sure where to go after you visit Colorado Springs during your Colorado road trip itinerary? If so then take a 2.5- hour ride along I-25 and US-160 to Great Sand Dunes National Park.

After all, this incredible natural oasis sits at the base of the Sangre de Cristo Mountains and is home to the tallest sand dunes in North America.

During your visit, enjoy fun activities like sand boarding, sand sledding, hiking, camping, and picnicking. Stargazing is also popular given the park’s remote location and dark skies. Plus, don’t worry about packing your own gear since many local outfitters will rent you all the gear and sleds that you need.

During your visit, you’ll want to stay in nearby Alamosa. It is just 35 miles away from the park and offers a wide array of budget, mid-range, and luxury accommodations.

Now, to visit all the major park highlights and to have ample time to hike around the dunefield to High Dune, Hidden Dune, and Star Dune, plan to spend around two or three days here.

Local Tip: This park is best visited in early fall when temperatures are pleasant and when the crowds at Medano Creek are long gone.

Colorado Road Trip Quick Tips

Visiting Colorado in just 4 days is a tall order. There’s a lot to see and do. For the best trip, travel like a Colorado local. When you’re planning a Colorado road trip, you’ll want to keep a few things in mind to make your experience better. Here are a few handy local tips:

Mountian traffic is a real problem year-round . Build in extra time when you’re traveling on Interstate 70 (coming back from the Gunnison).

Colorado locals drive quickly and pass on the left . Please don’t drive in the left lane unless you’re looking to pass.

Fire bans are common in Colorado. If you plan on camping in Colorado , check the latest fire ban regulations for where you’re traveling.

Colorado is a naturally beautiful place, be sure to do your part and practice Leave No Trace. Pack out your trash (this includes fruit peels, wrappers, used toilet paper while hiking, and dog poop).

The airport is rather far from Denver (40 minutes at least), book in some extra time for travel.

The weather is often unpredictable and wild in Colorado , especially in the summer be prepared with a proper Colorado road trip packing list.

Weed is legal and can be found virtually everywhere in Colorado, but it still illegal to smoke in public and smoke and drive. Respect weed laws.

Spend One Week in Colorado

If you can swing it, it’s worth it to spend a few more days visiting Colorado. The ideal amount of time for a road trip in Colorado would be one week.

This way, you can get into the mountains even further. Explore a few of the most unbelievable places in the Rockies that just isn’t feasible with only 4 days.

Although this itinerary covers some amazing places, if you’ve got extra time, check out these awesome Colorado getaway destinations .

Additional Stops for 4 Days in Colorado

Create your own amazing 4 day Colorado road trip itinerary by swapping or adding these fantastic spots.

Ouray in the San Juan Mountains

Known as the “Alps of America.” This place is an excellent addition to your Colorado road trip. Head here to explore some beautiful alpine lake hikes such as the famous Ice Lake . Or enjoy incredible camping, go ATVing and check out the town of Telluride. There are plenty of things to do in Ouray and around, especially if you’re into challenging hikes and off-road driving.

The Million Dollar Highway Scenic Byway in the San Juan Mountains. Easily one of Colorado’s most scenic drives . Extend your trip or swap the San Juans for Black Canyon of the Gunnison. (Note that drives times will increase drastically).

Crested Butte

Famous for its world-class skiing, charming mountain town, and mountain biking spending the day here after Gunnison would be a great way to add a day to your trip.

Carbondale and Aspen

Peep the famous Maroon Bells or embark on the Four Passes Loop – one of the most beautiful backpacking routes in Colorado. Accessible from Glenwood Springs and can be swapped for the Black Canyon on a 4 day Colorado road trip.

B uena Vista, Leadville, and Salida

A famous weekend getaway from Denver, these towns are the gateway to the Sawatch Range. Home to some of Colorado’s easiest 14er hikes – mountains that rise over 14,000 feet above sea level.

Other activities include rafting, mountain biking, fishing, and camping. Great place to stop after coming back from the Black Canyon of the Gunnison.

Grand Junction, Fruita, and Colorado National Monument

Stop here during the shoulder seasons (spring and fall, summers are sweltering) for epic desert scenery. You might just think your in Moab! 1 hour and 30 minutes from Glenwood Springs.

Breckenridge, Frisco, and Dillon

There are plenty of things to do in Breckenridge from stand up paddle boarding to amazingly scenic hikes in Breckenridge. Another great stopover coming back to Denver via I-70 if you have an extra day.

An easy, 40-minute day trip from Denver where you can embark on one of the Boulder hiking trails to see the famous Flatirons up close. Or browse the shops at Pearl Street.

Colorado Springs

Made famous by the stunning Garden of the Gods, Pike’s Peak, and the Air Force Academy, Colorado Springs is another awesome stop. Done either for a night or as a day trip from Denver, there’s lots to see.

If you’re looking to splurge, consider staying at the famous Broadmoor Resort. Ideally add Coloraod Springs to your itinerary on the return from Leadville to skip I-70 traffic.

Great Sand Dunes National Park

Experience the largest sand dunes in the Americas at the Great Sand Dunes National Park. Seeing the monumental dunes with the Sangre de Cristo peaks towering in the background is quite a site. As the only dog-friendly national park in Colorado, it’s fun for fido too!

Add this leg to the trip after the Black Canyon of the Gunnison.

Other Colorado Trip Ideas

Planning a big trip to colorado? Here are some local resources to help you plan:

• Best Free Camping Near Denver
• 29 of the Best Day Hikes Near Denver
• The Most Amazing Fall Hikes in Colorado

Enjoy your Colorado road trip with this iconic 4-day itinerary. Travel like a local with this insider’s itinerary.

Meg Atteberry

Meg is a long-time Colorado local and outdoor industry professional. She's spent the last 15 years hiking, climbing, mountaineering, and canyoneering all over Colorado, Utah, Arizona, and Nevada in search of the best views. She's written for Outside Magazine, REI, Backpacker Magazine, and appeared on the Weather Channel.

Let’s connect!

Meg aka Fox is a 30-something who's born to explore. Toddler mom, queer, and neuro-spicy her favorite things to do are climb in the alpine and camp in the desert. Her mission is to get you out on your greatest adventure.

Grand Excursion 4-Day Tour

Tour office, flagstaff, arizona, 4 days, 3 nights, tour destination, flagstaff, grand canyon, sedona, monument valley, page, from $2,284, multi-day grand canyon excursion.

Discover the best of Arizona on our 4-day, 3-night Grand Canyon Excursion Tour. This tour will cover all of the most sought after sights in Arizona—from the Grand Canyon to Antelope Canyon to Monument Valley. This small-group tour includes all of your meals, hotel stays (double occupancy), and activities, including river rafting, jeep tours, and more.

While on our adventure, you’ll learn the history and geology of some of the most iconic natural wonders in the U.S. from our knowledgable and experienced guides. When you explore the Southwest with Grand Canyon Adventures, we do all the work so that you can simply relax and enjoy the experience. Book your 4-day tour today!

Day 1 - Let's Get Going

At 9 am you depart from the tour office in Flagstaff and make your way to the South Rim of Grand Canyon National Park. Once at Grand Canyon, we will have the entire day to explore the Canyon on the Rim, or join our hiking guide for a short hike down the historic Bright Angel Trail. After lunch, we make our way east, stopping at some of the most magnificent sights on the South Rim. We’ll eventually make our way to the Cameron Trading Post for a traditional Southwest-Navajo inspired meal, and rest for the night in the historic Lodge.

Includes: Lunch, Dinner, Hotel Night, Activities

Not Included: Flagstaff Hotel, Alcohol

Day 2 - Get Ready for a Monumental Day

After breakfast, depart Historic Cameron Lodge and make our way through the painted desert to Monument Valley.

At 1pm, we depart for a 3 hours open air, Navajo tour of Monument Valley.

Departing Monument Valley, we make our way to Page, Arizona where we will stay for the remaining 2 nights.

Includes: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner, Activities, Hotel

Day 3 - Rise and Shine! We have a Day Packed with Adventure.

After breakfast at your hotel, we will make our way to Colorado River Discovery for a 1/2 Day guided raft trip through beautiful Glen Canyon. This trip includes rafting through Horseshoe Bend!

After your rafting tour, we will have a picnic lunch at Glen Canyon Dam, followed by a short trip to Antelope Canyon for a 90 minute guided tour.

Finally, we will make our way to Horseshoe Bend, where you will see one of the most magnificent views in the country.

Day 4 - Red Rock Country, Here We Come.e.

After breakfast, we will depart from Page, Arizona and make our way to the beautiful town of Sedona, AZ.

Experience the red rocks like no one else on a scenic helicopter tour and explore the rest of the city.

Now, all good things must come to an end. After your exciting last day, you will be taken back to Flagstaff.

Price Includes & Tour Overview

• All-inclusive tour (hotels, meals, entrance fees, additional tours)
• Professional guides
• Family friendly

What to Bring

• Comfortable walking shoes or hiking boots
• Sunscreen, hat, sunglasses
• Small backpack for personal items
• Gratuity for guide (industry recommendation is 10-20%)

Contact Us to Book

Related tours.

Team Building Workshop

Grand Canyon Air Tours

Searching Availability...

Need Help Planning Your Trip?

Quick links, area guides.

Machu Picchu 4 Days Tour Package: Prices & Itinerary

Cusco - sacred valley - machu picchu, machu picchu 4-day tour.

• Description

Tour Description

The best way to enjoy the Sacred Valley and Machu Picchu is through our Machu Picchu 4-day tour package. Ideal for those who wish to discover the heart of the Andes and have just a few days. Pisac, Ollantaytambo and Machu Picchu are on the menu. Come and explore the best of Peru with this special tour program.

Tour Information

Cusco, peru.

Availability

All Year Long

Customizable

Tour Program

Day 1: arrival in cusco.

Cusco is located at 3400 (11200 feet) meters above sea level Upon your arrival, a representative from the Machu Picchu Explorer travel agency will be awaiting you to transfer you to your hotel. Cusco, also known as the "bellybutton of the world" is a charming place. You will be able to get to experience its architectural beauty, its traditional neighborhoods, the beautiful Plaza de Armas (its main square), as well as its various gastronomical delights. Cusco's main points of interests are the Cathedral, the Temple of the Sun (known as the Qoricancha), the San Blas district and San Pedro market among many others. We recommend that you take the first day to rest and become acclimated to the altitude. Night in Cusco.

Day 2: Cusco - Sacred Valley - Aguas Calientes

The Sacred Valley lies at 2800 meters above sea level (9,190 meters) Aguas Calientes lies at 2040 meters above sea level. (6,690 feet) Travel time between Ollantaytambo and Aguas Calientes: 1 hour 40 min by train. Today we will explore the Sacred Valley of the Incas, an enigmatic place whose beautiful lands and gorgeous landscapes were intelligently taken advantage of by the ancient Peruvian people. Our first visit will be to Pisac, a greatly important archaeological site whose shape and construction are inspired by a local bird (the Puna partridge). Straight away, we will visit the local market, famous for its original products. In the afternoon, we will go on towards Ollantaytambo, a place that clearly shows how the Incans designed their cities with narrow streets and lovely canals, all in harmony with its natural environment. We will then visit the fortress of Ollantaytambo with its spectacular Incan terraces that will take our breath away, not to mention the spectacular views of the Sacred Valley from them! At the end of the afternoon, we will board the train to our next stop, the town of Aguas Calientes. Night in Aguas Calientes.

Day 3: Machu Picchu

This will be a memorable day during your visit in Peru, given that you will see one of the Wonders of the World that all travelers dream of visiting, we mean the historical sanctuary of Machu Picchu. Early in the morning, our professional guide will pick you up from your hotel to board the bus to the Machu Picchu citadel (20 min trip). Once in Machu Picchu, you will visit the farming and urban zones, as well as its main temples. The tour will take about two hours, after which you will have time to explore the ancient city on your own as well as take additional photographs. In the afternoon, we will return to Cusco on a comfortable train. Night in Cusco.

Day 4: Cusco - Lima

Last day in Cusco! Ideal for doing some additional shopping as well as visiting other points of interest. After experiencing this authentic journey through the Inca's land, we will accompany you to the airport to board your flight.

Hotel 3-Star

2 nights of accommodation in Cusco and breakfast.

1 night of accommodation in Aguas Calientes and breakfast.

Tour Sacred Valley: Tour guide + transportation + Lunch.

Tour in Machu Picchu: Tour guide.

Bus Aguas Calientes - Machu Picchu - Aguas Calientes

Train Ollantaytambo - Aguas Calientes.

Train Aguas Calientes – Ollantaytambo/Poroy station.

Entrance fee at all sites.

Transfer in from Airport to the Hotel in Cusco.

Transfer from train station to the Hotel in Cusco.

Transfer out from Hotel to the Airport in Cusco.

Frequent Asked Questions

What's the weather like in cusco.

In the Andes, temperature changes too much between night and day. During the rainy season (November-March) we have cloudy days with rain at night. On the other hand, during the dry season (May-September) you can expect very cold nights and warm sunny days.

What should I bring for my trip to Peru?

If coming to Peru, make sure to bring proper clothing. We suggest sunglasses, a sun hat, a polar, gloves, and comfortable shoes for walking. If coming during the rainy season, a raincoat is highly recommended.

What is the best time to visit Machu Picchu?

We suggest booking your trip from April to September, since sunny and warm days are common during this period. On the other hand, if coming during the rainy season, you'll likely have less crowds than in the peak season.

How can I book the Huayna Picchu Mountain?

We can add the Huayna Picchu hike to your package as long as there's availibility. We recommend that you contact us at least 3 months before your arrival. To have more details, check our blog post regarding the Huayna Picchu Mountain hike.

What trains are available?

The train included in the package is the Expedition by Peru Rail. However, we can upgrade your train service upon request. Other trains are the Vistadome, the Voyager, the 360°, Hiram Bingham, etc.

What are the hotels like?

We work with 3-star hotels that guarantee a great service (breakfast included, WiFi, heater, 24hrs front-desk, safe, etc.) and are well located in the center of Cusco. To custom your accommodation, don't hesitate to drop us a message.

Is this package safe for children?

We recommend this tour package for children and families since it's easy and safe. All places have easy access and all facilities for visitors. Children have discounts on many sites, so feel free to contact us and get your quotation.

How long in advance should I book?

To guarantee all services, we recommend that you book your package at least 3 months in advance. Last minute bookings are also possible, but subject to availability.

What is the payment method?

Booking your package is very easy and safe. First, get in touch with us. Next, we'll reply with a confirmation. After you validate the program, we'll send you a link for the payment. All payments are online with your credit card.

Need Assistance?

For any questions, don't hesitate to contact us.

Explore More Destinations

Peru has lots of places that you can explore. From the coast to the andes, there's charm all around.

The Perfect 4 Day Itinerary for New York City

What to do in nyc in 4 days.

It can be overwhelming trying to create a 4-day itinerary in NYC. If you’re wondering if and how you can do New York in 4 days, you’ll find the answer here! I’ll show you how to spend 4 perfect days in New York City with my experience of more than 20 visits to my favorite city. And that without stress, with restaurant tips and the most important sights and most interesting neighborhoods.

You'll also love this:

• 3 Day Itinerary for NYC
• 7 Day Itinerary for NYC
• 1 Week NYC Itinerary For Free

So, I have created the following 4 Day Itinerary NYC to make it easier for you. Feel free to use it as is or customize as you’d like – either way, we hope it helps!

This is the best 4 day itinerary for New York City:

Table of Contents

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 1 : Theatre District & Midtown

New York City’s Theatre District is the neighborhood where most Broadway theatres are found in Midtown West. West 54th Street bounds this area to the north, West 40th Street to the south, Eighth Ave to the west, and Sixth Avenue to the east.

Here you’ll find many theaters, hotels, restaurants, and other entertainment venues, as well as Times Square. There’s really no better part of the city to begin your 4- day trip , so let’s take a look a look at what to do in NYC’s Theatre District and Midtown on your first day:

Times Square

As we mentioned, this is the New York City neighborhood where Times Square is located. And even if you’ve never been to NYC, you should already know this is a bustling place. The best part is that there are plenty of things to see and do regardless of whether you go to Times Square during the day or night.  

If you’re looking for activities to do in Times Square, check out Madame Tussauds and National Geographic’s Ocean Odyssey. Or you can simply people-watch or meet someone dressed up as your favorite character – just don’t forget that if you take photos of these characters or interact with them, they’ll expect to be paid.  

When it comes time to eat in Times Square, try the best tacos in America at Los Tacos No. 1. , a slice of authentic NY pizza at Patzeria’s, or choose from hundreds of options at the 24-hour Times Square Diner. If you want something more upscale, head on over to Aureole , Carmine’s, or the Hunt & Fish Club .  

BIG BUS: Get a quick overview of Manhattan

NYC is home to many hop-on, hop-off bus tours offered by Big Bus. So, once it’s time to leave Times Square and move on, get on one of these buses and ride to the next location. Thanks to onboard commentary, this is a great way to see and get to know the area. Not to mention, it’s a nice reprieve if you’re not used to walking so many miles per day.  

Bryant Park

For the next stop on day 1, we have Bryant Park. It’s a charming little gem found right behind the New York Public Library. Bryant Park makes you think you’ve left NYC and entered Paris, and it makes a wonderful place to read a book, enjoy a picnic, or just rest your feet for a few minutes.  

Grand Central Terminal

Grand Central Terminal is just as beautiful and busy as you would expect. Sure, you’ve probably seen it featured in countless shows and movies over the years, but seeing it is believing, as the television does not capture the stunning beauty of the building’s turquoise ceiling or the sheer number of people who travel through here daily.  

Anytime you’re near Grand Central, be sure to stop at Sarge’s Delicatessen & Diner for an authentic, inexpensive breakfast or brunch. If you’re in a hurry, grab a quick bite at Bagel Express; their food is simple, tasty, and affordable.  

One Vanderbilt The Summit

Summit One Vanderbilt is NYC’s newest attraction that recently opened in October 2021. The building altered the look of the city’s skyline, which provides guests with a whole new experience.  

Summit One features a deck, mirrored rooms, and the world’s tallest rack-and-pinion elevator system that features cars that are 90 square feet each, which makes them the world’s largest glass floor elevators!

There are several different packages to choose from, and the one you choose decides how much of the experience you get to enjoy. For example, the Summit Experience allows you access to all 4 floors, and you can step into glass skyboxes that sit 1,000 feet over Midtown below.  

Alternatively, you can choose the Summit Ascent package, which includes access to the entire experience and the glass elevators at their highest point. This is a must-see attraction for anyone looking for the best views of NYC and should definitely be a part of your first day.  

This is perhaps the most famous and expensive street in all of New York City – 5th Avenue or as it’s commonly called “Millionaire’s Row.” This road stretches the entire length of Manhattan both north and south.  

Regardless of whether you buy anything or not, 5th Avenue should be on your itinerary. There’s something about marveling at the most expensive retail space in the world, and it almost makes you feel as if you’re on Ginza in Tokyo or Champs-Elysees in Paris.  

The best shopping areas are found closest to Central Park, where you’ll find stores such as Cartier and Armani. You’ll also find the famous NYC Apple store, where they offer laptops and free internet access.  

Another great thing about exploring 5th Avenue is that you’ll find the Empire State Building, St. Patrick’s Cathedral, and many museums.  

Empire State Building

Speaking of the Empire State Building, this is the next stop on your first-ever trip to NYC. Completed in 1931 as the world’s tallest building, this 102-story skyscraper symbolizes the resilience and hope of NYC and its people. Today, the building is used primarily for office space, but it is also home to two observation decks and many unique exhibits.  

You have a few options for how you can enjoy this iconic building. First, you can travel to the main observation deck at the 86th Floor Observatory. This is the city’s most famed open-air observatory, where you’ll enjoy 360-degree views of the city.  

For those who want to see even better breathtaking views, check out the 102nd Floor Observatory, where you’ll find floor-to-ceiling views that can extend up to 80 miles on clear days. Regardless of whether you go inside, it’s still a legendary building to see in person.  

The Perfect Itinerary For Your New York Trip

This itinerary contains over 50 spots and highlights of the city, including a map that shows you the best way to travel each day, taking you to or past the many big attractions. In addition, we‘ve added our favorite places, from great breakfast spots to start your day right to small bars and restaurants and hidden insider spots.

What awaits you here now is the perfect New York week, because this is what my itinerary would look like if I were visiting the Big Apple for the first or second time right now!

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 2 : Hudson Yards, Chelsea, Meatpacking District

On day 2 of this 4 Day Itinerary NYC, you’ll explore the Meatpacking District, Chelsea, and Hudson Yards, which are all located in Midtown Manhattan . At one time, this was Manhattan’s hub of industry, but in recent times it has become one of the most cultivated cultural neighborhoods in NYC.  

Chelsea is on downtown Manhattan’s west side and is an expensive area with many things to do, such as historical sights, off-Broadway theatre, dining, and more. This area also encompasses the ultra-chic Meatpacking District , where you’ll find posh nightlife, fine dining, and luxury shopping.  

Chelsea is adored by art fans and is well-known for its concentration of galleries. Tourists love these neighborhoods because it’s very walkable and still an up-and-coming section of New York City. Now, let’s take a look at what your second day in NYC has in store for you!

Circle Line - Best of NYC Cruise

The best way to start your second day in New York City is by hopping aboard the Best of NYC Cruise offered by Circle Line. This is the only sightseeing cruise that goes completely around Manhattan, which means you get to see all of NYC’s most iconic landmarks from the comfort of a boat in under three hours!

Landmarks you can expect to see along this cruise are the Statue of Liberty, High Line, Ellis Island, Chrysler Building, Empire State Building, Gracie Mansion, Yankee Stadium, and much more. And the best part is that award-winning tour guides narrate each Best of NYC Cruises, so you’ll learn every significant detail during the trip.  

Explore Hudson Yards

Hudson Yards is one of the most exciting places to visit in New York City, especially if you only have 4 days on the itinerary. It’s home to two of the most photographable places in NYC, so you’ll want to buy tickets for both the Vessel and Edge .  

The Vessel is a honeycomb-shaped building that features 154 floors and sits in the center of Hudson Yards. Climb to the top and take in the views of the Hudson River, or take advantage of all the photo opportunities on the ground. You should know that if you plan to climb this structure, you have to buy tickets, and it’s definitely worth buying them online. Also, they only allow groups of two up at a time (one additional information: right now the Vessel is closed).

Bonus Tip: If you visit NYC around the holidays, Hudson Yards puts on a fantastic light display that you shouldn’t miss!

The Edge Observation Deck

As you’re walking north in Hudson Yards, you’ll notice an eye-catching building that’s made of glass and has a triangular-shaped platform coming from the top. If you take our advice and buy tickets to this attraction, you’ll be standing on that triangle very soon.  

As you walk inside of Hudson Yards’ central shopping mall, it may remind you of Singapore or Dubai with the upmarket feel and pristine finish. Keep moving to the fourth floor, as this is where you’ll find the entrance for Edge. Outside of the attraction, many neat exhibits teach visitors about renewable energy and how waste and air filtration work inside the building.  

The elevator ride that carries you from the fourth floor to the 100th is really exhilarating and a favorite of many people, as it’s like no other experience. Upon reaching the top of Edge, you are met with breathtaking views that are even better during sunset.  

After you finish here, be sure to walk up to 34th Street, past Penn Station, and see the famous NYC Macy’s store! At this point of day two, you may be ready for a meal. If so, check out places such as the Backyard Cafe at Hudson Yards, Wild Ink, Whitmans, The Tavern, or one of many eateries at the Chelsea Market.  

After you’ve had a bite to eat, head on over to the High Line, this is a fan favorite and offers some of the most beautiful views of the local area. Essentially, the High Line is an abandoned railroad track that’s been turned into an urban walkway and park. There are few other places in the world where you can experience such a mixed and improbable use of space – who builds a garden in the sky?

The High Line is an excellent place to take a stroll and see nature. The entire hike is about a mile and a half, but you don’t have to walk the entire way; just be sure to spend time enjoying the art and views.  

Meatpacking District

NYC’s Meatpacking District is a trendy commercial area located on the far west side between the West Village and Chelsea . In this section of NYC, you’ll find luxury designer clothing stores, a portion of the High Line, the Whitney Museum of American Art, and more!  

The cobblestone streets are lined with hip clubs and restaurants that have recently taken over the enormous spaces that once used to be home to none other than meat packaging facilities. So, take advantage of places such as Plunge Rooftop Bar and Lounge , Brass Monkey NYC , and the Famous Sky Bridge .  

Pier 54 - Little Island

Little Island is one of NYC’s newest attractions and is very special, as it’s a park built in the Hudson River atop 132 gorgeous tulip-shaped concrete stilts. It’s located at Pier 54 in Hudson River Park and is easily accessible via the High Line.  

This is a great stop for your second day in New York City because it’s designed with walking paths, gentle trees, and over 35 different species of trees, so it’s a true oasis in the middle of a concrete jungle. The highlight of Little Island Park is the amphitheater built next to the water, and there are also art exhibits and event spaces.  

Visit a Broadway Shows

As your second day comes to an end, grab some dinner at Dos Caminos , Catch NYC, RH Rooftop Restaurant, or Serafina Meatpacking and then make your way to take in a Broadway show. Even if this isn’t usually your scene, you are in New York City and the home of Broadway, so don’t miss out.  

It is worth mentioning that Broadway Shows can be expensive, but the experience is unforgettable. So, plan for this and try to book tickets in advance as they may be cheaper. Some popular shows right now include Hamilton , Wicked , Lion King , and more.

Recommended: These are the best broadway shows in NYC

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 3 : Financial District, DUMBO in Brooklyn

Welcome to your third day in NYC! Today you’ll experience New York City’s Financial District and DUMBO/Brooklyn. The city’s bustling financial heart is home to many glittering skyscrapers and Wall Street. During the workweek and evenings, the sidewalks are busy with young professionals working and filling the bars and restaurants of Stone Street and South Street Seaport.  

Once you get into DUMBO/Brooklyn, you’ll be surrounded by warehouses that have been converted into high-end restaurants, independent boutiques, and trendy cafes. On the north end, you’ll find Jane’s Carousel and on the waterfront is a former tobacco factory converted into a gallery and performance scene.  

Days 1 and 2 were busy, but day 3 has even more in store for you; be sure to drink lots of coffee in the morning and get started early! It’s probably best to grab a quick bite to eat, such as a bagel or donuts. So, let’s look at day 3 of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC:  

Battery Park

Many people know this park at the southernmost tip of Manhattan as a landing and/or departure point of the Staten Island Ferry (a free crossing enables a sensational view to the skyline). Battery Park is one of the oldest public parks in New York and is of historical importance for New York: the first Dutch settlers are said to have arrived here when they founded New Amsterdam.

Statue of Liberty & Ellis Island (Ferry & Stop)

No trip to NYC is complete without stopping at the Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island, and this is especially true if it’s your first time visiting the city. However, as you would imagine, this is a top-rated destination, so it can take a good chunk of your day if you don’t plan properly. For this reason, we strongly recommend that you take the first ferry over to the island in the morning. Not only will this shorten the time it takes to visit Lady Liberty, but you’ll be on Liberty Island with just one group of people. Also, keep in mind that buying a ticket to the attraction is the only way you’re allowed to set foot on Liberty Island.  

After you’ve seen everything there is to see on Liberty Island, hop back on the ferry. It stops on Ellis Island before making its way back to Manhattan. To get the most from this experience, be sure to get off the ferry and check out the National Museum of Immigration on Ellis Island. Yet, only do this if you are a quick explorer or very interested because there is a lot of ground to cover today!

One World Observatory

NYC has a million things to experience, but there’s only one way to see all of them at once. Your journey begins as you hop aboard a SkyPod in One World Trade Center, which travels 102 floors in just 47 seconds until you are transported to the top of the Western Hemisphere’s tallest building.  

After arriving 102 stories high, you find yourself face-to-face with one of the world’s most iconic skylines. Even if you’ve seen the city millions of times, you’ve never seen it quite like this! The Observatory consists of three massive levels where you’ll discover lots of surprises along the way.  

If you are hungry, be sure to stop by the cafe for a delicious bite to eat. Then step onto the Sky Portal and wander high above the crowds below. Finally, go on an interactive tour of NYC with the assistance of a Skyline Concierge who can answer questions and inform you about the city’s long and storied history. Before you leave, don’t forget to stop by One Mix Bar for a glass of Prosecco and one last look at the Earth’s bend before setting off to your next attraction.  

9/11 Memorial and Museum

Though most of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC focuses on the fun and lively side of the city, the 9/11 Memorial & Museum remind us that some of the city’s most crucial parts of history are very dark.  

The Twin Towers used to stand in NYC’s Financial District on Manhattan’s southern tip, but today you’ll find the 9/11 Memorial in their place. The memorial is evocative and free to see, but if you feel up to it (as this is a very powerful and emotional experience), you should consider visiting the museum as well. Yet, regardless of whether you go into the museum or not, the 9/11 Memorial should be part of your 4 day NYC trip.  

Wall Street

Wall Street covers eight city blocks in the Financial District of Lower Manhattan. It runs between the East River in the east to Broadway in the west over to South Street and is the second most famous street besides Broadway.  

Exploring this area can be tricky, but it is a lot of fun. Begin by finding the New York Stock Exchange at the corner of Broadway and Wall Street. Though you can no longer go inside, seeing the building is something special itself. Also, be sure to take advantage of the photo op with the famed charging bull statue!  

Other activities to partake in this area include Battery Park, Trinity Church, Federal Hall, and Stone Street. If you’re hungry when on Wall Street, try out places such as Neapolitan Express, SkyCafe, or one of the many food trucks you’ll find in the area.  

South Street Seaport

As you move south along Wall Street, keep an eye out for South Street Seaport. This section of the neighborhood is located right on the edge of the Financial District and is a lively part of town that’s spent the last several years rebuilding after Hurricane Sandy.  

When you visit the seaport, you can enjoy live music, learn the local history, or grab some food at the Fulton farmer’s market. This area is only a short, 15-minute walk from the stock exchange and makes for the best excuse to rest your feet near the water.  

Brooklyn Bridge

After you’ve seen everything in the Financial District, it’s time to head over the famed Brooklyn Bridge. Of course, you can take a taxi or rideshare across the bridge to make the trip shorter, but if you feel up to it, you can also walk across. The bridge is just over one mile long, and you can even take a guided tour!

DUMBO & Brooklyn Heights

After crossing the Brooklyn Bridge, you’ll find that Brooklyn is home to some of NYC’s most exciting neighborhoods and sites. One that’s gained a lot of attention and adoration is DUMBO, which could also be partly due to its catchy name.  

This waterfront neighborhood has a fascinating and rich history and many activities for visitors to enjoy. Not only is DUMBO a premier art district, but there are also lots of great places to eat, such as Grimaldi’s Pizza , The River Cafe, Jacques Torres chocolate factory, Butler Bakery , and more. Are you looking for shopping? Be sure to check out the newly renovated Empire Stores on Water Street.

Circle Line - Harbor Lights Night Cruise

Finish out your third day in New York City with the Harbor Lights Cruise. Hop aboard one of Circle Line’s state-of-the-art boats and take in the views of NYC twinkling at night. This unforgettable experience lasts about two hours, and you’ll see landmarks such as the Statue of Liberty, the Empire State Building, Brooklyn Bridge, and more.  

Just make sure your camera is ready because you’ll be mere yards away from some of the best photos of your life. And don’t worry; you won’t miss a thing because there will be an award-winning tour guide narrating the City’s story. So, sit back, relax, and take some amazing photos while creating memories that will last forever.  

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 4 : Upper West Side, Midtown, SoHo, Little Italy

Finally, for day 4 of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC, you’ll spend the last day of your trip touring the Upper West Side , Midtown, SoHo, and Little Italy. And just when you thought your vacation wouldn’t get any better, we’re rounding the trip off with some laid-back activities that will help you wind down from the past several exciting days.  

Let’s see what these areas of NYC have in store for you on day number four:  

Central Park

You probably thought we forgot about Central Park, but you know the saying – saving the best for last! Central Park is a masterpiece that Frederick Law Olmsted and Calvert Vaux created. Though the park has gone through extensive restorations over time, the initial purpose of acting as an open-air oasis amid a large, metropolitan city has always stayed the same.  

This national landmark is a must-visit attraction regardless of what season you visit or why you’re visiting. This park has something for folks of all ages, from horse and carriage rides and bike rentals to the Central Park Zoo and activities such as ice skating and Strawberry Fields.  

American Museum of Natural History

After finishing up at Central Park, you may want to stop at one of the many local restaurants such as the Loeb Boathouse, Tavern On The Green, or Maoz Vegetarian and make your way to the American Museum of Natural History.  

This museum is the world’s largest natural history museum, as it spans 4 city blocks and encompasses 25 interconnected buildings. Even if you’re not a fan of museums, this one is a must! It’s home to over 34 million specimens of animals, plants, fossils, human remains, rocks, minerals, meteorites, and human cultural artifacts. Though keep in mind that only a fraction of the museum’s artifacts are on show at any given time.  

Visit the Museum of Modern Art (MoMA) ...

The next stop on our list is the MoMA, or Museum of Modern Art. This art museum is located in Midtown Manhattan on 53rd between Fifth and Sixth Avenues. MoMA plays a significant role in the development and collection of modern art. It’s often referred to as the world’s largest and most influential museum for modern art. And there’s no wonder considering that the MoMA features five floors of art. So, take as much time as you’d like to explore the exhibits and collections before moving on.  

... or the Metropolitan Museum of Art (The Met), or both!

We hope you’re not tired of seeing beautiful art because your next stop is the Met. New York City’s Metropolitan Museum of Art is the United States’ largest art museum that controls a permanent collection of over two million works divided into 17 different departments.  

Seeing over two million pieces of art could take days by itself. So, it’s highly recommended that you plan for this part of your trip and already know what you want to see. At the very least, be sure to find Van Gogh, Hatshepsut Seated, the Temple of Dendur, and the Greek and Roman Statue Court.  

Discover the neighborhoods of SoHo, The Village and Little Italy

SoHo is an upscale residential and high-end shopping area where you’ll enjoy some of NYC’s best people-watching. Stroll up and down the area’s cobblestoned streets , admiring the rows of shops and houses. If you’re in the mood for a sweet treat, be sure to stop by the Dominique Ansel Bakery and order one of the legendary Cronuts.  

If you’re in the mood to keep walking, you can continue on to West Village or Greenwich Village . If not, find a posh SoHo restaurant and enjoy some food. Some of the best places to eat in Soho include Antique Garage, Blue Ribbon Brasserie, and Dig.  

On day 4 of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC, your final stop is Little Italy. The best part is that if you’re not in the mood for trendy SoHo food, Little Italy is the quintessential dining spot ! You’ll find local favorites such as Lombardi’s Pizza, Onieal’s, and Angelo’s of Mulberry Street .  

Yet, Little Italy is so much more than just an excellent place to eat. This area is also home to many historic landmarks, street art, gorgeous architecture, mafia locations, TV and movie locations, and the perfect place to find upscale consignment shops!

4 Days NYC Itinerary

Planning for your first trip to Manhattan can be overwhelming yet exciting. Relieve some of your stress and refer to our 4 Day Itinerary NYC and create the trip of a lifetime!

Just don’t forget to invest in the New York Pass for 4 Days and pack comfortable shoes!

Helpful Tips for Visiting NYC in 4 Days

If it’s your first time visiting NYC, then you may not know some insider secrets that will save you time and money! So, we thought we’d share a few of our own:

Invest in the New York Pass for 4 Days

And just as you’d expect, most of the popular tourist attractions in NYC charge an entry fee, and when you’re paying for yourself and other family members or friends, those costs will add up quickly. However, when you have the New York Pass, it provides you with access to these places, and it’s far cheaper than buying tickets at the door.

Get New York Pass now

or check out our ultimate New York Pass Comparison .

Are 4 days in New York City enough?

I think 4 days for New York is great, because you have more time than if you only visit the Big Apple for a weekend. Of course 5 days, 1 week or even 10 days are even better! In the 4 days NYC as in our itinerary you experience the most important neighborhoods and attractions of the city – and that quite relaxed!

Is $1000 enough for 4 days in New York?

Yes! Because if you know how, you can save a lot of money in NYC! First of all, check out the different sightseeing passes for New York . You can easily save 50% on admission to the best attractions in NYC.

In addition, I recommend my hotel finder for New York . It shows you the best hotels in NYC for every budget . They are proof that good hotels in New York don’t have to be expensive. Another budget tip are the food markets of NYC . Here you can eat very tasty and at relatively good prices. I love them!

What should I pack for 4 days in New York?

This is the most important tip that I have: Wear Comfortable Shoes ! This probably goes without saying, but NYC is best explored on foot, and you will spend a great deal of time walking from one place to another. When you consider that the average New Yorker walks about 10 miles per day just during their daily lives, you’ll see that comfortable shoes are a must!

What else do you need? This depends a bit on your travel time: 2 shorts or long pants, 2-3 t-shirts and a sweater are sufficient for the warm months. In the colder months you should definitely have several warm sweaters and a jacket!

How much is a 4-day trip to NYC?

If you’re in New York for 4 days, the hotel and food will use up most of your travel budget. A 3 star hotel in Midtown Manhattan starts at $100 per night , a 4 star hotel is $150 and prices for a night in a 5 star hotel start at $300 , so expect overnight costs of $300, $450 and $900 respectively for 3 nights.

For breakfast in the diner you can calculate with $15 per person and in the restaurants with $40 per person . Of course, it can quickly be more expensive.

Sightseeing costs: I can’t stress this enough: be sure to check out the various New York City sightseeing passes. It’s a simple and easy way to save 50% off the regular admission price. For the New York Pass for 4 days you can visit as many attractions as you want. It costs you just $200!

How do you plan a 4 day trip?

What is important to me when planning a trip with 4 days in NYC, I have already implemented in the above itinerary. The attractions you see per day should be close to each other, so you don’t waste a lot of time by communing.

Furthermore, you should plan enough time where you just do nothing else but let New York City work its magic on you. This is best done in one of the many cafes or during a walk along the High Line or 5th Avenue.

3 Days in New York: The Ultimate Guide for 2024

7 Day New York Itinerary

1 Week NYC Itinerary For Free: Travel Plans, Sightseeing, Maps & Tips

I'm a true New York fan! Not only have I visited the city over 25 times but also have I spent several months here at a time. On my blog I show you the best and most beautiful spots of the city, so that you have a really good time! You can also find lots of insider tips in our New York travel guide . Also check out my hotel finder for New York !

Get exclusive content, real insider tips, and the best deals in NYC for FREE!

Start of your trip: We will remind you with current events when you are in NYC!

• South Africa
• Afghanistan
• North Korea
• Adventure + Outdoors
• Amusement Parks
• Backpacking Trips
• Boating + Cruises
• Budget Travel
• Bus + Train Travel
• Coasts + Islands
• Country Trips
• Fall Vacations
• Family Vacations
• Green Travel
• Heritage + History
• Honeymoons + Romance
• Inspiration + Guide
• Landmarks + Attractions
• LGBT Travel
• Markets + Bazaars
• National Parks + Reserves
• Nature + Wildlife
• Parks + Gardens
• Pets + Animals
• Photography
• Airlines + Airports
• Budgeting + Currency
• Business Travel
• Celebrity Travel
• Customs + Immigration
• Deals + Rewards
• Family Travel
• Hotels + Resorts
• Luggage + Packing Tips
• Offbeat News
• Photography Tips
• Responsible Travel
• Solo Travel
• Tech + Gear
• Travel Etiquette
• Travel Warnings
• Bars + Clubs
• Celebrity Chefs
• Restaurants + Cafés
• Wine + Vineyards
• Beach Hotels
• Boutique Hotels
• Hotel Openings
• Hotel Reviews
• Luxury Hotels
• Mountain + Ski Resorts
• Spa Resorts
• Vacation Rentals
• Asia Cruises
• European Cruises
• Festivals + Events
• Museums + Galleries
• Style + Design
• Travel’s Best
• Hotel with Agoda.com
• Hotel with Booking.com

Guide to Suzhou nightlife — 5+ what & best things to…

Kunming travel blog — The fullest Kunming travel guide for first-timers

Must eat in Cambodia — 15+ must try, most famous, popular…

What souvenirs to buy in Cambodia? — 11+ best gifts &…

Yunnan travel blog — The fullest Yunnan travel guide for first-timers

Cambodia travel tips — 15+ what to know & things to…

When is the best time to visit Kyoto? — The best,…

When is the best time to visit Malaysia? — The best,…

When is the best time to visit Busan? — The best,…

Best coffee shops in Bali — Top 10 best cafes in…

Where to eat in Shenzhen? — 9 best restaurants in Shenzhen

Must eat in Malaysia — 15+ most popular, famous dishes &…

Top hotels in Siem Reap — 8+ best places to stay…

Top hotels in shanghai — 15+ best hotels in Shanghai

Top hotels in Malacca — 10+ good & best hotels in…

Top places to stay in Bali — Top 10 best areas…

10 must-know things for your best first time European river cruise

Top 3 best luxury cruises in Halong Bay, Vietnam

Cherry blossom festival Korea 2024 — Top 5 cherry blossom festivals…

Ghibli museum blog — The fullest Ghibli museum guide for first-timers

Kyoto festival — Top 10 best events & most famous festivals…

National Palace Museum Taipei blog — What to see in National…

Japanese waterfall — Top 10 most beautiful waterfalls in Japan in…

19+ most beautiful towns in Europe every tourist need to visit…

Georgia travel photos — 20+ captivating photos show Georgia is heaven…

Explore Damnoen Floating Market — The oldest floating market of Thailand

Visiting Fenghuang Ancient Town — One of the most charming ancient…

Mekong Delta travel blog — Beyond rivers of Southwestern Vietnam

14 reasons why you should travel when you are young

Shigaraki Tanuki – An animal symbol of good luck in Japan

Living in the charms of cave houses in Andalucia, Southern Spain

20+ jaw-dropping tiny homes around the world

Japan itinerary 4 days — how to spend 4 days in japan to visit naria, tokyo, fuji.

Summer has come, I packed up again and hit the road, this time to the land where the sun rises the earliest in the world — Japan, dubbed the land of the rising sun, the land of cherry blossoms and one of the world’s most beautiful autumn places as well. I didn’t have too much time for this trip because I planned for some long upcoming trips, so I chose to go to Japan for a short time, enough to embrace the rainfall in Tokyo, strolling around Shinjuku, visit Naritasan Shinshoji Temple and fruit picking in Yamanashi.

• What to do in Japan? — 100 things to do in Japan & best, must things to do in Japan
• Japan itinerary 9 days — How to spend 9 days in Japan to visit: Osaka – Kobe – Kyoto – Nara?
• 8 recommended onsen (hot springs) you should visit when traveling in Beppu, Japan

When is the best time to visit Kyoto? — The best, worst, affordable & best season to visit Kyoto

• When is the best time to visit Japan? — The best, worst, cheapest, affordable & best season to travel to Japan

So, what to do and how to spend 4 days in Japan? Let’s check out our suggested Japan itinerary 4 days 3 nights on my field trip in summer to visit Narita, Tokyo and Mount Fuji with a very detailed plan from how to get to Japan, where to go, what to do as well as the trip cost.

Japan itinerary 4 days: Fly to Japan

I chose to flying with Vietnam Airlines because I want to fly directly and Vietnam Airlines allows up to 40kg of free checked baggage, which is convenient because every trip to Japan I often bring back a bunch of beautiful things, delicious food and buy all kinds of miscellaneous things, usually at least 30kg will be needed to store. There is a small note, you should bring one normal suitcase and another empty suitcase to be able to shop comfortably.

The airfare from Saigon, Vietnam to Tokyo ranges: USD 439 – USD 657/round-trip. You should book one month in advance to get low fare.

How to spend 4 days in Japan?

Here are my detailed suggested Japan itinerary 4 days 3 nights.

Day 1: Saigon – Narita, visit Shinshoji temple in Narita, try Shabu Shabu hot pot and stay overnight at Toyoko Inn.

Day 2: Tokyo – Odaiba, visit Asakusa Shrine in Tokyo, take photos with Tokyo Skytree, visit Akihabara electronics district, go to Teamlab Planets – an impressive digital museum, go to Odaiba to see the Statue of Liberty and overnight at Grand Hotel Kanachu in Kanagawa near mount Fuji to visit it on the next day.

Day 3: Tokyo – Kawaguchiko – Fuji: Visit Yamanashi Fuehukigawa Fruit Park to pick seasonal fruits, experience an earthquake at Earthquake Simulation Center, visit Oishi Park flower garden, visit Oshino Hakkai ancient village. Overnight at Route Inn and bath onsen.

Day 4: Fuji – Narita, shopping at Aeon Mall and fly back to Vietnam.

Japan itinerary 4 days: The most impressive places and best things to do of the trip on 4 days in Japan journey.

Naritasan shinshoji temple, narita.

Shinshoji Temple left an impression on me because of the peace and grandeur of its architecture, coming here you will feel as to live in a completely different space. This place is not crowded but the area is extremely huge, to walk and explore entire the temple area you will need a whole day.

Address: 1 Narita, Chiba 286-0023, Japan Hours: 8AM–4PM Founder: Kanchō Daisōjō Opened: 940 AD

teamLab Planets TOKYO

In Tokyo, there is not only one teamLab museum but also 2, one is teamlab Planets in Toyosu and another is teamlab Borderless in Odaiba. You can go to 1 of 2 because each place has extremely impressive digital galleries. I chose teamlab Planets because that day Borderless closed for maintenance. But really overwhelmed with the exhibitions that hit all the senses, here you will be able to step into the star-lit room, go into the luminescent lake, and watch the night sky full of glowing flowers.

Address: 6 Chome-1-16 Toyosu, Koto City, Tokyo 135-0061, Japan Hours: 9AM–8PM Entrance fee: 3,200 JPY Website: https://teamlabplanets.dmm.com/en/

Peach picking in Yamanashi

During this trip to Japan, I had the opportunity to visit Yamanashi Prefecture to visit fruit farms, Yamanashi Prefecture is considered the fruit garden of the whole of Japan with a variety of fruits grown all year round.

June is the peach harvest season. Delicious, succulent and ripe. When I arrived, I saw many green grape vines, ready for August to be harvested. Coming to Yamanashi, except for winter, you can participate in fruit picking activities at the garden in the rest of the seasons: Cherry (April-May), peaches or apples (July 6), grapes (November 8).

Lavender Garden – Oishi Park in Kawaguchiko

Coming here, you will not only see lavender flowers but also many other flowers. Don’t forget to try the lavender ice cream here for only 350-400 yen.

Address: ２５２５番地の１１先 Oishi, Fujikawaguchiko, Minamitsuru District, Yamanashi 401-0305, Japan

Getting there: The way to go to Oishi Park is relatively simple, from Tokyo you can depart from Shinjuku and Shinagawa stations, there are trains to Kawaguchiko Station. From Kawaguchio Station, take another bus trip following the instructions of this link to get there. https://goo.gl/maps/NUetGQwETH4ZhrWSA

Oshino Hakkai Ancient Village

Oshino Hakkai is the perfect choice for my summer trip. Located in the area of ​​the five lakes around Mount Fuji, this ancient village has eight clear spring water ponds which completely formed by melting ice from Mount Fuji for over the past 80 years . That’s why the water is crystal clear.

Address: Shibokusa, Oshino, Minamitsuru District, Yamanashi 401-0511, Japan

Getting there: The way to get to Oshino Hakkai is very simple. From Tokyo, take the train from Shinjuku to Kawaguchiko Station, then there will be a bus that runs every an hour from Kawaguchiko Station to the old village.

Japan itinerary 4 days 3 nights: Trip cost for 4 days in Japan

Airfare: USD 615 because I bought it 2 weeks in advance

• Transportation: $8.77 (by public transport)
• Shabu-shabu hot pot: $13.16
• Stay: Toyoko Inn : $140.22/night/double room for 2 people
• Traveling from Narita to Tokyo: $21.94/person
• Getting around Tokyo: $26.32
• Tickets to teamlab Planets: $28.48/ticket
• Lunch buffet at Carne Station Ginza: $10.97/person
• Dinner: $13.16
• Grand Hotel Kanachu : $140.40/night/double room for 2 people

• Tickets to the peach garden: $13.16
• Gettingn from Kanagawa to Misaka noen: $39.49
• Lunch at Houraiya: $10.97
• Earthquake Museum: $20.18
• Traveling all day: $70.11 because sometimes I had to take a taxi
• Dinner at Route Inn: $13.16
• Stay: Route Inn Hotel: $140.40/night/double room for 2 people ( Agoda.com or Booking.com )

• Getting from Fuji to Narita: $61.43 by bus and train
• Lunch: $10.97
• Transfer from Aeon to the airport: $7.02

A TOTAL OF $1,405.08 for this self-sufficient trip.

Some best day tours, trips, activities and transfer services, tickets in, to and from Tokyo you can refer to

• Private Narita International Airport Transfers (NRT) for Tokyo 23 Wards, Hakone, or Karuizawa
• Private Haneda International Airport Transfers (HND) for Tokyo 23 Wards, Hakone, or Karuizawa
• Airport Limousine Bus Transfers from/to Narita and Haneda International Airport (Free Wifi Onboard)
• Tokyo Amazing Sightseeing Bus Day Tour
• Tokyo Highlights Private Day Tour
• Nikko Day Tour from Tokyo
• Mt Fuji & Hakone Day Tour: Lake Ashi & Ropeway Day Trip from Tokyo
• Nikko Cultural Day Tour from Tokyo
• Tokyo Subway Ticket (24, 48, or 72 Hours)
• Tokyo Skyliner and Tokyo Subway Ticket
• Shuttle Bus Transfers (One Way/Round Trip) from Shinjuku/Ikebukuro to Tokyo Disneyland or Tokyo DisneySea
• Tokyo Disney Resort Park Ticket
• Klook Pass Greater Tokyo
• SHIBUYA SKY Ticket
• Warner Bros. Studio Tour Tokyo – The Making of Harry Potter Ticket
• Skyliner Narita Airport Express Ticket
• TeamLab Planets Ticket
• TOKYO SKYTREE® Ticket
• Limousine Bus Narita or Haneda Airport to Tokyo
• Skyliner Narita Airport Express With Tokyo Subway Ticket
• JR Tokyo Wide Pass
• Sky Hop-on and Hop-off Bus Pass
• 4G Prepaid Sim Card (JP Airports Pick Up) for Japan
• 4G WiFi (BKK and DMK Airport Pick Up) for Japan (Unlimited Data)
• JR Pass for Whole Japan (7, 14, or 21 Days)

Are you finding more top things to do in Japan: Tours, activities, attractions and other things? Let’s check it out here.

Related articles

RELATED ARTICLES MORE FROM AUTHOR

Guide to suzhou nightlife — 5+ what & best things to do in suzhou at night.

When is the best time to visit Philippines? — The best, worst, affordable & best season to travel to Philippines

Nanjing itinerary 2 days — What to do & how to spend 2 days in Nanjing perfectly?

What to do in Battambang? — 12+ must, top & best things to do in Battambang

Gyeongju 1 day itinerary — How to spend one day in Gyeongju, South Korea

Boracay travel blog — The fullest Boracay travel guide for first-timers

Editor picks.

Guide to Suzhou nightlife — 5+ what & best things to...

Must eat in Cambodia — 15+ must try, most famous, popular...

Popular posts.

What to buy in USA? — 17+ must buy in USA...

Must buy souvenir in Taiwan — Top 17+ most famous, cheap...

Must buy in Korea — Top 23 cheap, famous & best...

Popular category.

• Inspiration + Guide 1447
• Trip Inspiration 469
• Thailand 209
• Food + Drink 203
• Coasts + Islands 193
• South Korea 168
• Vietnam 166
• Travel Photos 144
• Work for Us
• Terms & Conditions
• Privacy Policy

The Ultimate 4 to 5 Days in Washington, DC Itinerary

Last Updated on January 29, 2024

by Audrey Webster

Disclaimer: This article contains affiliate links. That means if you click a link and make a purchase, we may make a small commission. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. For more information, see our privacy policy.

Planning out a Washington DC itinerary can be a challenge when you consider all there is to see and do in the US capital. History aficionados will fall in love with Washington DC. There are few other places in the world that house so many museums and monuments from a single country’s history.

During your 4 or 5 days in Washington DC, you’ll have access to the Smithsonian’s iconic network of museums, historical monuments, and slices of history that you won’t easily find anywhere else.

Table of Contents

How Many Days in Washington, DC?

If you’re wondering how many days to spend in Washington DC, it can vary dramatically based on what you want to see. It’s a city that is loaded with activities that could keep you busy for several days.

You should plan to spend a minimum of 3 days in Washington DC. This will grant you ample time to catch the highlights at a leisurely pace. Even then, you’ll still have to prioritize what you see during your visit to the nation’s capital.

With 4 days in Washington DC, you have a little more time to see the museums and historical landmarks.

5 days in DC allows you to take a day trip to a nearby site like Arlington Cemetery, Mount Vernon, or somewhere even further. You can easily hop on the metro for a quick day trip out of the city itself.

You also could easily use this time to explore some of the other neighborhoods around DC, such as Dupont Circle or Georgetown.

Getting To & Around Washington, DC 

If you’re coming from far away, you’ll likely arrive in Washington DC by plane. There are three major airports: Dulles, Ronald Reagan, and Baltimore-Washington.

Visitors can use the metro to reach inner-city Washington DC from these airports. Alternatively, rideshare services and taxis are easily available and you can also book a transfer ahead of time.

DC is also well-connected via rail to a number of other cities on the East Coast, including New York, Boston , Philadelphia and even Providence. You can view train schedules here.

When getting around the city, take the metro. It’s clean, reliable, and reaches all the city’s main landmarks. That said, you should walk around the National Mall and Tidal Basin. You can easily reach most major monuments and museums just by walking around the National Mall.

The Tidal Basin offers its visitors a pleasant walk any time of day while getting to see iconic memorials and monuments. 

4 to 5-Day Washington DC Itinerary

For the days with two museums, we recommend visiting one in the morning and one in the afternoon after taking a lunch break. You can mix and match depending on your interest, but consider the highlights listed below to be the most highly recommended stops for your DC itinerary. 

Day 1 – White House, Tidal Basin, Memorials & More!

While the sites on the first day of this itinerary can be visited independently it is also possible to take several guided tours such as this bus tour , this bike tour or this evening tour if you want to see the monuments at night.

Washington Memorial and White House

We’ve added the White House and Washington Memorial to the top of your itinerary because they are can’t-miss sites in Washington DC. These two marble structures are iconic.

The Washington Monument stands at just over 555 ft tall. There is an observation deck at the top that grants visitors excellent views of the National Mall.

You can also book a tour of a portion of the White House to see some of the building’s most famous rooms. 

Lincoln Memorial

The Lincoln Memorial is a favorite monument for many first-time visitors to Washington DC. It’s the site of Martin Luther King Jr.’s “I Have a Dream” speech. Where he stood at the top of the monument’s stairs is marked by an engraving.

The reflecting pools before the monument make for an iconic Washington DC photo op. Make sure to check out the Lincoln Memorial at night too. The monument lit up is a stunning sight to see. 

Walk the Tidal Basin

Walking the Tidal Basin is an absolute must no matter what time of year you’re visiting, but the spring and fall are the most stunning.

Every spring the cherry blossom trees bloom casting the basin into a beautiful pink floral park. Here you’ll find the Jefferson Memorial, Franklin D. Roosevelt Memorial, and MLK Jr. Memorial.

You can rent paddle boats to explore the basin from the water. It’s a highlight of your Washington DC itinerary. 

Vietnam Veterans and Korean War Veterans Memorials

Continuing your walk of the National Mall, visit the Vietnam and Korean War Veterans Memorials. The Vietnam Veterans Memorial, also known as “the Wall”, is a long black granite wall with the names of 58,000 Americans who died in the Vietnam War. It’s a solemn and thought-provoking memorial.

Next, the Korean War Veterans Memorial pays homage to the over 1.5 million of soldiers who served. These 19 stainless steel statues march in a triangle formation toward an American flag. 

World War II Memorial

The World War II Memorial is a stunning white memorial dedicated to the 16 million Americans who served in World War II. It’s a circle of 56 columns that represent all U.S. states and territories around the Rainbow Pool.

Here is another memorial you want to make sure you visit after dark. At night, lights shine on the columns and from the pool making it an eye-catching site. 

Day 2  – Museum of Natural History, National Archives Museum & the US Capitol

Smithsonian national museum of natural history.

Perhaps one of the most iconic museums in the United States is the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History. It’s an absolute must for all visitors to Washington DC.

The museum, part of the Smithsonian museum network, is an especially great stop for a Washington DC itinerary that includes children and they are free to enter.

There are over 147 million items on display that range from marine life to geology to ancient Egypt. You can spend anywhere from two hours to about half a day exploring this museum and there is no doubt that it is one of the best things to do in Washington DC. It is also possible to take a guided tour if you want to learn more from a guide.

If you’re more interested in American History, then consider visiting the adjacent Smithsonian National Museum of American History during this time instead. Here you can find exhibits that are important to the history of the USA and it’s a wonderful place to visit.

National Archives Museum

Where can you find the true Declaration of Independence, the American Constitution, the Bill of Rights, and the surviving copies of the Magna Carta all in one place? The National Archives Museum.

Make sure you reserve a timed slot in advance to avoid waiting in the long line at the entrance. Here is the only place where visitors can view the country’s founding documents. 

U.S. Capitol & the Library of Congress

The U.S. Capitol building is one of the most impressive working government buildings in Washington DC. With its towering white marble dome, it stands out in the National Mall. Inside, you can see where both houses of Congress reside.

Visitors can enter the capitol, but you must make a reservation in advance. You cannot visit the Capitol without a reserved tour – you can book a small group tour here.

Nearby you’ll find the Library of Congress. Here is where you’ll find hundreds of years’ worth of historical books and documents in a beautifully-designed building. 

Day 3 – Air and Space Museum & the Holocaust Memorial Museum

Smithsonian national air & space museum.

The Smithsonian’s Air & Space Museum is a treasure trove of the country’s most iconic advancements in air and space technology. Here you’ll find Amelia Earhart’s Lockheed Vega 5B, the Apollo 11 Command Module, the Wright Brothers’ 1903 Wright Flyer, and much more.

There is also an IMAX theater, Einstein Planetarium, and flight simulators to enjoy. You can easily spend several hours wandering the massive hanger filled with excellently-preserved planes. You can organise a guided tour here.

United States Holocaust Memorial Museum

Visiting the Holocaust Memorial Museum is a sobering experience. The stories of Holocaust survivors are told through film footage, photography, artefacts, and more. It tracks the rise of Hitler through propaganda and World War II.

There are several special exhibits–most advise a minimum age warning due to the graphic nature of the material on display. Portions of the museum have walls raised so young children cannot see over them.

It’s an informative and impressive museum that is well worth adding to your itinerary if you have 3 days in DC. 

Day 4 – Museum of African American History, National Gallery & the JFK Center

Smithsonian national museum of african american history.

If you’re seeing Washington DC in 4 days, you should mix and match your museums to make sure you see the ones you’re most interested in. However, ensure you visit the National Museum of African American History.

This museum is a relative newcomer to the National Mall, opening in 2016. It contains over 40,000 artefacts that trace the experiences and lives of African Americans from the country’s earliest years to present day.

The museum is expertly curated and you could easily spend half a day wandering its halls. If you want to learn more about African American history, you can take a half-day tour that includes some time in this museum.

National Gallery of Art

Art fans should prioritize a visit to the National Gallery of Art. There are two wings: the East Building which is home to modern art and the West Building home to classic art pieces. The collection is huge.

You could easily spend a couple hours or an entire day wandering between these two buildings. Don’t leave without visiting the rooftop where you’ll get great panoramic views of the city. You can organise a guided tour here.

Those traveling with children or who simply don’t want to visit more museums, then consider using this time to visit the Smithsonian National Zoological Park – also known as the National Zoo. Easily reached on public transport, this zoo is free to enter and you can see incredible animal exhibits – including Giant Pandas!

John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts

From dance performances to musicals, the shows at the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts is an excellent way to spend an evening.

You’ll want to look at the schedule and reserve your tickets in advance. However, if you don’t have time to see a performance, visiting the center is still worth it.

There is a rooftop garden and bars that boasts incredible views of the National Mall. There is an art gallery and sculpture garden to explore as well. It’s a great addition to any trip to Washington DC.

Day 5 – Arlington National Cemetery, Rock Creek Park or Mount Vernon

Arlington national cemetery.

Located just across the Potomac River in Arlington, Virginia is one of the nation’s most famous cemeteries.

Arlington National Cemetery is about one square mile and houses the graves of over 400,000 service members as well as former presidents. Highlights include John F. Kennedy’s grave and the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier.

If time allows, you should watch the changing of the guard at the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier. This memorial is dedicated to all those who have lost their lives, but their bodies were never found or identified.

You can opt for a tour of Arlington Cemetery if you want to learn more about the memorials and gravesites. Arlington isn’t far from DC itself, so it’s easy to add on to a 4-day itinerary or if you’re seeing Washington DC in 5 days. 

Rock Creek Park

If you’ve had enough of being in the city, head to Rock Creek Park. Here you’ll find over 32 miles of hiking trails, tennis courts, biking paths, and a golf course. It’s a great way to spend a day or afternoon after spending a few days seeing as much of Washington DC as possible.

Should you want to explore the park further, pay a visit to the Nature Center, the Peirce Mill, and the Old Stone House. 

Mount Vernon

A visit to Mount Vernon is a step back in history. It’s the former home of the nation’s first president, George Washington.

Here you’ll find an immaculately preserved home, the tombs of George and Martha Washington, and a memorial dedicated to the enslaved people who worked on the property. Over 96 million people have visited Mount Vernon since it opened to the public in 1860. 

There are several options for getting to Mount Vernon. It’s located about 15 miles from Washington DC. You can take a guided tour bus , public bus, or Metrorail. If you have a rental car, parking is also available at Mount Vernon, but the lot fills up very quickly.

If you want the more scenic route, consider taking a boat along the Potomac River. Note that you will not be allowed on the property without a ticket – you can pre-book tickets here.

Where to Stay in Washington, DC

Phoenix Park Hotel – This hotel is an excellent choice for mid-range visitors looking. They have many great rooms to choose from, a central location for exploring the city and breakfast available in the mornings.

Hotel Washington – Those looking for a high-end stay in the US capital will love this swanky hotel. Located within easy reach of the National Mall, they have numerous delightful rooms to choose from along with plenty of great amenities – including a spa/wellness center and an on-site restaurant/bar.

Highroad Hostel Washington, DC – Budget and solo travelers will love this highly-rated hostel located in the center of DC. Situated close to all of the top attractions of the city, they have both dorms and private rooms available along with good common spaces.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Washington, DC hotels!

Whether this is your first time seeing Washington DC or you’re a return visitor, this itinerary will help guide your exploration of the US capital.

Are you visiting Washington, DC? Have any questions about this itinerary? Let us know in the comments!

Related Posts:

The Essential Guide to Visiting Phoenix in Winter

Banff vs Jasper: Which National Park to Visit?

10 Best Stops on the Seattle to Spokane Drive

About Audrey Webster

Audrey Webster is a writer for The World Was Here First. She is an Oregon native who has visited countries across the globe and currently spends her weekends exploring the Pacific Northwest and surrounding states. Her approach to traveling combines exploring famous tourist sites and wandering off the beaten path to discover new destinations.

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

• Traveler Services
• Why Travel to Japan
• Special Experiences
• Accommodations & Culinary Experiences
• Japan Itineraries
• Signature Journey Collection
• Luxury Ryokan and Hotel Collection
• Hakone and Shizuoka
• Kanazawa and Onsen Areas
• Kyoto and Nara
• Mie and Wakayama
• Our Company & Approach
• Our Difference
• How We Work
• Testimonials
• Awards and Designations
• Japan Corporate Travel Services
• Partners & Affiliations
• Photo Credits
• Privacy Policy
• Terms and Conditions
• Request Information
• Client Questionnaire
• Bespoke Itineraries

Signature Journey Collection Japan Tour Itineraries

From $3,000 per person per day, double occupancy

Welcome to our Signature Journey Collection , representing some of the most amazing and timeless places that remain off well-trodden paths and encompass fabulously beautiful, interesting and culturally enriching areas throughout Japan. Our shorter duration trips are perfect for travelers in the Asia region, cruise shore excursions and for those passing through Japan seeking a very special experience. These Japan tour itineraries can also be added as extensions to any of our bespoke ‘tailor-made’ tours and can be joined with each other. Combined with some of the absolute best and eclectic accommodations in the country, our journeys are masterfully crafted to meet the interests and passions of our clients.

From the northern island of Hokkaido and its great outdoors to the spiritual centers of Koyasan and Ise to the art and hot spring rich areas on the Island of Kyushu to remote and untouched islands in Japan, let JapanQuest Journeys offer you the chance to explore Japan’s mysteries and delights undisturbed and in-depth, unlocking thousand year-old secrets one by one.

Featured In

Join Our Mailing List

Sign up for the JapanQuest Journeys mailing list to stay in contact and receive our latest news.

• Luxury Accommodations
• (202) 455-0095 (US)
• Contact Us →
• Back To Top

Remote and Untouched Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

Revisit the mainland 2-days later when you will take a 2.0-hour hydrofoil journey on the open sea from Yakushima to Kagoshima. In Kagoshima, stroll through Senganen Garden also known as Isoteien, a Japanese style landscape garden along the coast. One of its most striking features is its borrowed scenery of Sakurajima (a live volcano) and Kagoshima Bay. From Kagoshima, venture by car to Kumamoto on a 2-hour and 20-minute drive then a 30-minute ferry ride to Unzen where you will stay at a beautiful ryokan.

The following morning of day four you will be driven to Nagasaki where you will be introduced to Koshi-byo Confucian Temple, one of the few beautiful shrines dedicated to the Chinese philosopher Confucius in Japan and Nagasaki Peace Park commemorating the atomic bombing of Nagasaki on August 9, 1945. A monument around a black pillar marks the atomic explosion's epicenter in the nearby Hypocenter Park.

Enchanting Kyushu Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

Journey to Onta the following morning which will bring you back to the stone ages where rustic pottery is made before one's eyes. A giant mallet fed by a river running through the center of Onta adorns this small village where one can see rocks crushed to make clay in this age-old setting of stone kilns. Moving onward you will travel through central Kyushu to the pottery town of Karatsu located on the Sea of Japan coast. One of Japan's world-renowned pottery towns, Karatsu is a must-see for yakimono (pottery or ceramic ware) fans. Already a well-known pottery town, Karatsu's Korean influences elevated it from useful ceramic ware to art. Karatsu-made vessels are some of the finest in Japan. In Karatsu, visit with several well-known potters at their studios. Spend the night at a splendid Japanese inn in Karatsu that will make you feel right at home.

We will begin day three's journey in Arita, the town from which the styles of Japanese ceramics most well known in the West derives their name. Arita, the cradle of porcelain manufacturing in Japan, is a quiet town among mountains, located in the western part of Saga. Ri Sampei, a potter from Korea, discovered a fine-quality white porcelain mineral in Mt. Arita-Izumi-yama. This was the beginning of Arita's development into an internationally known town of porcelain. Imari is the European collectors' name for Japanese porcelain wares made in the town of Arita. Following your visit to Arita, take a short drive to Okawachiyama, a village bustling with many kilns in operation and an opportunity to observe potters at work creating their artistic pieces and shops to meander around. Visit the magnificent Imaemon Museum of Ceramic Antiques. After a day spent seeing beautiful ceramics, you will journey southward along glistening Omura Bay to the mountain resort of Unzen on the Shimabara Peninsula where you will spend the evening at a lovely inn in the midst of wooded surroundings.

The Great Outdoors Japan Tour Eastern Hokkaido (4 Days/3 Nights)

Day one of this journey begins with a ninety-minute flight from Tokyo’s Haneda Airport to Hokkaido’s Kushiro Airport. You will be met at the airport and driven approximately thirty- minutes to Kushiro Shitsugen National Park, Japan’s largest wetland and home to the country’s only population of Japanese cranes. You will explore the park on a series of walking trails offering a splendid opportunity for nature viewing and bird watching. From Kushiro Shitsugen National Park you will travel onwards approximately ninety-minutes to Hazel Grouse Manor where you will stay during the duration of your trip in Eastern Hokkaido. Hazel Grouse Manor is a quintessential English style manor house with eight suites offering exquisite food and excellent service.

The following day, you will visit Akan National Park, considered by many to be the crown jewel of Hokkaido, with its stunning lakes. Visit Lake Mashuko, ringed by white birch forest and often enshrouded in mist. Lake Mashuko was revered by Hokkaido’s native Ainu as being the “Lake of Gods.” You will also visit Kussharoko, Hokkaido’s second largest lake in a beautiful mountain setting. Alternatively, you may choose to spend the day at leisure fly-fishing, canoeing or horseback riding.

On day three of your trip to Eastern Hokkaido you will venture forth on a two-hour drive to Shiretoko National Park, a UNESCO World Heritage site that is home to some of Japan’s most rugged and beautiful landscape. You will drive around the Shiretoko Peninsula where mountain streams cascade over cliffs into the sea and where in the autumn, bears can sometime be seen snatching salmon from mountain streams.

You will have a leisurely morning on day 4 of your stay in Eastern Hokkaido before being driven thirty-minutes to Nakashibetsu Airport for your ninety-minutes return flight to Tokyo.

Pure Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

Visit Seisuiji Temple, one of the most famous temples in Sado Island, erected in 806 Daido-era. The temple is quite famous for its crystal stream well up from the earth, in the mountain behind the temple. From Seisuiji, venture to Chokokuji Temple. Legend has the founding of Chokokuji by Kukai (Kobo Daishi) in 807, but there is no written record of him ever visiting Sado. The exiled Emperor Juntoku is said to have renamed the temple with the same kanji characters as Hasedera Temple in Nara or the Hasedera in Kamakura. One particular treasure of Chokokuji is a wooden statue of an eleven-headed Kannon. Afterwards, take a private tour of Hokusetsu Sake Brewery where you can experience the inner workings of this famed brewery that was selected to supply Nobu Restaurants with its delicious sake.

On day two, visit the beautiful Myosenji Temple with its five-story pagoda and interesting architecture. Following this, experience one of Sado's important Noh Theaters for a behind the scenes experience of this important art form. About one third of the Noh Theater stages in Japan are found on Sado Island. Here, the local color of Noh is so prosperous that Sado also boasts more types of Noh stage than you will find in any other one place. With our special access, you can partake in personal Taiko "drumming" lessons conducted under the auspices of the celebrated Kodo Drummers who are based on Sado Island and have toured the world for over 30 years. Taiko drumming is very rhythmic and awe-inspiring in its power, beat and spirituality. Pure fun to listen and partake. You will also get an inside tour of Kodo Village where the Kodo drummers train and rehearse. While in Sado you will stay at a Japanese style hotel with hot spring baths.

On day three, visit the studio of one of the most famous and talented basket makers in Japan. Afterwards, return from Sado via hydrofoil and experience a fabulous ryokan outside of Niigata, moving to your next destination on day four.

The Land and Sacred Places Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

The following day, continue south through forests and mountains on a two and half hour drive to Shuzenji on Shizuoka's Izu Peninsula. It is lovely strolling through the quaint hot-spring village of Shuzenji with its historic buildings and bamboo groves. The mystery of Shuzenji is what you cannot see from the streets---its world-class ryokans and onsens tucked away in perfectly groomed gardens hidden away from view. Frequented by foreign dignitaries, they offer only the finest of Japanese hospitality in a relaxing, refined and quintessential setting. While in Shizuoka, enjoy the beauty of its agricultural landscape of tea plantations, mikans and wasabi fields. Try matcha tea making and harvesting a bit of green tea for yourself. Shizuoka is a leading agricultural producer in Japan and you will experience hands-on learning in this region. The evening will be spent at one of Shuzenji's beautiful ryokan or Japanese inns.

On day three, travel further south by car and train via Nagoya to Ise where you will visit the most ancient and holiest of Japanese shrines, Ise Jingu. Of Japan’s thousands of Shinto shrines, Ise Jingu is paramount. The area comprises hundreds of subsidiary shrines but the main structures you will see will be the Outer Shrine (Geku dedicated to the goddess of harvests, homes and food) and the Inner Shrine (Naiku dedicated to the sun goddess and mythical ancestor to the emperor and the Japanese race). The inner sanctum of Naiku contains one of the great imperial treasures; the sacred bronze mirror said to have been presented to the first emperor by the sun goddess Amaterasu herself. The shrines are made of fresh hinoki (cypress) wood from the Kiso Mountains. The evening will be spent in Toba an area of stunning beauty near Ise.

The following day four visit Futamigaura, known for its Husband-and Wife Rocks (Meoto-iwa), two curious outcrops standing in the sea connected by a sacred straw rope when they are symbolically wed each year.

The Mountains Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

The following day two you will retrace the footsteps of travelers of the Edo-period on a beautiful stretch of the Nakasendo, a road that linked Tokyo to Kyoto during Japan’s feudal period. Visit Kisohirasawa, Narai and Tsumago, evocative Edo-period post towns. Fall back in time in Tsumago, a living museum of old Japan, including some wonderful lacquer ware indigenous to the area. Stay in a beautiful contemporary ryokan in the remote area of Kaida, with a fabulous view of the mountainous terrain and green fields which are filled with colorful flowers in the warmer months.

On day three of this journey, you will venture on a beautiful sojourn through the stunning Japanese Alps to Takayama, a living museum rich with charm located in the heart of central Japan. Its well-preserved homes and shops allow one to glimpse into the Japan of a bygone era. Takayama is a very quaint town and quintessentially Japan. Takayama is ideal for exploring by foot. Visit nearby Takayama Jinya, Japan's only existing provincial government office of the Edo Shogunate or heads of Japan’s feudal regime. Sojourn through Takayama's picturesque Sanmachi Quarter, home to rows of exquisitely preserved merchant houses in which there are a number of sake breweries and stores selling miso or bean paste, products for which Takayama is famous. Takayama also has a plethora of small antique shops to wander around. Enjoy tasting sake at Takayama's many sake breweries. You may choose to spend this evening in a lovely Japanese inn located in the forest near Takayama or at hotel with a panoramic view of the surrounding mountains.

In the morning of day four, journey first to the colorful morning vegetable and flower market. Afterwards, continue your exploration of Takayama.

The Spiritual Japan Tour Itinerary (3 Days | 2 Nights)

Your pilgrimage this first day will start at Hayatama Taisha. You will then travel approximately thirty-minutes to the stunning Nachi Taisha. Following your visit to Nachi Taisha, you will have a ninety-minute journey through mountainous landscape where upon arriving in the Kumano Hongu area. Afterwards, you will embark on a 45-minute walk along the unpaved and beautiful Kumano Kodo Trail with a local trail guide to Hongu Taisha. At the conclusion of your walk you will be at Kumano Hongu Taisha. At Hongu Taisha, you will receive a talk and special blessing from the Shrine's Shinto Priest. Following your visit to Kumano Hongu Taisha you will drive approximately ninety minutes to Nanki Shirahama where you will spend the evening at a Japanese style property with wonderful hot springs.

The following day two will start northward through the heart of mountainous Wakayama to Mt. Koya, Japan's best-known Buddhist mountain retreat. In 2004, UNESCO designated Mt. Koya as a World Heritage Site. Mt. Koya is the heart of Shingon Buddhism and the resting place of the sect's founder, perhaps Japan's best-known Buddhist, known as both Kukai and Kobo Daishi.The eight-forested peaks of Mt. Koya reach eight hundred meters into the clouds, surrounding the high plateau with a sense of serenity and boasting over one hundred temple complexes. Kongobuji Temple, erected by the Shogun Toyotomi Hideyoshi in 1592 and containing fine Kano School (famous Japanese school of artists from the 14th to 16th centuries) screen doors, is the focal temple. A number of the many temples provide temple-stays or shukubo for travelers. Staying on Mt. Koya is one of the best ways to experience Buddhist life in Japan: bathing before a dinner of traditional shojin-ryori or Buddhist vegetarian meal, and rising with the birds for the morning prayers with the monks. It is an absolutely gorgeous and spiritual setting.

Contemporary Arts, Gardens and The Venice of Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

From Takamatsu you will journey by ferry to Naoshima Island, which has emerged as a center of contemporary art in Japan. On Naoshima you will spend two evenings at Benesse House, designed by famed Japanese architect Tadao Ando as a museum of contemporary art that splendidly blends in with its natural surroundings. Visit the newest museum on Naoshima designed by Tadao Ando which opened in 2010, the Lee Ufan Museum. The museum features works by the Korean contemporary artist Lee Ufan, who was born in Korea but has been working and teaching in Japan. On display are large installations made of stone, concrete and huge slabs of iron, as well as a number of paintings from earlier in his career.

The following day two, take a water taxi on a short ride to the Island of Teshima. On Teshima, rent bikes, choose your route and visit Teshima Art Museum and Les Archives du Coeur. Uniting the creative visions of artist Rei Naito and architect Ryue Nishizawa, Teshima Art Museum stands on a hill on the island of Teshima overlooking the Inland Sea. Shaped like a drop of water, the museum lies in a corner of the spacious grounds surrounded by once-fallow rice terraces that have been restored with help from local residents. "Les Archives du Cœur" compiles recordings of heartbeats from around the world for exhibition, listening, and the creation of an archive. This project is made up of three elements: an installation using recordings of heartbeats, a listening room where visitors are able to listen to archived recordings, and a recording room where their own heartbeats can be recorded. Continue your exploration of Naoshima begun the day before including the Art House Project where artists transform spaces into contemporary artworks while restoring old buildings and shrines. Included in Art House Project are works by artists such as James Turrell and Tatsuo Miyajima. Follow this unique encounter with a must see walk-through of the Chichu Art Museum which is one of the prettiest museums to be encountered anywhere – built specifically to house the works of Claude Monet, Walter De Maria and James Turrell.

From Naoshima on day three, travel on a ferry ride to the Port of Uno where you will travel to Kurashiki where your day will be spent strolling along Kurashiki's willow lined canals, hump-backed stone bridges and dozens of white washed, black-tiled kura or rice storehouses experiencing its immaculately preserved merchant quarter that dates to the Edo period. Also, visit the Ohara Museum of Art with its wonderful collection of Western art including works by Monet, Renoir, Gauguin and Picasso. With a splendid panoramic view from atop Mt. Tsurugatayama, visit historic Achi Shrine that was built to hold back invading sea tides; in time it became the very heart of prosperous Kurashiki. Relax in a fabulous ryokan in the town center.

On day four, travel to Okayama and Koraku-en Garden where you will sip tea in a garden tea house while viewing Okayama Castle. Outside of the City is Kibitsu-jinja Shrine, an old shrine with its main sanctuary built in the peculiar Kibitsu-style, which joins the two roofs of the Irimoya-style with a pitch on the two sides on the upper part and on the four sides at the bottom. Meet with a Shinto priest who will bestow private blessings on you in a very sacred room in a ceremony unique to this shrine.

Scenic Hokkaido, Japan Tour Noboribetsu Onsen and Shikotsu Toya National Park (4 Days/3 Nights)

The following day you will journey onwards by car on a seventy-minute drive to Lake Toya, part of the splendid Shikotsu-Toya National Park. The active volcano that stands proudly near Lake Toya with white smoke rising above it is Mt. Usu. Lake Toya is an ice free lake whose beauty and clarity can be admired year-round. This evening and the following night you will stay at the majestic The Windsor Hotel Toya offering stunning, panoramic views of Lake Toya, Uchiura Bay and the surrounding mountains. This afternoon and the next day you may select from a variety of activities while enjoying the natural beauty of the Lake Toya area: go trekking, canoeing, horseback riding and/or golfing.

Day four of your journey will begin with a scenic ninety-minute drive through the Shikotsu Toya National Park to Lake Shikotsu, a serene caldera lake that is the deepest in Hokkaido. After taking in the beauty of Lake Shikotsu travel onwards approximately thirty-minutes to Chitose Airport for your flight to your next destination in Japan or you may choose to spend an evening in Sapporo, a delightful city that is the capital of Hokkaido.

Yellowstone Itinerary 4 Days: The Ultimate First Time Visitor Guide

By: Author Mark and Kristen Morgan

Posted on Published: June 18, 2020  - Last updated: January 17, 2024

Categories North America Travel Blog

Yellowstone National Park is an extraordinary and unique landscape. After visiting the park in both April and October, we know how challenging but rewarding planning the best Yellowstone National Park itinerary can be. We’re going to share all of our knowledge about Yellowstone National Park here, including an amazing 4 days itinerary example.

Above ground, Yellowstone can be described by every synonym of the word breathtaking. But lurking just below the surface is a super-volcano known as Yellowstone Caldera.

As hot magma rises from Earth’s Mantle toward the Crust, pressurized heat escapes in the form of thermal geysers, creating a spectacle worthy of millions of tourists each year.

This ultimate Yellowstone National Park Itinerary explains how to get to Yellowstone, all the best things to do, where to stay and of course walks you step-by-step through 4 amazing days ticking off everything that makes this place so special.

Let’s get stuck into planning your Yellowstone itinerary!

Why Visit The World’s Original National Park?

What is the fist thing you think of when you consider Yellowstone National Park? Probably super heated geysers blowing steam high into the sky, right?

We’d seen geysers before high up in the Chilean Altiplano and they were the one thing we knew for sure we would see here at Yellowstone.

However, the billowing plumes of pressurized steam had stiff competition for our favorite aspect at the park.

Spotting wildlife immediately becomes more exhilarating than looking at steam, the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone is immeasurably more awe-inspiring than steam, and the sheer scale of the world’s very first National Park blows the mind more than steam.

Now, that’s not to say we weren’t impressed by the gigantic geothermal caldera and all of its features, trust us, we were. It’s to let you know Yellowstone is far more than simply clouds of hot, sulfuric acid smelling steam.

Yellowstone is one of the most immense USA national parks and it covers a total of 2.2 million acres of land. Yes, it’s a little bigger than your back yard!

So in a nutshell, why should you visit Yellowstone National Park?

• Beautiful scenery throughout the entire park, plenty of wow-factor moments
• Some of the best wildlife spotting in America – including Grizzly Bears
• Fantastic hiking opportunities surrounded by nature at its finest
• Majestic waterfalls with multiple viewpoints cascading into deep canyons
• And of course Geysers, Hot Springs, Steaming Rivers & Bubbling Mud-Pots

Why 4 Days Itinerary For Yellowstone National Park?

For us personally, Yellowstone National Park had been sky high on our travel bucket list since – well, forever! Who hasn’t always wanted to visit one of Earth’s most unique and natural marvels?!

But we made one mistake the first time we visited. We only gave ourselves 3 days to explore this vast volcanic landscape. We needed 4.

Needless to say we never made the same mistake again second time we visited Yellowstone and planned a full 4 days itinerary.

If you’ve already been to the park before and this is a second or third visit, you might not need as many days. However, if you are planning for a first visit to Yellowstone, plan for 4 days.

Here’s why:

• With 3 days in Yellowstone you aren’t going to have enough time to see and do everything. You’ll spend a lot of time driving, and you’ll rush some of the most popular attractions. Plus, you will have to compromise on some things.
• With 5 days in Yellowstone you are going to find you have already seen and done everything. You will spend a lot of money on accommodation and you should instead drive down to Grand Teton if you do have this spare time.

You will strike the perfect balance between costs, attractions, drive time and being efficient if you plan a 4 days in Yellowstone National Park itinerary.

Grand Teton : Combine Yellowstone with the  stunning  Tetons for the ultimate 6 or 7 day vacation. Our extensive Grand Teton National Park  travel guide covers the 7 best things to do and an ultra scenic 2 day itinerary.

Park Statistics And Factfile

Address : PO Box 168, Yellowstone National Park, WY 82190 Website : nps.gov/yell Phone : (307) 344-7381

Park Hours : All day, every day Entrance Fee : US$ 35 Vehicle (free with America the Beautiful Annual Pass )

Backcountry camping : Permitted, you will need a backcountry permit Accommodation : Hotels, Lodges, Cabins and Campgrounds

Annual Visitors : 4 million Peak Season : July-August

Size: 2.2 million acres Yellowstone Caldera : 45 by 30 miles Last Eruption : 640,000 years ago Geothermal Features : 10,000 Geysers : 300

How To Get To Yellowstone National Park

Okay, we’re talking about Yellowstone and 3,500 square miles of wilderness here! The park has several entrance and exit points, so getting to Yellowstone will depend entirely on where you begin your journey.

There are no fancy names for the entry points, simply the direction they bring you into the park from. But we have included the nearest town to each entrance for reference:

• North – Gardiner, MT
• Northeast – Cooke City, MT
• East – Cody, WY
• South – Jackson, WY
• West – West Yellowstone, MT

Once inside the park, getting around is easy thanks to a well maintained 142-mile figure of 8 road network known as ‘Grand Loop Road’.

Be aware this road will be almost unbearably busy if you visit in Summer, we even experienced some traffic flow issues in snowy October!

Here’s a factor to consider that will impact your 4 days in Yellowstone National Park itinerary:

• Are you visiting only Yellowstone, from point A with a plan to return to point A afterwards in a loop?
• Or is Yellowstone part of a wider road trip?

For example, on our first visit we drove West from South Dakota to Yellowstone, before heading South.

We visited Badlands , Custer State Park and Mount Rushmore , and stopped at Devils Tower National Monument on the way across Wyoming. We then took the South exit out of Yellowstone to Grand Teton National Park.

Therefore, we entered and exited Yellowstone at different entrances. That meant we had to work out how to efficiently see the park on both loops of the figure 8 road without driving back on ourselves.

Consider which entrance you plan to use on the way in and out when planning your visit.

Important Note : When we visited Yellowstone in October after a heavy snowfall, many of the roads in / out of the park were closed. Please be sure to check current road conditions  before setting off.

Popular Yellowstone National Park Road Trips

Salt lake city to yellowstone.

• Option 1 : Take I-15 North to Idaho Falls, then 20 to Yellowstone West entrance (320 miles / 4h 45m).
• Option 2 : Take I-80, 16 and 89 to Jackson, WY and Grand Teton before entering Yellowstone South entrance (330 miles / 6 hours).

The route via Jackson is far more scenic but takes much longer once you factor in driving through Grand Teton.

Read our amazing 7 day  Salt Lake City to Yellowstone and Grand Teton  road trip itinerary for more information.

Denver to Yellowstone

• Option 1 : Take I-80, 287 and 26 to 191 which is the link road between Grand Teton and Yellowstone South entrance (500 miles / 8h 30m).
• Option 2 : Take I-25, 26, 20 to Cody, WY and 14 into Yellowstone East entrance (545 miles / 8h 30m).

South Dakota to Yellowstone

• From Mt Rushmore, drive through Spearfish Canyon and take I-90W towards Buffalo, WY.
• Scenic Byway US-16 from Buffalo to Ten Sleep (Cloud Peak Skyway) is awesome.
• Take 31, 20 and 14 to Cody, WY and then on to Yellowstone East entrance (440 miles / 8 hours).

Read our popular 10 days road trip itinerary from Mount Rushmore to Yellowstone for a day by day break down of best things to do.

North Dakota / Billings to Yellowstone

• Take I-94 to Billings, I-90 briefly and US-212 (known as Bear Tooth Highway).
• This is the route we eventually took first time as we were forced to enter Yellowstone via its Northeast entrance due to road closures.
• Bear Tooth Highway is one heck of a scenic drive – particularly when covered in snow (150 miles / 3 hours).

Jackson, WY / Grand Teton to Yellowstone

Take US-191 scenic road (John D Rockefeller Jr Road) all the way to Yellowstone South entrance (80 miles / 1h 45m).

Need help organizing your visit to Yellowstone? Our popular 60+ page Yellowstone Guidebook can help you with planning every aspect of your trip.

Best Airports To Use For Yellowstone

Yellowstone is enormous and if you’re traveling from further afield in the US or internationally, you will of course need to fly.

Our in depth guide to the 6 best airports near Yellowstone will help you plan exactly which airports to arrive into and depart from near the park.

Pro-tip : Remember, you can fly into one airport and leave from another.

There are a dozen or so airports ranging in size close to the park, here’s  a summary of the best airport options along with which entrance you would enter Yellowstone:

• Bozeman, MT (North entrance)
• Cody, WY (East entrance)
• Jackson, WY (South entrance)
• Yellowstone airport, MT (West entrance – seasonal)
• Salt Lake City, UT (South entrance)
• Denver, CO (East entrance)

International travelers can fly directly into SLC or Denver and either drive or take a connecting flight to on of the smaller regional airports listed above.

For US based travelers, check prices for all airports from your closest origin airport. The smaller and closer airports are far more expensive than SLC or Denver. You will pay for convenience!

• When it comes to booking flights, we always use and recommend  Skyscanner flights search engine  for finding the best value in air tickets.
• Similarly, when we need to pick a car up at the airport, we always use  Rental Cars hire car search engine  to find most options and best value for vehicles.

What Are The Best Things To Do At Yellowstone National Park?

Yellowstone is blessed with having an endless amount of amazing things to do for visitors to include on a 4 days itinerary. You could spend a month here and still not see or do everything this incredible place has on offer.

The only way to plan effectively is by structuring the park into regions. Therefore, in this guide we will break down each region of the park and explain some of the best things to do in each.

Read our ultimate list of the 30 Best Things To See And Do In Yellowstone National Park next for a detailed overview of the most popular geysers, waterfalls, hikes and wildlife spotting areas.

There’s a lot of information coming your way but we will organize it and clearly display everything on a map!

First up, let’s take a look into what makes Yellowstone National Park one of the most sought after landscapes in the world, before we break the park down into 6 distinct regions.

Yellowstone National Park Wildlife Spotting

Wildlife spotting is one of the biggest drivers of tourism to Yellowstone National Park and it has to be a major part of your 4 days itinerary.

This is one of the best places in America to observe a wide range of wild animals in their natural environments.

You have the opportunity to see Grizzly Bears – seldom seem in the lower 48 US States – if that is of interest to you. Personally, we didn’t mind NOT seeing a grizzly!

However, Grizzlies are just the beginning. If you are lucky you might also see Black Bears, Wolves, Elk, Pronghorn, Bighorn Sheep, Moose, Antelope, Mule Deer, Coyotes, Lynx, Mountain Goats, Cougars and Bald Eagles.

It is extremely difficult to predict exactly where these animals are going to be at any given time. But you can give yourself the best shot at seeing wildlife by visiting the right places at the right times of day.

That being said, if these particular areas become busy with humans, animals are likely to move to quieter areas. In truth, we saw more wildlife when we didn’t go looking for it, instead we waited for them to come to us.

Top-tip : If you see small gatherings of people with professional looking photography / telescopic equipment, there’s a good chance of spotting wildlife. However, be polite, don’t make a lot of noise. You might even get a chance to look through their equipment .

Wildlife Respect & Safety

Something vitally important to remember is respect for wildlife. Keep your distance, don’t try to feed them and don’t intimidate the wildlife.

Our number one disappointment with Yellowstone was other tourists. Yes, it can be exciting to see an animal, but that doesn’t mean slamming on your brakes and abandoning your car in the middle of the road so you can take a picture.

More than once, we witnessed altercations between tourists who wanted the best angle from their car window. Be civil toward each other, as well as animals and the environment .

We use the word safety and that’s not for the animals, its for you.

Each year, Yellowstone National Park has to deal with injured tourists who thought they could get close to animals, but they were wrong. Bear in mind (pun intended!) that some of these animals can become dangerous if threatened.

Yellowstone Geyser Basins & Hot Springs

There are over 10,000 geysers and hot springs within the 2.2 million acres of Yellowstone National Park, making this the largest geyser field on the planet.

Almost all geysers and hot springs throughout the park can be viewed from safe distances along wooden boardwalks. It is important to stay on designated board walks, otherwise you may lose a toe or two!

We will cover Yellowstone’s most famous geysers and hot springs within each region of the park below.

You will either have to visit the lesser known basins or plan your visit outside of high season (more on seasons later) if you’re looking for a less crowded experience

Remember there are also bubbling mud pools, smaller colorful geysers and lesser known hot springs. If Old Faithful and Grand Prismatic Spring are too busy, try again early or late in the day.

Yellowstone Hiking

Hiking is less synonymous with Yellowstone than geysers and wildlife, however, you should not overlook this aspect of visiting the park.

Did you know there are over 900 miles of hiking trails here? The problem is, how do you choose which trails to hike?!

To begin with, err on the side of caution by checking Yellowstone’s backcountry situation report   – particularly if you intend to hike away from major trails.

This live updated report will inform you of bear activity, trail closures, rising water levels and depth of snow among other important aspects.

Hiking is the best way to escape crowds and see Yellowstone’s best sites from different (and quieter) perspectives. Plus, you drastically increase your chances of spotting wildlife away from roads and hordes of tourists.

The downside to hiking at Yellowstone National Park is how much time you will lose from an already tightly packed itinerary. Can you really afford to lose a day hiking a 10 mile trail?

That depends on what your goals are and how you like to explore new places.

There are a number of shorter hikes well worth your time, but the longer hikes / backcountry hiking should be reserved only for those who are more interested in hiking than sightseeing.

Is this your second or third vacation to Yellowstone? Try hiking more on this visit if you’ve visited the famous geysers on previous trips.

Grand Canyon of Yellowstone / Yellowstone Upper and Lower Falls

The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone has allured avid photographers to the park for decades. Upper Falls is an impressive spectacle but Lower Falls is the major draw and has to be included on your 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary.

The Yellowstone River crashes into a stunning canyon from 308 ft (twice the height of Niagara Falls), making Lower Falls a paradise for lovers of dramatic scenery.

The best part?

There are various viewing platforms along both the North and South Rim drives running adjacent to the river. Each observation point offers its own perspective of the mighty falls, plus the chance to escape big crowds.

Our top recommendation is to visit the falls on more than one occasion and preferably at sunrise (for more special sunrises see our guides to Sunrise in the Grand Canyon and  Mesa Arch in Utah ).

Although temperatures were below zero in mid-October, we witnessed a gorgeous sunrise over Lower Falls with just a handful of others.

Let’s Break The Park Down Into Regions

As we mentioned earlier, it’s hard to apply a typical list of ‘best things to do’ list for a place like Yellowstone, then expect to turn up and tick them off easily. It is simply too vast a landscape.

Many of the ‘must visit’ sites are spread out across the National Park, meaning planning your visit can become a little overwhelming (one of the reasons we recommend your Yellowstone itinerary to be 4 days and not 3 days).

Therefore, we will break down the park into regions. Take a look at the image below depicting the 6 major regions of Yellowstone:

• Mammoth Hot Springs (North)
• Tower-Roosevelt (Northeast)
• Canyon / Grand Canyon of Yellowstone (Central / East)
• Norris Geyser Basin (Central / West)
• Old Faithful / Upper Geyser Basin (Southwest)
• Yellowstone Lake / West Thumb (Southeast)

Within each region, we will discuss the following where appropriate:

• Most prominent Geysers / Hot Springs
• Best hiking trails
• Wildlife spotting opportunities
• Must visit miscellaneous attractions
• Lodging / Camping

Note : At the end of this section, study the interactive map showing all accommodation and sites of interest. The map will give you an idea about which regions will be top of your wishlist.

1. Mammoth Hot Springs (North)

Mammoth is one of the more built up areas inside Yellowstone National Park and is located just 5 miles from the North entrance.

You will find a hotel, cabins, a grand dining hall, post office, gas, campground, shopping and Albright Visitor Center. Nearby attractions are all within a stones throw of Mammoth village.

Mammoth Geysers and Hot Springs

A spectacular complex of terraces formed by calcium carbonate (travertine) dominates a hillside just minutes from Mammoth village.

By far the busiest attraction in Mammoth, these terraces are best seen at sunrise to avoid crowds and enjoy the first light of day burn through hazy steam in the morning.

Mammoth Hiking Trails

Mammoth isn’t known for epic hikes and we would recommend not using up any time on your 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary with a hike here.

That being said, if you have extra time in the area, there are 2 shorter trails worth looking into:

• Boiling River  – a popular short hike (1 mile roundtrip) and don’t forget your swimwear!
• Lava Creek  – mid-distance (7 miles round-trip) passing by Undine Falls – 60 ft waterfall.

Mammoth Wildlife

Although this area is not usually regarded as prime wildlife spotting territory, we saw our fair share around Mammoth. There were around 30 or 40 bison walking through Mammoth village during our second visit in April, which was really cool to see.

You will more than likely see mule deer wandering the hotel and dining hall car park when you arrive. We also saw pronghorn and elk but bison are well known to be regular visitors to the area.

Black bears can be found around Mammoth. If you want to find one, look in forested areas around less busy areas away from the travertine terraces.

But if you want to avoid bears (particularly if you head up to the terraces for sunrise) is to make noise, talk and clap intermittently.

Mammoth Accommodation

Campgrounds – Mammoth campground is the only campground open all year at Yellowstone. This is a first come first served site and costs US$ 20 per night. More information .

Hotel and Cabins – Mammoth offers a Frontier Cabin, Hot Tub Cabin, Suite, Premium Hotel Room and Cabin without bath. We stayed in a Frontier Cabin and it was perfect with a wonderful hot shower. More information .

2. Tower-Roosevelt (Northeast)

Tower-Roosevelt is located to the Northeast of Yellowstone and is one of the lesser built up areas of the park. You can find gas, primitive lodging and camping here.

This region is best used as a gateway for wildlife spotting in Lamar Valley and hiking Mt Washburn before continuing on to another region for accommodation.

Unfortunately, the section of road between Tower and Canyon has been completely closed for the entirety of both our visits.

Therefore we are yet to hike Mount Washburn or see Tower Fall. There’s always the third time, right?!

Tower Hiking

Mount Washburn is one of the most popular hikes in Yellowstone National Park and one of the most iconic hikes in the US thanks to its panoramic sweeping views stretching as far as Grand Teton on a clear day.

At 10,243ft (3,107m) and with just a 2.5 mile one-way hike from Chittenden or 3 mile on-way hike from Dunraven Pass, the rewards are more than worth your efforts!

Specimen Ridge is a long point to point hike beginning just after turning onto the road into Lamar Valley. It is the perfect trail for those searching for wildlife who want to get away from the main road filled with tourists.

You can hike for 10 minutes or an hour before turning around but you can expect to see wildlife, particularly early in the morning.

Tower Wildlife

Tower Junction is where Yellowstone’s top rated wildlife viewing area ends, as US-212 reaches grand loop road from the Northeast entrance.

This area is known as Lamar Valley and it is the place to be if you are visiting Yellowstone for wildlife observation.

We strongly recommend you visit early or late if you want a real chance of seeing abundant wildlife. You’re all but guaranteed to spot Bison roaming but you can see much more if you time it right.

We entered Yellowstone via the Northeast entrance and drove the entire way through Lamar Valley but it was right before midday (and snowy!) so we didn’t see many animals.

Note : If you are visiting Yellowstone primarily for wildlife spotting, Tower Fall campground is the closest accommodation to Lamar Valley.

Tower Attractions

Yellowstone River Overlook  and Tower Falls are the two major attractions around Tower-Roosevelt region.

Tower Falls is a 132 ft narrow needle-like waterfall. A 4 mile roundtrip trail allows you to see the Yellowstone River flowing powerfully through a gorge.

The trail is family friendly but there are steep cliffs for children to be aware of.

3. Canyon (Central / East)

Canyon is one of the most popular places to set up base in Yellowstone thanks to its central location and volume of accommodation, with over 500 rooms available.

You will also find a good selection of food at Canyon Lodge Eatery, which is more like a canteen than restaurant.

Canyon is your best choice if you prefer to stay at just one place for your entire Yellowstone visit. Right around the corner is Yellowstone Falls.

Grand Canyon of Yellowstone and Yellowstone Falls

Prepare to be blown away!

This is one sight you will not forget from your Yellowstone National Park itinerary. We encourage you to visit each and every viewpoint along both North and South rim drive – and do that more than once.

For the best photographs, arrive before sunrise to Artist Point . We couldn’t get enough of these dramatic views as the Yellowstone River pounds its way through the breathtaking canyon.

Canyon Hiking

There are no hikes worth mentioning around Canyon for a Yellowstone itinerary only lasting 4 days. With more time, maybe!

We don’t consider each of the small trails along North and South Rim roads to Yellowstone falls viewing platforms as hikes.

Canyon Wildlife

Just South of Canyon Village and Yellowstone Falls, you will find Hayden Valley , regarded as the second best part of the park for wildlife spotting.

This is the place we saw by far the most wildlife including coyotes, mule deer, bison and our first ever bald eagle . We saw bald eagles here again the second time we visited so you do stand a good chance of seeing one soaring around this area.

Again, it is best to arrive early or late to increase chances of spotting animals but be warned – Grizzlies roam alongside Yellowstone River. We never saw a grizzly, but we did see a lone Grey Wolf from afar, which was awesome .

Canyon Accommodation

Campgrounds – Canyon campground is open late May to Mid Sept. There are 273 reservable sites at a cost of US$ 32 per night. More information .

Hotel and Cabins – Canyon offers the most accommodation by far at Yellowstone. It is open from the beginning of June until early October.

You can choose between a Western Cabin, Standard Lodge Room, Superior Lodge Room, Premium Lodge Room and Suite.

We snagged a free upgrade to Premium Lodge Room (from Western Cabin) which was a welcome escape from the cold nights! More information .

4. Norris Geyser Basin (Central / West)

Norris is the oldest and hottest of Yellowstone’s thermal regions, with the highest recorded temperature measuring a whopping 459 f (237 C) just over 300m below the surface.

This region is where your Yellowstone geyser hunting experience springs to life and you can witness the tallest active geyser in the world.

Norris Geysers and Hot Springs

At Norris geyser basin you will find several thermal geysers in very close proximity. The area is easy to explore via boardwalk and has to rank as one of the must visit regions on your 4 days in Yellowstone National Park itinerary.

Waters around Norris basin are acidic, rather than alkaline, which means bacteria creates those colorful patterns you associate with Yellowstone.

Steamboat geyser – the world’s tallest at 300ft – went years with barely any activity but in 2019 there were 48 eruptions.

But there’s no guarantee boiling hot water will erupt the day you visit and you could be standing around a long time waiting. We saw it blow a few times but not to it’s maximum height.

Norris Hiking

Artist’s Paint Pot – This 1 mile hike beginning just South of Norris Geyser Basin is definitely worth a quick stop off.

After a short walk through a forest you will come across a small open area featuring thick grey mud bubbling pools and blue/grey/brown colored holes in the ground.

Highly recommended easy hike.

Norris Region Campgrounds

Norris campground – Open late May to late September and just to the North of Norris Geyser Basin. There are 111 first come first served sites at a cost of US$ 20 per night. More information .

Maddison Campground – Located 14 miles Southwest of Norris and open late April to mid October. Longer opening times and central location make this one of the most popular campgrounds at Yellowstone. There are 278 reservable sites for tents and RV’s at US$ 27 per night. More information .

5. Old Faithful (Southwest)

Old Faithful is the iconic Yellowstone geyser everyone knows about before visiting the park.

But the Old Faithful region has much more on offer, including perhaps the most eye catching feature of all: Grand Prismatic Spring.

This region contains Lower, Midway and Upper Geyser Basins – which means a lot of geyser hunting. You can find almost all amenities here, except a campground.

Old Faithful Region Geysers and Hot Springs

Lower Geyser Basin – Fewest geothermal features in the region but one of the most sought after spots for sunset in Great Fountain Geyser along Firehole Lake Drive (closed in Winter).

Midway Geyser Basin – Smaller in area but possibly the most rewarding in terms of natural beauty.

The vibrant colors of Grand Prismatic Spring are difficult to appreciate from its boardwalk, so you will need to climb Fairy Falls Trail for that postcard perfect view.

Excelsior Geyser can not be overlooked as it’s on the same boardwalk and produces an enormous amount of hot steam, often shrouding the Firehole River.

Upper Geyser Basin – The crown Jewel, Old Faithful is located here along with the highest density of geothermal activity in the park.

Old Faithful erupts once every 35-120 minutes for anywhere between 1-5 minutes. This isn’t the most spectacular of geysers, it’s just the most regular and predictable.

Don’t miss Morning Glory Pool at Upper Basin.

Old Faithful Hiking

Fairy Falls – Begin at Fairy Falls Trailhead for an easy 5 mile roundtrip to one of Yellowstone’s most spectacular falls. This trail also offers postcard-perfect views over Grand Prismatic Spring.

Observation Point – If you want to escape the crowds (knows as ‘the bleachers’) sitting in a half circle around Old Faithful, take this moderate 1.5 mile roundtrip hike.

You will be rewarded with a much more tranquil viewing platform.

Old Faithful Accommodation

Old Faithful Lodge – Simple Frontier Cabins are more affordable and offer views over Old Faithful. More information .

Old Faithful Inn – 327 rooms and open from early May to mid October, but get in early as this is the most requested lodge in Yellowstone. More information .

Old Faithful Snow Lodge – Open mid December to end of February, only accessible by over snow vehicles. Wide range of rooms available at various prices. More information .

6. Yellowstone Lake / West Thumb (Southeast)

One thing you probably don’t know about – and certainly won’t appreciate until you see it – is the sheer scale of Yellowstone Lake. It is enormous!

We’ve combined West Thumb Geyser Basin and Grant Village with Fishing Bridge and Lake Village into the one region here.

They all hug the lake edge in Yellowstone’s Southeast corner. All amenities can be found at both locations on the lake.

Yellowstone Lake Geysers & Hot Springs

At the Southern end of Yellowstone Lake you will enter West Thumb Geyser Basin. What makes this place unique is stunning views of Yellowstone Lake and snow capped mountains behind geothermal features.

A boardwalk loops around West Thumb Basin allowing you to see the most impressive features while enjoying some of the best views in the park.

Look out for Fishing Cone and Big Cone Geyser in the lake.

Yellowstone Lake Hiking

Yellowstone Lake isn’t the place to visit if you’re looking for serious hiking trails on your 4 days itinerary. However, there are two easy going walks ending with excellent views over the lake and West Thumb.

Lake overlook – Easy to moderate 1.5 mile roundtrip hike from West Thumb parking lot for elevated views over West Thumb Basin.

Storm Point – Easy 2.5 mile roundtrip beginning close to Fishing Bridge for close up views over Yellowstone Lake.

Yellowstone Lake Wildlife

The Northern part of Yellowstone Lake is where Yellowstone’s East entrance (from Cody) arrives into the park.

Areas surrounding East entrance road are known to be a favorite of the Grizzly Bear, but you can also expect to see a wider variety of wildlife in this region.

We saw coyotes and mule deer (pictured above) around Lake Lodge during our visit.

Yellowstone Lake Accommodation

Campgrounds.

Bridge Bay has 432 reservable sites at US$ 27 per night. It is open late May to early September ( more information ).

Grant Village has 430 reservable sites at US$ 32 per night. However, this one is only open mid June to mid September ( more information ).

Fishing Bridge RV Park has 310 RV only electrical hookup sites at US$ 79 per night. The RV park is open early May to mid September ( more information ).

Hotel and Cabins

• Lake Yellowstone hotel offers a wide variety of rooms from basic to extremely expensive ( more information ).
• Lake Lodge Cabins – Consisting of 186 Frontier and Western cabins at much more budget friendly prices ( more information ).

Example Of A Perfect 4 Days Yellowstone National Park Itinerary

You can begin to construct your plans now you have an idea about each region inside the park.

The following example itinerary is 4 days long, which means you can relax and take things slowly but still see and do the best of Yellowstone National Park.

Our biggest frustration when first visiting with 3 days was only having enough time to visit each attraction once and having to rush through. If a geyser or waterfall viewing area was crowded, or if the weather wasn’t playing nicely – well, that was just tough luck.

But with that extra fourth day, it means you can re-visit any place you missed, was too busy or you enjoyed the most.

Best Entrance To Begin 4 Days in Yellowstone Itinerary?

You can start your itinerary at any entrance. The figure 8 road inside the park makes it easy to adapt this itinerary to suit beginning from any direction.

The most popular entrance into the park is West Entrance / West Yellowstone and the second most popular in North Entrance / Gardiner / Mammoth.

However, we will begin this itinerary as though you are entering from Northeast Entrance / Cooke City and exit on Day 4 via South entrance to Jackson and Grand Teton.

This is the most efficient way to visit because you can drive through Lamar Valley early on your first morning for the best chance of seeing abundant wildlife, see the park and leave without driving back on yourself too much.

If you are staying in West Yellowstone or Gardiner for the duration of your visit, or are entering via any other entrance, simply move around the days as we list below. The same things to do still apply, you can just adjust the itinerary to fit.

Driving Distances Between Major Yellowstone And Grand Teton Regions

One final thing to touch on before we get into an example Yellowstone itinerary is driving distances between major areas in the park.

We have mentioned it’s a big park and there can be a lot of driving, but we thought it would be more helpful to show you in numbers.

Use the distances to gauge how far you might travel on any given day during your Yellowstone itinerary.

This is a Yellowstone guide but many visitors will also want to see Grand Teton either before or after, so we included Jackson and Jenny Lake for reference.

We have also included West Yellowstone because a lot of people stay here for their entire visit to Yellowstone and it helps to see how far it is to each major region.

OK, let’s finally get stuck into our 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary example!

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 1 – Lamar Valley, Tower-Roosevelt and Mammoth Hot Springs

Lamar Valley

Entering via Northeast entrance isn’t always reliable in Spring or Fall, but North entrance is always open. If you can’t enter via Cooke City, it’s easy enough to enter at Gardiner and drive straight to Lamar Valley early in the morning.

Approaching from Northeast / Cooke City – As you draw closer to Grand Loop Road you will pass through Lamar Valley , widely regarded as the best wildlife spotting in Yellowstone.

Try to arrive early morning for the best shot as seeing Bison and other animals. Spend an hour or two stopping at various pull-offs. Remember, if you spot any serious gear, that’s where you need to pull out your binoculars .

Just before Grand Loop Road you will find Specimen Ridge Trail , hike this trail if you didn’t see a lot of wildlife in Lamar Valley, you want to see even more wildlife or you just love hiking.

Tip : By getting away from the road you give yourself a much better chance at seeing animals in the wild.

When you arrive at Tower Junction turn left and drive a few miles to see  Tower Fall  and if time allows, hike to Yellowstone River Overlook.

Turn around and head back the same way but pass US-212 and continue on Grand Loop Road towards Mammoth.

Your next stop is Yellowstone’s  Petrified Tree . Now, this gated tree stump isn’t the most wow-factor attraction you will see on this 4 days Yellowstone itinerary.

But it is around 50 million years old, which means it is in fact, mightily impressive.

Mammoth Hot Springs

There’s not much else between Tower and Mammoth with the exception of Lava Creek hiking trail. If it’s earlier than you expected, hike this trail past Undine Falls, but if it’s already getting on, it’s time to check in at your Mammoth accommodation.

You’re likely to see mule deer and / or bison wandering around the car park so drive carefully .

You need to check in inside the hotel whether you’re staying in the hotel or a cabin. Mammoth dining hall is directly across the car park ready for once you’re all settled in to your room.

Alternatively, Gardiner is the best place to stay outside of the park boundaries on this first night.

After dinner (depending on light and time of year), drive a couple minutes up to Mammoth Hot Springs for a quick look around the area.

Don’t forget your camera because these terraces are extremely photogenic. It’s a shame the sunset is directly behind a huge hill but you’ll be back here at first light.

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 2 – Mammoth Hot Springs, Norris Geyser Basin, Mount Washburn and Yellowstone Falls

Norris Geyser Basin

Wake up early. If you’re animal mad, head back out to Lamar Valley at sunrise, otherwise make your way over to see the vibrant colors of Mammoth Lower and Upper Terraces and dense steam penetrated by soft rays of morning light.

We’ve seen Mammoth at sunrise and in midday. Sunrise in October was in the snow and stunning but we didn’t last long. Midday is busy but allows you spend more time walking the boardwalks comfortably and better chance to see the radiant springs.

Return to your cabin or the dining hall for breakfast, check out and get on the road heading South towards Norris Geyser Basin . Scenery along the way is gorgeous, stop if you see anything you like the look of but not for too long .

There’s a lot to see today!

Park up at Norris, be sure to look around the educational Visitor Center before spending the next few hours wandering the Geyser Basin boardwalks.

You have plenty of geysers to take in throughout two loops of boardwalks . D on’t miss Steamboat geyser – it was extremely active when we visited.

There are dozens of springs and geysers in all colors and varieties here, just keep following the boardwalks and the crowds.

Echinus geyser is a popular stop, however, this once prolific steam sprayer has become far less inclined to blow its top in recent years.

A few minutes drive South you will find Artist’s Paintpots trail . We highly recommend this quick 1 mile roundtrip hike where you can see deep earthy colors surrounding small hot springs.

In addition, you have an opportunity to get up close and personal with boiling mud bubbling in grey molten clay-like pools. Don’t miss this hidden gem.

Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone

Take Norris Canyon road due East towards Canyon without stopping before checking in at your Canyon accommodation. If you’re not staying inside the park tonight, book a hotel room in West Yellowstone.

Drive a few miles North from Canyon and park up at Dunraven Pass, before setting off on the most popular hike in Yellowstone National Park – Mount Washburn . Panoramic views from the summit will be worth the time and effort.

Closure : This is the hike we unfortunately couldn’t access and unfortunately it is still scheduled to be closed in 2022 as the road between Canyon and Tower is under works.

• If the road and hike are open, it will be late afternoon / early evening by the time you finish your hike.
• If not, head straight down to Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone.

Drive back past Canyon and turn onto one-way North Rim Drive.

Your first time seeing the powerful  Yellowstone Lower Falls is from Lookout point, which is awesome, but less awesome than some of the other viewpoints coming up.

Continue driving round to Grand View, before either driving or hiking (if time allows and you’re not too tired) to Inspiration point – the best observation area along North Rim Drive. It shouldn’t be long until the sun sets directly behind Lower Falls.

At dusk, on the way back to Canyon, drive slowly and look out for wildlife. We saw Bison and a lot of Mule Deer on this stretch with a stunning deep purple sky sunset and moonrise over the plains.

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 3 – Yellowstone Falls, Hayden Valley & Yellowstone Lake

Hayden Valley

Another early start and this one is non-negotiable!

Check out and leave at least 30 minutes before sunrise ( check times here ) so you can get parked, walk the very short trail to Artist Point .

Get your camera set up before the sun rises and illuminates the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone . It’s worth waking up for this iconic Yellowstone sunrise.

On the way back out of South Rim, stop off at Upper Falls View and hike down Uncle Tom’s Trail for an amazing close up vantage point of Lower Falls.

The steep staircase trail descent was not open when we visited so be sure to check trail closures and current conditions before you visit.

Once the sun has risen and you’ve marveled enough at the wonderful canyon, jump back in the car and drive South towards Hayden Valley .

This is Yellowstone’s second major area for seeing animals and if you’re early enough, you’ll have a high probability of spotting wildlife.

The key is not to go looking for the animals, but to park up where nobody else is parked along the Yellowstone River and wait for them to come to you.

You might see a multitude of amazing wildlife, or you might not see any animals at all, it all comes down to chance. Be prepared for both eventualities.

Next up as you head South is Mud Volcano. There’s a short circular boardwalk here covering a number of caldrons and springs, most notably Dragon’s mouth spring .

No need to spend long here and you’ll be hungry by now. Grab lunch at Fishing Bridge / Lake Yellowstone. 

Yellowstone Lake and West Thumb Geyser Basin

Remember that just because an area isn’t recognized as a wildlife ‘hotspot’ it doesn’t mean you won’t see any animals.

We spotted a gang of Elk and more coyotes right on the lake edge around Lake Yellowstone lodge. Explore the area before following the Lake South to West Thumb Geyser Basin.

Spend the remainder of the afternoon walking around West Thumb Basin , taking in the likes of Abyss Pool, Black Pool, Big Cone Geyser and Fishing Cone.

Don’t forget you can take the short Lake Overlook hike right from West Thumb parking lot.

Drive West to Old Faithful and check in to your final accommodation. Again, if you’re not staying inside the park on night 3, book a hotel room in West Yellowstone.

Depending on the time, you can either stick around Old Faithful for sunset or drive 11 miles North to Great Fountain Geyser , which has a magnificent sunset.

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 4 – Lower, Midway and Upper Geyser Basins

Grand Prismatic Spring

You get to sleep in a little (finally!) on your last day. No rush this morning, you’ll be driving up to Lower Geyser Basin and working your way back down to Old Faithful. Slowly does it today.

It is important to note here – if you want to get photographs of one particular area such as Grand Prismatic Spring, it might be worth beelining straight there first thing in the morning.

Start the day by entering one-way Firehole Lake drive – where you can now visit Great Fountain Geyser if you didn’t the night before.

Opposite the one-way exit from Firehole Lake road, park up at Fountain Paint Pot trailhead and walk the very short trail.

If you missed swimming in Boiling River at Mammoth due to closure, you could drive a few miles North to Firehole swimming area .

Otherwise, heading South once more, your next stop is one of Yellowstone’s finest geothermal features: Grand Prismatic Spring .

Firehole River will likely be engulfed in a cloud of steam as you walk towards Grand Prismatic, giving off an eerie effect. This huge heated cloud is produced by Excelsior Geyser , which was once the tallest geyser at Yellowstone.

Without question, the place will be packed with tourists, so try to be courteous as you walk the relatively narrow boardwalks.

Stop off as much as possible on the looped boardwalk to soak up Yellowstone’s largest hot spring and one of its most iconic features.

If you would like to see Grand Prismatic Spring’s colors in all their glory from above, you will need to drive a few minutes to Fairy Falls Trail and hike a 1 mile round trip trail to GPS overview.

Old Faithful

Finish your 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary back where you started this morning at Old Faithful .

What better place to sign off an incredible experience than its most iconic feature. Check times of eruptions, noted all around Old Faithful area including the dining halls. Plan to arrive 10-15 minutes before the predicted eruption.

The bleachers will be busy so be sure to walk around and behind Old Faithful, before taking the Observation Point trailhead to a much better vantage point.

The crowds will cheer once Old Faithful begins to erupt and you will have finally seen the most famous geyser in the world spurt its hot steam into the deep blue sky above!

Don’t forget that you are in Upper Geyser basin, the most active of all geothermal areas within Yellowstone and more than a one trick pony.

Behind Old Faithful – past the trailhead for observation point – you can follow a path leading to multiple hot springs and geysers.

Geysers : We highly recommend you do spend time walking behind Old Faithful as far as incredibly vibrant Morning Glory Pool, one of our favorites in the entire park.

Exit Yellowstone via the South entrance towards Grand Teton National Park. If you like to kayak, Lewis Lake on the way out of Yellowstone is the best place in the park to paddle .

There’s plenty of time left on Day 4 to make it down to Jackson, WY with a few detours along the way in Grand Teton.

It’s almost like you planned it that way!

Best Time to Visit Yellowstone National Park

Animals are very active as they come out of hibernation, grizzlies are very grizzly so care must be taken. Snow melting causes waterfall volumes to increase and the weather begins to warm slightly. May and June are excellent months to visit Yellowstone before it gets too crowded.

April in Yellowstone is interesting, you will have attractions almost to yourself but road access is limited and no park lodging is open.

Summer in Yellowstone is jam packed with tourists, which personally isn’t our cup of tea. However, you get more daylight and warmer temperatures which means perfect conditions for crushing hikes, sightseeing and comfortable camping.

Of 4 million annual visitors to the park, over half visit in July and August. Not only will every attraction be busy but getting a camping spot or hotel room would be tough going.

When we visited Yellowstone in October it had snowed heavily just a few days before our arrival. The scenery was staggeringly attractive, with glittering ice and snow dancing under sunlight.

It was the first big snowfall of the year so we just missed those beautiful rustic fall colors. September would be a fantastic alternative if you prefer to avoid crowds and enjoy cooler temperatures.

Yellowstone in Winter

Although we didn’t technically visit in Winter, both April and October had a ton of snow and cold temperatures. Most of the park shuts down in Winter and access can only be achieved by snowmobiles.

Our photographs will give you an idea of what Yellowstone would look like if you were to visit in Winter. We were blown away by the ‘Winter Wonderland’ scenery and felt fortunate to have visited when we did.

Following a huge snowfall, the temperature stayed below zero for 3 days but the sun was shining brightly from a deep blue clear sky every day.

On our second morning in October we woke up to a thick mist and fog which left Yellowstone feeling positively spooky!

Yellowstone Accommodation

Certain US National Parks can be notoriously difficult to secure accommodation. Yellowstone is one of those parks.

There are options inside the park (as we listed in each region earlier) but they are in high demand and can be out of many visitors’ budget range. You can instead stay at hotels near the park boundary.

Either way, you need to be as organized as possible when it comes to booking your Yellowstone lodging. Start booking as soon as you have dates to avoid missing out on rooms inside the park or at good value near the park.

We think booking hotels, lodges or cabins is the most difficult and important part of planning this vacation. Once rooms are secured, you can begin to plan your Yellowstone itinerary.

Resources and Tips

• Lodging – We have written an extremely popular where to stay in Yellowstone guide to help you figure out the best places to stay for your visit. It has helped thousands of visitors to find lodging around the park.
• Hotel tips – If you decide to stay outside the park in hotels, you have control over budget. Read our ultimate guide to booking cheap hotels  to learn about ways you can save money.
• Booking platform – We always use and recommend booking hotels with  Booking.com for best value and most options to suit your budget.
• Camping – Take advantage of our exclusive  30 day free trial of The Dyrt PRO  to get reservations at sold out Yellowstone campgrounds with no extra booking fees, and gain access to free dispersed camping locations around Yellowstone National Park. You can try The Dyrt PRO for free, no strings attached!
• The earlier you book, the more chance you have of securing the exact locations you prefer. Be flexible and adaptable if planning your vacation last minute.

Suggested Lodging for this 4 Day Itinerary

• First Night – Mammoth Hot Springs or Gardiner MT
• Second Night – Canyon
• Third Night – Old Faithful or West Yellowstone
• Fourth Night – Jackson WY

Note this is a North to South route. If your entrance and exit points will be different, plan your accommodation accordingly.

If you want to take a much closer look at the top rated hotels around Yellowstone, head over to our sister site Best Hotels Anywhere to see the best hotels in West Yellowstone, Gardiner, Cody and Jackson.

You can only book accommodation inside the park using  Yellowstone National Park lodges  service, which means set prices and limited availability.

Expect to pay handsomely for hotel rooms if you stay inside the park, it is Yellowstone after all!

Read More About Yellowstone and Grand Teton …

• Things To Do: 30 Most Popular Things To See And Do In Yellowstone National Park
• Airports: 6 Best Airports Near Yellowstone for Domestic and International Travelers
• Hotels: Where to Stay Inside and Near Yellowstone – Best Hotels and Locations
• Spring: 10 Key Things To Know About Visiting Yellowstone In April
• Fall: 10 Important Things To Know About Visiting Yellowstone In October
• Grand Teton: 7 Amazing Things to do and Perfect 2 Day Itinerary
• Mormon Row: Sunrise and Sunset Photography Guide to Mormon Row Grand Teton
• Schwabacher Landing: Complete Photography Guide to Stunning Schwabacher Landing

Yellowstone Road Trips:

• SLC – Salt Lake City to Yellowstone 7 Day Road Trip Itinerary
• Rushmore – Mt Rushmore to Yellowstone 10 Day Road Trip Itinerary

More Incredible US National Parks …

• Death Valley: Perfect One Day Death Valley Road Trip Itinerary (Las Vegas and Yosemite)
• Zion & Bryce Canyon: Epic 3 Day Road Trip Zion and Bryce Canyon Best Bits
• Yosemite: The Ultimate Guide to Yosemite For First Time Visitors
• Grand Canyon: Perfect One Day Itinerary Grand Canyon South Rim

We hope this guide helped with planning your 4 Days Yellowstone National Park Itinerary!

Yellowstone is one of the very best places to visit in the USA and we sincerely hope you have the most amazing vacation to this special part of the world.

Please let us know if you have any questions or you need any help planning your Yellowstone trip, we’ll be happy to help.

Happy Travels ,

Mark and Kristen

Was This Post Helpful? Pin It For Your Yellowstone National Park Itinerary!

Note : This article contains affiliate links. When you make a purchase using one of these affiliate links, we may earn a small commission at no extra cost to you.

All Rights Reserved © Where Are Those Morgans, LLC. Republishing this article and/or any of its contents (text, photography, maps, graphics, etc.) in whole or in part is strictly prohibited.

Mark and Kristen Morgan are travel, hiking and photography experts. Over the last 6 years traveling full time, they have explored more than 40 countries and 30 US states.

Where Are Those Morgans has been featured in USA Today, Gestalten, Get Your Guide, CityPASS and Condé Nast Traveler along with various other publications. Read more about us .

Share this article!

Melissa Morgan

Sunday 3rd of September 2023

How long does it take to get a guidebook to Yellowstone? Is it downloadable?

Mark and Kristen Morgan

Monday 4th of September 2023

Hi Melissa, yes our Yellowstone guidebook is a digital download so you can get it instantly to your phone and computer. Thank you and have a fantastic trip!

Wednesday 12th of July 2023

Looking to also go in through Cooke City. Any recommendations on where to stay in Cooke City that night before entering the park? Thanks!

Thursday 13th of July 2023

Hi Bret, glad to hear you will be visiting Yellowstone soon. Take a look through our where to stay in Yellowstone guide to see our hotel recommendations for Cooke City. It is a great place to start because you get instant access to Lamar Valley for wildlife at dawn. Have a great trip!

Tricia Adams

Sunday 19th of March 2023

is there an actual print out of just the 4 day yellowstone itinerary? point to point to see?

Hi Tricia, At the moment we do not have a printable version of this itinerary, but we hope to have one soon. You are more than welcome to print out the travel guide and if you have any specific questions about Yellowstone, feel free to ask any time. Have a great trip!

Holly Kocis

Friday 24th of February 2023

Yikes! We are planning a trip this summer starting in South Dakota and heading into Yellowstone for 4 day. Unfortunately we have to go in the summer since I work at a high school. Yellowstone is so overwhelming and it looks like we will be entering Yellowstone the week of July 4th. Planning is so overwhelming 🤪 We will be pulling our RV as well. There are no campsites available in Yellowstone so hoping to find something not too far away. Since we will be driving in each day which entrance makes themost sense or should we split time between a couple of. Entrances?

Hi Holly, we are glad to hear you have a trip planned to Yellowstone but "yikes" is definitely a great word to describe your situation! If it were us, we would try staying at a campground in or around Gardiner the first and maybe second night, then staying at a campground in West Yellowstone for the next 2 nights. We have driven from South Dakota to Yellowstone twice, entering once into northeast entrance and once into north entrance at Gardiner. Your drive over on I-90 won't be very exciting but for you it will be about efficiency and getting to Gardiner as quickly as possible is your best bet. Then you can see the "top half" of Yellowstone in the next 2 days, before pulling your RV to a campground in West Yellowstone so you have easier access to the "bottom half" of Yellowstone. Hope that helps and best of luck getting booked up. Have a great trip!

Tuesday 22nd of February 2022

I'm so grateful to have found this site. It's amazing! You are so thorough and organized - I am in awe. Without this guide I would have just booked a full week in West Yellowstone and then spent most of my days driving and being stressed about being in the park after dark. Now I think I'll book 4 nights at YGI and 3 nights in Jackson. I have dogs, so I can't stay in the park or move around too often. We primarily want to see wildlife - I hope we see a wolf!!!

Thursday 24th of February 2022

Thank you Noelle, we're glad our guide has helped you plan your trip to Yellowstone! Last time we visited we saw a wolf near Grand Prismatic Spring, just look for a group of people with expensive cameras / binoculars / telescopes and it's either a wolf or a bear. Have a great time!

The Ultimate 4 Days in Rome Itinerary (+ Map & Tips!)

Dreaming of staring in awe at the Sistine Chapel, stepping inside the Colosseum, tossing a coin into the Trevi Fountain, and eating some of the best pasta of your life? If so–this 4 day Rome itinerary is for you!

The capital of Italy is an endlessly enchanting place, and one of our favorite cities in the world–and after spending 4 days in Rome, we think you’ll agree.

Home to incredible art, one of the most beloved cuisines on the planet, an endless number of neighborhoods to explore, and impressive history that has been folded into the very fabric of modern Rome–not to mention the fact that there’s literally another country nestled inside the city–it’s impossible to avoid finding something to love about Rome.

… That is, as long as you know where to look.

After many repeated trips to Rome (including 2 trips where we rented an apartment in Rome for an entire month), we have lots of advice to share–and luckily, a 4 day trip to Rome gives you quite a bit of time to work with!

Some links in this post may be affiliate links. If you make a purchase through one of these links, we may earn a small commission at no extra cost to you. Please see our disclosure policy for more detail.

You’ll have the opportunity to see Rome’s iconic highlights and also weave in some more offbeat experiences, including some interesting under-the-radar spots that hide in plain sight.

This 4 day Rome itinerary winds its way through several neighborhoods and historical time periods, focusing on 1-2 geographic areas each day.

We’ve designed this itinerary for Rome in 4 days with a traveler taking their first trip to Rome in mind, but we hope even return visitors will find something new to love here!

(Also, thanks in part to the fact that I can’t always resist the temptation to point out nearby hidden gems and unique details, this is a very long Rome blog post! Feel free to use the table of contents below to navigate to the section you’re looking for.)

Table of Contents

How We Structured This Rome Itinerary

The perfect 4 day rome itinerary, where to stay for 4 days in rome, more than 4 days in rome.

• Getting Around During 4 Days in Rome, Italy

Safety Tips for Your Rome Itinerary

The best time to visit rome, what to pack for visiting rome, italy, map of your itinerary for rome, italy.

We’ve spent months playing tourist in Rome over the course of many, many trips–including twice where we stayed in town for a month straight!

We initially crafted this Rome itinerary after our first month-long stay in the city, and since then it has (like most of the other itineraries on Our Escape Clause ) been a living document, updated with each return visit to our favorite city.

From the best things to do in Rome to what attractions to skip, we’ve packed this travel guide with everything that we know about planning the perfect trip to Rome.

This itinerary is designed for first-time visitors to The Eternal City who are hoping to hit all the top attractions but also hope to see some of Rome’s many hidden gems too.

We’ve also included a downloadable map of each day’s route at the bottom of this blog post to help you navigate the city as you explore.

While 4 days in Rome is long enough that you could very reasonably take one day to enjoy one of the best day trips from Rome , there is simply no limit to the number of captivating things you can find within the city itself, and we’ve planned this itinerary with that in mind.

Once you finish this post, you may also want to check out our posts on what to eat in Rome , where to find the best views of Rome , and our top Rome travel tips !

If you’re interested in shorter Rome itineraries, we have 2-day and 1-day versions here on Our Escape Clause as well.

Day 1 in Rome: The Colosseum, Roman Forum, The Jewish Ghetto + Beyond

Start your trip to rome at the colosseum..

What better place to start your 4 days in Rome itinerary than at one of the most iconic sights in the world?

Step inside the Colosseum and marvel at the ancient history beating inside–but before you do, be sure to climb the steps on the north side of the Colosseum (turn left after exiting the Colosseo metro stop) and get those classic photos in front of the Colosseum’s exterior.

Before starting your day at the Colosseum, you’ll want to book tickets ahead of time to skip the (legendary) line.

With 4 days in Rome to work with, you may be willing to wait in what are often very long lines, but if you hate lines as much as we do, you’ll consider the small extra cost well worth it.

Trying to decide whether or not to take a guided tour?

Guided tours are typically sold as a package that includes the Colosseum, Roman Forum, and Palatine Hill.

Our personal take is that the tour of the Colosseum isn’t  as  necessary… but it’s absolutely worth it to have a guide for the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill, and therefore recommend signing up.

This is the tour we took and greatly enjoyed (though fair warning, our guide’s passion meant that the tour did run past its predicted time).

And, while we didn’t structure this itinerary for Rome this way, I do want to mention that we have also toured the Colosseum at night and loved it–if that’s something that appeals to you, you can easily adjust this itinerary to accommodate it ( this is the tour we loved ).

Book your tour of the Colosseum, Roman Forum, and Palatine Hill today! Prefer to explore independently? Grab your skip-the-line ticket now!

Head to the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill.

Less than a 5-minute walk from the Colosseum, depending on the entrance and exit used.

While the Colosseum is one impressive monument of Ancient Rome, the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill boast several!

From senate houses to public squares to palaces, these areas are archaeological and historical treasure troves.

They are absolutely best appreciated with a guide–I can’t even describe how much more we got out of our guided visit than our unguided ones, especially on the lower level of the Forum!

If all goes well, you should walk away in awe of both the depth and breadth of history in the Eternal City.

After touring the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill both with a guide and without, we strongly believe that the context given by a guide is well worth the price. We used and loved  this tour –and while the Colosseum guide was less necessary, having the Colosseum skip-the-line portion and tour included definitely helped justify the cost! Book your guided tour of the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill today!

Check out the additional forums.

About a 10-minute walk from the Roman Forum, depending on the entrance and exit used.

Though the Roman Forum is the most popular to visit, it’s far from the only remaining forum of Ancient Rome visible in the city today.

The Imperial Forum, Forum of Augustus, Forum of Caesar, and more are all just a short walk away from the famous Roman Forum.

And, unlike the Roman Forum, all of the other ancient forums are free to enter.

Though visiting all the forums is probably a little much for all but a passionate Ancient Roman historian, be sure to at least slow down look enough to take a peek at one or two during your 4 days in Rome!

Stop by Piazza Venezia and Piazza del Campidoglio.

10-minute walk from the Forum of Augustus.

The Piazza del Campidoglio is one of my personal favorite piazzas in Rome .

Shaped into a perfect oval and surrounded by beautiful buildings, it is a peaceful place to relax for a moment and take in the fact that you’re in Rome.

If you stop by on a Saturday as we did during one of our trips to Rome, you’ll likely also have the chance to admire lots and lots of wedding parties!

The piazza’s beauty isn’t particularly surprising when you know who designed it: Michelangelo himself.

While we haven’t specifically included them on this 4 day Rome itinerary (sadly there’s not time for everything!), it’s worth pointing out that this is also where you’ll find the main section of the Capitoline Museums , which have an incredibly impressive collection of Ancient Roman statues, among other things.

If you tend to prefer quieter museums, you can consider adding a visit here!

(In any other city, they’d be packed–but the Capitoline Museums have some legendary competition when it comes to museums in Rome to visit).

On your way to the Piazza del Campidoglio, you’ll also pass right by the Piazza Venezia, with the impressive Altar of the Fatherland (the enormous white building topped with chariots that is visible from just about every viewpoint in Rome) dwarfing everything around it.

Since you were just on Palatine Hill, climbing it isn’t necessary–but it is home to one of the best views of Rome if you’d like to see it for yourself!

The monument was built in honor of Victor Emmanuel II, the first king of unified Italy.

Pay a visit to the Campo de’Fiori.

14-minute walk from the Piazza del Campidoglio.

This market square may be touristy, but it’s also beautiful, bustling, and worth stopping by during your 4 days in Rome.

Markets are some of our favorite aspects of any city trip, and Rome is among the best of the best.

Of course, if you choose to purchase any Rome souvenirs or a meal at the market, you will pay a slight upcharge.

I f you’re particularly hungry, we did have tasty, if somewhat overpriced, pasta carbonara at (where else?) La Carbonara on the edge of the Campo de’Fiori.

If you’re looking for something more local, Da Sergio is just around the corner and a great option, but get there when they open, because it fills up ( Address: Vicolo delle Grotte, 27, 00186 Roma RM, Italy ).

Visit the Largo di Torre Argentina.

7-minute walk from the Campo de’Fiori.

This set of ruins is home to two points of interest that are wildly different from each other: the place where Julius Caesar was assasinated, and a cat sanctuary.

The ruins are open-air, laid out in the center of the square, and are made up of the remains of several temples as well as part of Pompey’s Curia–the Roman Senate–where Julius Caesar perished just under 2,000 years ago.

As if that wasn’t enough of a reason to stop by during your 4 days in Rome, the archaeological site doubles as a cat sanctuary!

There’s an organization onsite that works to feed and care for them, and I can only imagine that they have a delightful life living in what is essentially the world’s most elaborate set of cat trees!

I’m sure it will come as no surprise to cat lovers that we’ve seen more than one cat perched on top of the remains of surprisingly tall columns.

Explore the Jewish Ghetto.

About a 25-minute walk through the neighborhood, depending on how directly you travel.

Rome’s historic Jewish neighborhood is an incredibly peaceful place to get lost down the back streets.

Nestled against the Tiber, some of the smaller streets of the Jewish Quarter are quiet enough to almost forget that you’re within walking distance of the crowded madness of the Colosseum.

While you’re here, be sure to marvel at the exterior of the Great Synagogue, check out the Teatro Marcello (it looks a bit like a smaller Colosseum!), stop by the lovely Porticus of Octavia, and visit the charming Piazza Mattei with its adorable Turtle Fountain.

If you’re a fan of classic movies, channel your inner Audrey Hepburn with a visit to the Mouth of Truth (but fair warning, whether or not it’s worth visiting is a bit of a debate–all the better reason to find out for yourself, if you ask us!

And, of course, be sure to sample the fried artichokes that are synonymous with food in the Jewish Ghetto of Rome–even if you’re not a big vegetable fan, these are worth trying!

Hop over the Tiber River for a Trastevere food tour.

Trastevere is one of Rome’s most picturesque and beloved neighborhoods–and while this won’t be your last visit during your quest to see Rome in 4 days, it’s a good opportunity for a first (literal) taste.

We’re big fans of opening trips with food tours–off the top of my head, we’ve taken at least 6 in Italy alone–as they are not only a wonderful way to get to know a city, they also help you gain a lot of confidence with ordering local food!

We loved this food tour in Trastevere and can confirm that after taking it, you will walk away with a solid base knowledge for ordering food throughout the rest of your trip to Rome… and be extremely full.

From wine to cheese to Rome’s classic pastas to contorni (sides) to obligatory (incredible) gelato, every bite is a delight.

Book your Trastevere food tour today!

Day 2 in Rome: Centro Storico + Classic Rome Attractions

Start at the piazza del popolo..

The Piazza del Popolo is another one of my personal favorite piazzas in Rome, and is a great way to kick off the second day of your Rome itinerary!

You’ve probably heard the phrase that “all roads lead to Rome”–and specifically, they all led to Piazza del Popolo, which was once a traditional entrance point to the city.

Today, you’ll find the piazza filled with visitors, street performers, and of course, an obelisk.

The “twin churches” of Santa Maria in Montesanto and Santa Maria dei Miracoli that stand at one end of the piazza are beautiful, of course–but it’s the comparatively plain exterior of the Basilica of Santa Maria del Popolo on the other side of the piazza that art lovers should keep an eye out for, because it’s home to 2 Caravaggio paintings.

After exploring the Piazza del Popolo, be sure to climb up to Pincio Terrace for some beautiful views over the piazza and Rome itself !

Tour the Galleria Borghese.

20-minute walk from Pincio Terrace.

A beautiful stroll from Pincio Terrace through the Borghese Gardens will lead you right to the Galleria Borghese and arguably one of the most impressive–though not one of the largest–art collections in Italy!

(The good news about it being a smaller museum, of course, is that it’s easier to squeeze into your vacation in Rome).

Housed in a former palace, the Galleria Borghese is absolutely stunning and worth a visit during your 4 days in Rome, especially for art lovers.

It is required to purchase tickets in advance to visit the collection, though, and tickets do book up.

I f you have your heart set on visiting the Galleria Borghese, be sure to get tickets ahead of time!

Reserve your tickets for the Galleria Borghese  today! Prefer the context of a tour? This one gets rave reviews!

Optional: pay a visit to the Capuchin Crypt.

9-minute walk from the Spanish Steps.

I’ll be honest: this stop on our suggested 4 day Rome itinerary isn’t for everyone, but it is absolutely fascinating and I can’t resist pointing it out.

In the 17th century, the Capuchin Crypt was slowly built with the skeletons of the friars that died at this monastery.

Skeletons are arranged as works of art in several small chapels here, and including everything from full skeletons in the robes of a monk resting on a bed of bones, to chandeliers made of small human bones.

The chapels bear unsettling messages like: “As you are, we once were. As we are, soon you will be.”

Clearly, not a place for small children or those not comfortable around the dead–but the level of detail of the… art (for lack of a better word) is a sight to behold.

This is one of the least toured crypts in Rome (and of course, it’s technically an ossuary), but it is conveniently located to work in a stop during your 4 days in Rome, and if it sounds like something that might interest you, it’s definitely worth the short walk!

(And if you also find this fascinating, it’s worth noting that it’s not the only place of its kind in Italy– Milan , Palermo , Monterosso al Mare in Cinque Terre , and more are home to religious places decorated with bones).

Stroll to the Spanish Steps.

21-minute walk from Galleria Borghese.

After a stop off at the Galleria Borghese and possibly the Capuchin Crypt, most of the second day of this 4 day Rome itinerary focuses on iconic Roman sights and popular tourist highlights, starting with the famed Spanish Steps.

The Spanish Steps, like many popular highlights in Rome, are almost always crowded, but there are options if you want to have them to yourself: we got up at dawn in February for the below photo!

Sadly, the tradition of sitting on the Spanish Steps was banned in 2019 (and as of December 2022, we can confirm it’s definitely still being enforced), but they’re still absolutely worth visiting during your 4 day Rome itinerary!

Depending on time, if you’re a fan of the Romantic poets, you may also want to tour the small Keats-Shelley Memorial House that overlooks the steps and functions as a museum of the Romantic poets (and also features great views of the steps and piazza).

Throw a coin in the Trevi Fountain.

8-minute walk from the Spanish Steps.

What’s a Rome itinerary without a stop at the Trevi Fountain?

I’ll confess: on my first visit to Rome, I was more excited to see the Trevi Fountain than almost anything else, and it did not disappoint!

The fountain is truly magnificent, and after more than a dozen visits, I’m still in awe of how gorgeous it is (and also of just how many people can squeeze themselves around it, but hey, that’s just the reality of traveling to popular places in Rome).

Be sure to throw a coin in the fountain to ensure that you’ll always come back to Rome!

If you want to enjoy the view at bit but avoid (some of) the crowds, you can often grab a seat on the steps of the Church of Santi Vincenzo e Anastasio a Fontana di Trevi to relax for a minute.

Stop by the Galleria Sciarra.

Located less than a 5-minute walk from the Trevi Fountain and yet almost never crowded, the Galleria Sciarra is an excellent way to escape the crowds of Rome’s popular tourist attractions and take a breather before continuing on to the Pantheon.

The Art Nouveau frescoes painted by Giuseppe Cellini in the late 19th century that adorn the walls are an excellent example of how beauty and exceptional artwork is truly around every corner in Rome.

The frescoes have a specific theme: women, or even more specifically, female virtues.

Feel free to take a moment to admire them for yourself–the courtyard will probably feel incredibly quiet and peaceful after the hectic crowds at the Trevi Fountain!

The building itself is used for offices today, so you can find the small courtyard open to visitors during standard business hours.

Step inside the Pantheon.

7-minute walk from the Trevi Fountain.

The Pantheon is nothing if not mysterious: its age, how it survived the Barbarian raids, and even what exactly it is made out of are all questions that remain unanswered.

Built originally as a temple to all gods and later turned into a church, the Pantheon is worthy of its status as one of the best-known sites of Ancient Rome left in the city.

No 4 day Rome itinerary would be complete without a chance to marvel at the Pantheon, so be sure to step inside and stare in awe!

While the Pantheon has traditionally been free to visit, the city of Rome introduced an entrance fee starting in 2023.

Today, base tickets for the Pantheon cost 5 Euro, purchased onsite or through this website .

Alternatively, you can purchase tickets to the Pantheon that include a downloadable audio guide .

Be sure to read the signs carefully when arriving at the Pantheon: there are separate lines for those who already have downloaded tickets and those planning to purchase one in-person.

Get your Pantheon tickets + audio guide now!

Check out the Piazza Navona.

5-minute walk from the Pantheon.

The beautiful, wide-open space known as the Piazza Navona has always been busy throughout Roman history.

It has served as a stadium, as a food market, and even as a spot for public water parties!

Today, it is known as one of the prettiest and most popular piazzas in Rome, boasting three ornate Baroque fountains that are perfect for perching on the edge of and watching the world go by.

It’s one of the most popular piazzas in Rome to visit, so expect crowds, especially near the baroque fountains–but it’s popular for a reason.

( Rome travel tip : want to escape the crowds for a second? Head around the corner to Piazza di Pasquino, see the talking statue, and grab a glass of wine from the expansive list at Enoteca Cul de Sac ).

Head over to Castel Sant’Angelo.

11-minute walk from the Piazza Navona.

A walk from Piazza Navona to Castel Sant’Angelo will lead you through not only more of Centro Storico, but across the Bridge of Angels, one of the prettiest bridges in Rome, which dead-ends into the Castel Sant’Angelo.

Castel Sant’Angelo, despite its name, was never built to be a castle at all, but a mausoleum.

As the tomb of Emperor Hadrian and some of his family, Castel Sant’Angelo (in its original form, anyway), is an impressive nearly 2,000 years old–and it, whether or not you choose to go inside as part of your 4 days in Rome itinerary, is worth stopping by while in Rome.

(It also usually has genuinely impressive buskers out front–we usually stop to sit along the Tiber, enjoy the music, and admire the view at least a couple of times on every trip to Rome).

While you’re there, be sure to head to the nearby Ponte Umberto for a gorgeous view when you look back toward the Bridge of Angels and St. Peter’s Basilica.

If you time it right, this is a fantastic place to watch the sunset in Rome!

Day 3 in Rome: Explore Vatican City + Trastevere

Start your day bright and early at the vatican museums..

The Vatican Museums, with their magnificent art treasures, incredible map room, spectacular Sistine Chapel, and more, are an absolutely unmissable experience when planning to experience Rome in 4 days.

Plus, as a bonus, visiting means that you’ll actually be able to say you visited a whole other country!

Due to the severe crowds and ridiculously long lines, it is nearly essential to pre-book your visit to the Vatican Museums.

If you’d like to brave the odds on a rainy day in February, may the force be with you, but we once walked by the line to the museums nearly daily for a month as October bled into November, and the lines stayed at “Wow, okay, I’ll give that scalper whatever he wants to end this wait” levels.

Definitely book ahead to help your 4 day Rome itinerary go more smoothly!

If you’re particularly interested in seeing the Sistine Chapel without a few hundred of your new closest friends, we’ve had friends of ours absolutely rave about the experience of the early access tour , where you can gain access to the museums and Sistine Chapel before they officially open for the day.

While it is a pricier option, word on the street is that if it’s in your budget, it’s 100% worth both the money and the effort spent getting out of bed early in the morning.

After personally touring the Vatican Museums both independently and with a guide, we’re personally of the opinion that a tour (especially one that takes place outside of peak hours) is enormously beneficial, and can highly recommend this one  for an early-morning experience.

Also, bear in mind when planning your 4 days in Rome itinerary that the Vatican Museums are closed on Sundays, with the exception of the last Sunday of the month, when the museums are open and free to visitors who are able to enter before 12:30 PM (they then close at 2:00 PM).

From April to October each year, the Vatican Museums are also open on Friday nights, and we personally loved our Friday night tour .

Book your early morning or evening tour of the Vatican Museums today! Prefer to explore independently? Book skip-the-line tickets to the Vatican Museums and Sistine Chapel!

Step inside St. Peter’s Basilica.

11-minute walk from the Vatican Museums (depending on where you exit).

St. Peter’s Basilica is, hands down, the most impressive church we have seen in all of Italy (even if it technically isn’t in Italy at all).

Once you arrive out front, take a few minutes to admire the iconic oval Piazza del Pietro, and then hop in line to enter the basilica–and don’t worry, the line moves a lot faster than it looks.

The basilica itself is free to enter, but if your legs are up for it, we strongly recommend paying a bit extra to climb the dome (as long as you’re not particularly claustrophobic, that is).

The views from the top, especially of the Piazza del Pietro, are fantastic (the first photo in this Rome blog post is of the view).

Once you get back down, head into the basilica itself.

Keep in mind that St. Peter’s Basilica does have a dress code that is enforced: cover your shoulders and knees, and avoid cleavage.

Push comes to shove, if you’re not dressed for the occasion, there are always plenty of salesmen hanging around the line to get into St. Peter’s that are more than willing to sell you a scarf to throw over your outfit.

Stroll to the Villa Farnesina.

17-minute walk from St. Peter’s Basilica.

This fresco-covered Renaissance palace is a quiet, fresco-covered beauty, making it a distinct departure from the congested Vatican Museums from earlier in the morning.

Stop by to admire the artwork (Raphael’s frescoes are particularly celebrated), the loggia, and the ornate rooms of the palace.

If you’re “museumed-out” after a morning at the Vatican, you can easily skip the Villa Farnesina as well–but we love it for its much quieter atmosphere and a chance to escape the crowds.

Explore Trastevere indepedently.

23-minute walk to Piazza di Santa Maria in Trastevere from Villa Farnesina.

You already had a taste during your food tour–with 4 days in Rome, once is not enough when it comes to enjoying Trastevere.

Trastevere is one of Rome’s most beautiful and–for lack of a better word–Roman-feeling neighborhoods.

This is where you’ll find some of the best examples of the iconic shuttered windows, colorful buildings, and narrow cobblestone streets that we all imagine when dreaming of visiting Rome, Italy.

Once considered an offbeat destination in Rome, the secret is out about Trastevere, and it’s a popular spot for visitors to grab a meal and wander.

Though you’ll be far from the only visitors around, Trastevere is definitely still worth the stroll along the Tiber required to reach the neighborhood.

While you’re there, but sure to head to the Piazza di Santa Maria, which is an adorable piazza, and to duck inside the Basilica of Our Lady in Trastevere, which boasts some magnificent mosaics.

Trastevere is also a very popular place for aperitivo, so if you’re looking for that iconic spritz-on-an-outdoor-table-along-a-cobblestoned-street vibe, Trastevere is the place to be.

Ascend to the Janiculum Terrace.

15-minute walk from Piazza di Santa Maria in Trastevere.

It’s entirely possible that at this time in your Rome itinerary, your feet will be aching and the idea of climbing up to a viewpoint will sound completely terrible!

And, if that’s the case, no problem: find yourself a cute restaurant in Trastevere and start your evening aperitivo.

If you’re up for a bit more walking, however, head up to Janiculum Terrace (bear in mind that this does involve climbing a bit of a hill) for some incredible panoramic views of Rome, and perhaps even a beautiful sunset!

Day 4 in Rome: Testaccio , Aventine Hill + Some Hidden Gems

Start your day with a 2,000-year-old pyramid..

Pyramids aren’t exactly the first image that comes to mind when we think of Rome, but the impressive Pyramid of Caius Cestius has been standing proudly in Rome for 2,000 years!

Start the final day of your Rome itinerary by setting off to Testaccio to see both the Pyramid and several other unexpected attractions.

You’ll be able to catch your first glimpses of the pyramid after exiting the Piramide metro stop, but the best views are actually from inside the Non-Catholic Cemetery, so save most of your picture-taking for those spots!

Visit the Non-Catholic Cemetery of Rome.

4-minute walk from the Pyramid of Cestius.

This beautiful cemetery is unique in the historically extremely Catholic city of Rome and houses some notable non-Catholics, including the poets Percy Shelley and John Keats.

It’s a lovely and peaceful place, and the views of the Pyramid of Cestius make an interesting contrast to the more recent headstones.

In addition to being the final resting place of plenty, the Non-Catholic Cemetery is also the home of some very lively cats!

Rome’s Non-Catholic Cemetery doubles as a cat sanctuary, and you’ll likely spot several beautiful felines resting amongst the headstones and prowling through the landscape.

Head to the Testaccio Market.

11-minute walk from the Non-Catholic Cemetery.

As compared to the Campo de’Fiori market noted earlier on this 4 day Rome itinerary, the Testaccio Market (and Testaccio in general) has a distinctly local feel.

True, this neighborhood isn’t unknown to tourists–but it’s also far from overrun by them, and you’ll find plenty of Romans shopping among you at the indoor Testaccio Market.

Check out clothes, shoes, and housewares, or head right to the food–both prepared food and groceries are available in the market.

Stop by Piazza Testaccio.

5-minute walk from Testaccio Market.

You won’t necessarily need long in this quiet and small piazza–but that’s exactly why you should take a moment to stop by.

So many of Rome’s piazzas that you’ll see during your 4 days in Rome tend to be completely packed (did you know that the area around the Trevi Fountain is actually called the Piazza di Trevi? It’s definitely not peaceful these days…).

Strolling through Piazza Testaccio, on the other hand, is a great opportunity to enjoy a more laid-back version of this classic feature of Roman life.

If you want to relax and enjoy the piazza for longer than a quick look, we can recommend grabbing an aperitivo at Oasi della Birra!

Snap a photo at the Keyhole on Aventine Hill.

12-minute walk from Piazza Testaccio.

If you peer through the keyhole on Aventine Hill, you’ll be greeted with a beautiful view: the dome of St. Peter’s Basilica, framed by garden hedges.

It’s a lovely spot… that we totally missed the first time we tried to visit on account of (apparently) skimping on research.

When I had seen the many photos of this spot in the past, I mistakenly assumed that the “keyhole” in the name was merely referring to the small break in the hedges that framed St. Peter’s–but no, you do indeed peer through a literal keyhole to see it.

Don’t make our mistake and end up walking right by without checking it out!

Stroll through the Orange Garden.

4-minute walk from the Keyhole on Aventine Hill.

The Orange Garden is a gorgeous place, and a perfect spot to pause and relax during your 4 days in Rome.

Home to–what else–a grove of orange trees, the garden is meticulously manicured and a very peaceful place to take in the stunning views of Rome that are available from the terrace at the back of the garden.

The Orange Garden is an incredibly relaxing place and a great spot for resting your feet and people-watching for a bit.

If you’re a history buff, stop by Circus Maximus.

8-minute walk from the Orange Garden.

I wouldn’t necessarily consider seeing Circus Maximus to be an essential stop on this itinerary for Rome in 4 days, but as it’s so close by, it’s worth mentioning for any Roman history buffs that are visiting!

Circus Maximus was the first stadium in Rome and was known for its chariot races.

Located between Aventine and Palatine Hills, you can still see remnants of ancient palaces staring down over Circus Maximus.

Today, the site is a public park and is essentially a field with very few ruins remaining, hence why I don’t think it’s an unmissable stop on your Rome itinerary.

But, that being said, it is very cool to see modern Romans exercising in the exact spot where chariots once raced!

See a less-visited side of Ancient Rome.

By this time in your trip to Rome, you’ve had a chance to sample a wide variety of the Eternal City’s history, from the works of a Republic followed by Emperors in Ancient Rome, to the realm of popes and kings and beyond.

As you get close to the end of your trip, consider going back to the beginning and visiting one of Ancient Rome’s less crowded sites!

The Baths of Caracalla and Domus Aurea (Emperor Nero’s Golden House) are both incredible options.

Domus Aurea requires a bit of planning ahead, but you won’t forget the experience anytime soon!

If you’re curious about Ancient Rome but more interested in museum settings than archaeological ones, this is a good chance to loop back to the Capitoline Museums , as well.

Close our your 4 days in Rome itinerary by stepping inside Rome’s catacombs.

Lurking underneath the surface of Rome are 60 catacombs, dug by early Christians in the days before the city as a whole converted–and of those 60, 5 are open to the public.

For a side of Rome that you definitely haven’t seen so far, descend underground for a visit!

Depending on how fast of a sightseer you are, you may want to choose between this and one of the attractions in the above section–or you may want to squeeze it all in!

When it comes to Rome’s catacombs, The Catacombs of St. Callixtus are the largest and most visited, though all are worth seeing.

While the various catacombs tend to be open until 5:00 PM, for maximum flexibility, consider signing up for this after-hours catacombs tour through Take Walks!

(Note that the tour also visits the Capuchin Crypt, so if you plan to take it, don’t visit the crypt as mentioned on day 2 of this itinerary for Rome).

Book your visit to Rome’s catacombs today!

Where to stay for 4 days in Rome depends a lot on your priorities.

Do you want to be surrounded by a beautiful neighborhood? Trastevere is the place for you.

In the center of the action? Head to Centro Storico.

Save money? The furthest reaches of the metro lines.

With 4 days in Rome, though, we consider access to the rest of the city to be the most important deciding factor when deciding where to stay–in other words, choose somewhere within no more than a 10-minute walk to a metro stop.

However, if it’s within your budget, we find Centro Storico or fairly close to it (the closer edges of Trastevere, Monti, or Prati/Vaticano, for example), to be the most convenient place to stay for this Rome itinerary.

When choosing a hotel or apartment, looking at its distance from Piazza Navona and the Pantheon is a good rule of thumb–in a perfect world, you’ll be within walking distance of those.

That being said, we’ve stayed all over Rome and loved each corner for different reasons!

Here are a few well-reviewed properties to keep in mind when deciding where to stay in Rome.

La Cornice Guesthouse  — We loved this little guesthouse back in our budget backpacking days! It was extremely clean and comfortable, and very affordable for Rome.

La Cornice is set slightly outside the main tourist areas, but an easy 5-minute walk to the metro and a 20-minute ride got us to the Colosseum and other major sights.

Our favorite part of La Cornice?

Eating a nearby Joseph Ristorante for lunch, a restaurant we have returned to for years–and it all started with a recommendation from the clerk at La Cornice.

Just a 5 minute walk away, their lunch special offered a choice of about 10 main courses plus bread, wine, and one of several desserts for 8 Euros/person–it’s hard to beat that!

Check rates & book your stay at La Cornice Guesthouse!

The Wesley  — We adore this hotel! You can’t ask for a better location for exploring Rome, as it literally overlooks the Castel Sant’Angelo and is a short walk away from all the major Centro Storico sights.

It is a bit of a hike to a metro stop–you’ll probably need to take a taxi when you arrive/leave with luggage–but the location made it worth it for us.

For a mid-range property, The Wesley is a fairly simple one–expect small and extremely simple rooms, and shared bathrooms for some rooms.

Essentially, The Wesley as a guesthouse floats somewhere between budget and mid-range, with a luxury-status-worthy location.

Because of the fantastic combination of more affordable rates and a fabulous location, The Wesley sells out fast–if you want to stay there and see it’s available on your dates, we recommend booking immediately!

Check rates & book your stay at The Wesley!

Hotel Condotti — Located just a couple of blocks from the Spanish Steps (and consequently the Piazza di Spagna metro station), you couldn’t ask for a better location in Rome!

Well-reviewed and boasting exceptionally clean rooms, Hotel Condotti is the perfect choice for a traveler with a midrange budget (or luxury traveler–this hotel also holds some impressive-looking suites!) who would like to be within walking distance to the best that Centro Storico has to offer.

Enduringly popular and perfectly positioned, you can’t go wrong with checking into Hotel Condotti.

Check rates & book your stay at Hotel Condotti!

Pantheon Inn — If you’re looking for a building with classic Italian charm in the heart of Rome, this is it.

Located right behind the Pantheon and within reach, the Pantheon Inn offers a quiet, peaceful escape in the middle of bustling Rome.

You will need to walk a bit to the metro stop–but since the walk will take you through the heart of the beautiful Centro Storico, we doubt you’ll mind.

Check rates & book your stay at the Pantheon Inn!

If you’re lucky enough to have more than 4 days in Rome, it’s time to start thinking about day trips!

Consider heading to the nearby Tivoli Gardens, to hilltop towns like Orvieto or Siena , or out on a wine-and-food-centered Tuscany day trip .

If you plan ahead and use the fast train, you can even take a day trip to Florence !

Pompeii is a popular–and worthy–side trip from Rome, but to accomplish it as a day trip, you really need a tour, and this one is among the best of the best!

Pompeii is about 6 hours of driving round-trip from Rome, longer (and more confusing) via train, and trying to also squeeze in Vesuvius on an independent day trip from Rome would be nearly impossible.

If you’d like to visit Pompeii and the Amalfi Coast from Rome, this extremely popular tour has been reviewed more than 2,500 times with Take Walks and is a safe bet to get you there!

We highly recommend going, it’s an incredible place–just be sure not to overstretch yourself!

Within Rome itself, there’s also plenty to do with extra time!

Consider checking out the Baths of Diocletian, heading out to the Appian Way, visiting the over-the-top neighborhood of Quartiere Coppede , taking a cooking class, or touring more Ancient Roman sites like Santo Stefano Rotondo.

Lesser-known museums like the Galleria Spada and Palazzo Doria Pamphilj are among our favorites and also well worth a visit!

Getting Around During 4 Days in Rome , Italy

We designed this 4 days in Rome itinerary to be as walkable as possible, grouping destinations by geography where we could.

Even still, Rome is large enough that you will need to use other methods of getting around.

The easiest option is simply to use the metro–though Rome’s metro has a mere 3 lines (only 2 of which will likely be of interest to you as a visitor), it connects directly to many of the city’s highlights, including the Colosseum, Trevi Fountain, Spanish Steps, and more.

If you can swing it, your 4 days in Rome will be highly enhanced by staying within a short walk of a metro stop.

Rome’s bus system is also an option, though it can be slightly confusing and you cannot purchase tickets onboard.

Pick them up at a nearby tabacchi or metro stop before hopping on, or aim for simplicity and purchase a multi-day pass to the transport network.

Uber and taxis are both also present in Rome, but Rome’s heavy traffic and their high prices make these options best avoided if possible.

For the same reason, we don’t generally recommend Hop On/Hop Off bus tours in Rome, but they do exist if you prefer them.

Despite Rome’s international reputation as a pickpocket hotspot, it is, on the whole, a very safe city.

Yes, you do need to keep an eye on your pockets and bags in crowded areas (pay especially close attention in crowded metro stops like Termini and at tourist hotspots like the Trevi Fountain and Colosseum), but we’ve never had so much as a close call during our visits to Rome.

You will see scammers present in Rome’s crowded areas, including men presenting women with roses to try to elicit payment from her companion, “friendship bracelet” offers for bracelets that are free (until they’re tied on your wrist), etc.

It’s best to ignore these scammers entirely, and brush them off with a polite but firm “no” if necessary.

Also, keep in mind that buying and selling fake designer goods is illegal in Italy as both a consumer and a seller.

Be sure to keep your hands off the bags being touted by salesmen in tourist areas, no matter how convincing the imposter might look from a distance.

Each season brings a reason to spend 4 days in Rome, and we’ve seen them all in the city!

If you have your pick of dates, though, consider a trip in April or October–both offer high chances of beautiful weather while avoiding the worst of the crowds and prices of the summer high season.

Exploring Rome in winter also has its charms–winters are generally mild in Rome, so if you’re willing to bring along a coat, consider using a winter trip to explore Rome at its emptiest.

Our last choices of times to visit Rome would be July and August, when not only are the prices highest and crowds heaviest, but the weather is also boiling hot.

During summer in Rome, we tend to sightsee in the morning, retreat to air-conditioning in the afternoon, and then come out again starting in the early evening–but it’s not as relaxing as visiting during more mild weather!

(If you are planning a June, July, or August trip, here are our best tips for summer in Italy ).

Don’t forget to include these important items when you pack for Rome!

Travel Insurance  — We don’t ever suggest traveling without travel insurance–anything can happen, and this is definitely a case of better safe than sorry.

Bring a small pack of tissues, toss them in your day bag, and you won’t have to worry about it.

You’ll be so glad you brought along a Swiss Army Knife!

Option C: Hope you get lucky with the weather (but fair warning, we’ve never been to Italy and avoided rain entirely!).

Take This Map With You! Click each highlight to pull up the name of the destination. To save this map to “Your Places” on Google Maps, click the star to the right of the title. You’ll then be able to find it under the Maps tab of your Google Maps account! To open the map in a new window, click the button on the top right of the map.

About Kate Storm

In May 2016, I left my suburban life in the USA and became a full-time traveler. Since then, I have visited 50+ countries on 5 continents and lived in Portugal, developing a special love of traveling in Europe (especially Italy) along the way. Today, along with my husband Jeremy and dog Ranger, I’m working toward my eventual goal of splitting my life between Europe and the USA.

31 thoughts on “The Ultimate 4 Days in Rome Itinerary (+ Map & Tips!)”

What an awesome guide! I love how complete it is – no stone unturned! I visited Rome back in 2014 and absolutely loved it. So much to see! Can’t wait to go back one day. Your blog is inspiring me to plan my dream trip: a full month travelling around Italy!

That sounds like an amazing trip! A month in Italy is a fabulous use of time. <3

Hello, Thank you for this! My wife and I spent 4.5 days in Rome in September 2017 and have not stopped taking about it since. The first trip was mostly a “pilgrimage” for us where we did visit many of the churches (though not nearly the 900). We are seriously considering heading back this September and look to do something a bit different. As much as I do love museums, my wife is not much of a fan so I will defer to her 🙂 . However, your itinerary can easily be adjusted to suit our needs (Wed audience in St. Peter Square vs Vatican museums, etc.) and is a super useful guide to areas I never would have considered before (Testaccio) and relatively structured days. Again, thank you!

Thanks so much, Michael! September 2017 was actually when we took our first trip to Rome too, and we can’t stop going back. 🙂 I’m sure you guys have already visited these on your pilgrimage trip, but just in case you haven’t and are looking for more church ideas, some of the coolest churches in Rome IMO that aren’t the completely obvious choices are Basilica di San Clemente and the Santo Stefano Rotondo. Hope you guys have an amazing trip back to Rome!

Thank you for this well-thought out, detailed, and diverse itinerary. Highly appreciated. Looking forward to following many if its stops next month in September.

Thank you so much, Wendy! Have a fabulous trip to Rome! 🙂

This was very insightful

Thanks, Yogita!

I just wanted to thank you because this guide really helped us to have a really awesome trip and saved us tons of time on planing, we did our 5 days trip to Rome on this guide, and the google maps itenerary was a life saver.

Rome was great and this made our trip easier

Best regards, from Lisboa, Portugal!

Thanks so much, Ruben! That is so wonderful to hear. So glad you had an amazing trip!

I travelled to Rome a couple of years ago and this is so close to my itinerary, its not funny. I am so glad to see itineraries like this on the internet that encourage people to go see the historical sights, vs. others that encourage people to ‘skip the important sites’ so as to not waste time.

Thank you for helping people experience the true beauty of Rome

Thank you, Pallavi! That is definitely our goal. 🙂

I just wanted to thank you because this guide will really help us on our 15th anniversary trip later this year. We have never traveled abroad and are so excited. This will save us so much time on planning.

So happy to hear that, Rachel! Hope that you guys have a fantastic trip, and Happy Anniversary!

Hi! My husband and I spent 4 days in Rome in late January 2020 and based our trip around this review. It was perfect for our first time. Thank you so much!

Thank you for sharing, Shareen, that makes my day to hear!

This guide is phenomenal. i was overwhelmed with the incredible options in Rome until I found this guide. We really want to do the food tour in Trastevere you recommend, especially since we are staying in Trastevere. , but there is not very much information about what is included. Is there a better description somewhere or could you give a a quick thumbnail? Thanks!

Thanks so much, John, that’s wonderful to hear!

Unfortunately, the exact Trastevere tour we took isn’t online anymore, but we do link a popular, comparable option in this post: https://www.ourescapeclause.com/trastevere-food-tour/

Trastevere is a popular neighborhood and while each tour will follow its own exact route, you can generally expect to a try a pasta, a cheese shop, gelato, etc–all the classics!

Kate & Jeremy thank you for being so kind and thoughtful to share thitineraries of Rome and additional travel information with the rest of us. I will be in Sorrento the last week of Feb. 2023. Do you know if the port has daily ferry tours to the Amalfi coast? Also travel by vehicle should I be concerned about luggage being stolen during stops as I am traveling. Also, would you have a recommendation on a name of a facility or location I could rent a vehicle. Thank you for your help.

Of course, glad it was helpful!

I’m not sure if the boats run daily during the winter, but I would think so.

For rental cars, we use and recommend Discover Cars–it’s a search engine that will pull up both local and international carriers.

As far as safety, it’s not recommended to leave anything at all visible in your car while parking it. Some people are comfortable with storing luggage out of sight in a vehicle, and others prefer not to take the risk. It’s a matter of personal risk tolerance, essentially.

Loved reading your 4 day guide to Rome, my wife and I are visiting mid August 2023, and aside from visiting the places you mentioned. It would be lovely to know some little restaurants off the typical tourist route that serve really nice Italian food. Hopefully you can send us in the right direction.

We have several, and are always adding new ones to our list!

I try to update them and include options near the attractions where we’re located, but a couple that we like that I don’t think are mentioned here include Osteria La Quercia (near Campo de’ Fiori), Cul de Sac (an enoteca with a huge wine list), Arancio d’Oro, and Antica Osteria Brunetti.

Hope you guys have a great time!

thanks for this information

You’re welcome, have a great time in Rome!

I have thoroughly enjoyed reading through this 4 day itinerary and planning for my stay in Rome. However, after a second look at my reservation I sadly realized I only have 3 days in Rome. Do you have a similar plan for a 3 day stay?

Not yet, though I hope to write one specifically for 3-day visits eventually!

The simplest way to rework this itinerary, though, would be to simply trim off the 4th day, as it covers the most off the beaten path spots of any given day on the route.

However, it depends on your interests! You can also opt to trim off whatever stops don’t sound interesting, and compress your days a bit to squeeze more in to a shorter time frame. For example, if you’re not much for art museums, you could skip the Galleria Borghese and/or the Villa Farnesina, and instead let the Vatican Museums shine as your big museum visit of the trip.

Yes, after looking at day 4, I thought trimming it off might work. Thanks very much for your response and for all the tips you’ve included here.

We were in Rome 10 years ago and are taking my daughter and her Fiance this Oct. This list is exactly what I was looking for! My husband and I would like a day trip to Florence while they do the Vatican (only need to see that once) and I have kept your guide for that as well. Is there a way to learn the bus routes etc? We walked EVERYWHERE on our last trip because we couldnt figure it out. We also used Rick Steves tours for a lot of it too and that was great!

Hi Melissa,

That’s wonderful to hear, thank you!

We don’t use buses a lot in Rome (we generally walk and occasionally take the metro), but you can plan your routes via the bus website! Here it is: https://www.atac.roma.it/

It’s still a bit confusing, but much easier than without any directions. As far as I know, the buses still require that you purchase tickets from a tabaccheria in advance, too–something to keep in mind!

Hi Kate, Love your post and has given me a great advice while we are planning our 21 day trip to Italy. I’m very curious to know what you do as a career/ or money to fund your lifestyle of travel. Would love to be able to see the world. I currently live and work in the US.

Thank you so much!

We’re professional travel bloggers, so our income comes from the ads you see when you scroll through the site and sometimes from a commission if you book something (like a tour or hotel) through one of our links. We don’t accept any sponsored travel and always pay for our own trips.

It did take us years to work up to blogging being a living wage, though! When we started, we were living off of savings from our 9-5 jobs back in Texas. We were one of those couples that quit to travel the world. 🙂

This blog post from years ago (that I’ve since updated) covers a bit of our early days: https://www.ourescapeclause.com/6-month-round-the-world-trip/

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

Logo Cusco Journeys

Treks & Escorted Tours...

LET'S ADVENTURE TOGETHER

[email protected]

Cusco tours & machu picchu 4 days / 3 nights.

Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights allows you to get to know enchanting attractions and landscapes such as the Sacred Valley, with terraces adorning the mountains, picturesque villages where the past is ever-present, and Machu Picchu, an Inca jewel, built with the wisdom of the ancient Peruvians in an ecological setting.

Discover the city of Cusco, also known as the “Navel of the World”, seductive and striking, whose history lives in the streets and squares; the enigmatic Qoricancha or temple of the sun, and the 12-sided stone, works of engineering that allows us to appreciate the greatness of our ancestors.

 Cusco and its environs are sure to amaze and inspire you; join us on this trip of a lifetime.  

Trip Overview:

Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights offers you the possibility of getting to know the beautiful culture of the Incas and its legacy history, you will experience their customs, you will feel the affection of our people who receive their visitors with joy, of course not We will lose the possibility of knowing “Machu Picchu”.

Duration: Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights. Departures: Daily departures from Cusco, Peru. Activities:  Cusco City tour and Nearby ruins, Full day tour to Sacred Valley of the Incas with the markets of Pisac with Ollantaytambo Sun Temple and Machu Picchu tour with overnight at Machu Picchu Pueblo (Aguas Calientes).

By booking The Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights with Cusco Journeys you are choosing the best. Don’t believe us? Check out our reviews on   Tripadvisor.

Day 1: Arrival in Cusco – Qoricancha – Sacsayhuaman – Puca Pucara – Tambomachay.

Upon your arrival to Cusco, we will take you to the hotel and then join your guide for a tour briefing about the wonderful Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights that awaits you. Today, begin the tour with a trip around Cusco to enjoy the sights of the Inca Capital. We’ll see both Cusco’s indigenous and colonial heritage then you’re free to spend the evening at leisure by exploring Cusco’s nightlife or sampling some of its many typical restaurants.

At 1 p.m., we will meet you at your hotel lobby to begin your tour. From here, you will head to Cusco’s Plaza de Armas, where you will visit the famous cathedral. Following, you will continue on foot through an ancient Inca-built street from the Plaza de Armas to the Q’oricancha, the Temple of the Sun. At the Q’oricancha you will be able to compare and contrast the building methods of the Incan culture and Catholicism. This was the key spiritual center of the Incas, which leads to all four quarters of the Inca Empire. There is also a bronze, high altar to be seen.

From Q’oricancha, your group will walk down Avenida El Sol, where you will take your bus 25 minutes outside of the city. You will be taken to the majestic Inca site, Sacsayhuaman, with its enigmatic, 200 ton monoliths, you will be able to hear from your guide and then, explore on your own.

From Sacsayhuaman, you will take a five minute bus ride to the Q’enqo Inca site to see its fascinating Incan altars. Following, you will take another five minute drive to Puca Pucara, a small, circular Inca site. The final stop on our tour is Tambomachay, a water temple with impressive water fountains, thought to be used by the Inca for bathing. We’ll then drive back down to Cusco where the tour ends in the main square, unless you are taking a private tour, in which case, we will return you to your hotel.

*Optional Buffet Dinner with Folkloric Show: Adding $39 per person

• Overnight in Cusco.
• Meals Included: None.
• Entrance Tickets: Included.

Day 2: Sacred Valley Tour: Pisac Ruins – Ollantaytambo – Aguas Calientes.

Begin your journey through the Inca heartland with a full day Sacred Valley tour. The Sacred Valley of the Incas, just outside of Cusco, is a gorgeous sprawling span of green farms, lofty terraced mountains along with numerous quaint towns unmoved by time. The Sacred Valley is the center of lively festivals and the best handicrafts in Peru.

Our first stop is the artisanal capital of Peru, the small village of Pisac; It’s famous for its craft market in the main plaza, busiest on Sundays, Tuesdays, and Thursdays, where local natives come to sell their colorful woven cloth, alpaca wool ponchos and fashions, reproductions of ancient jewelry, engraved gourds and much, much more. Pisac is the best stop in Peru for mementos of your trip to bring home to family and friends.

After a delicious lunch in Pisac, we’ll travel Ollantaytambo, the only Inca town that remains inhabited.  This traditional town is a wonderful example of pre-Colombian architecture. Here we will explore the expansive ruins overlooking the town and discuss their history and traditional beliefs of the people of the Sacred Valley.

Later in the afternoon in Ollantaytambo we’ll catch the train to Aguas Calientes to get ready to explore Machu Picchu early the next morning.

• Overnight in Aguas Calientes.
• Meal Include: Breakfast, Buffet Lunch.
• Entrance Ticket: Included.

Day 3: Machu Picchu – Aguas calientes – Ollantaytambo – Cusco.

Today is the highlight of any trip to South America – Machu Picchu! This world-famous site is easily the most remarkable pre-Colombian city in the world, partially because of its mysterious beauty and its lofty place among the Andean cloud forest. A guided tour will help you discover and understand what Machu Picchu shares about the life and customs of the Incas. Surrounded by dramatic terraces cut into the mountain sides, famed for innovatively feeding the empire, this complex city will have you fascinated all day. Narrow roads and steps connect ancient houses, temples, warehouses, and a large central square.

Our guide will give you a thorough history of the ruins and the Incas as well as share with you the possible explanations for Machu Picchu’s function and importance. You’ll have free time for an optional and very challenging, unguided hike to the top of Huayna Picchu, where you will have the best view of Peru’s World Wonder. This hike is only recommended for people who are in good physical condition and with no fear of heights, but the unparalleled views of Machu Picchu are especially rewarding.

After a long day of exploring this lost city, we’ll hop the bus down the mountain back to Aguas Calientes and catch the train back to Cusco. Upon arrival to Cusco we’ll drop you off at your hotel for a good night’s rest.

• Meals Include: Breakfast.

Day 4: Cusco – Transfer to the Airport.

Today is the last day in Cusco so we transfer you back to the Cusco´s airport. Nevertheless, you can still extend your trip. To do so, please check our tailor made section or choose another of our tours.

Please note: a return flight to Lima can be arranged upon request.

• Round trip transfers between airport and hotel (Cusco).
• Round trip transfers between hotel and train station.
• Round trip train tickets between Ollantaytambo and Aguas Calientes.
• Round trip bus tickets between Aguas Calientes and Machu Picchu.
• Ground transportation for scheduled tours.
• Entrance tickets to Machu Picchu & all scheduled attractions (except Cusco Cathedral).
• English speaking guide for all scheduled tours.
• Accommodations 1 night in Aguas Calientes (breakfast included).
• Accommodations 2 nights in Cusco (breakfast included).
• Lunch at Sacred Valley.
• First aid kit and oxygen.
• Permanent assistance.

Not Included

• Huayna Picchu  o Machu Picchu Mountain Tickets (USD$ 75).
• Domestic or international flights.
• Meals not mentioned in the program.
• Medications and personal items, especially pills for altitude sickness.
• Travel insurance.
• Hot springs in Aguas Calientes fee(optional: 10 soles).
• Excess baggage.
• Alcoholic drinks, soda or bottled mineral water.
• National or international calls.
• Personal expenses.
• Optional tips for guides and drivers.

Recommended things to take:

We recommend bringing as little as possible but do bring what you need. Don’t worry, if you forget something, you can probably buy it in Lima or Cusco once you arrive. Tourist shops abound and sell a whole range of items from water bottles and first aid kits to hiking gear. You can also rent hiking equipment in Cusco, which can be a good option if you don’t want to travel to Peru with a whole lot of heavy hiking and camping gear.

Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights Packing List:

After spending a lot of time travelling around Cusco & Machu Picchu we have come up with our definitive list of what to pack for a trip to Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights.

• Original passport.
• Original International Student Identity Card (if applicable, for student discount).
• Rain poncho (plastic).
• Warm jacket or coat.
• Cap or hat.
• Sunglasses.
• Extra clothing (including layers for changing weather conditions).
• Comfortable walking shoes or sneakers.
• Suitable shoes for walking in Machu Picchu.
• Water bottle.
• Insect repellent.
• Camera or smartphone for photos.
• Toiletries.
• Ear plugs for sleeping comfort.
• Water and snacks.
• Slippers or sandals (for showers and Hot Springs).
• Bathing suit (for the Hot Springs in Aguas Calientes).
• Extra money.

Required & Useful Documents for Peru

• Valid passport with at least six months remaining
• Photocopies of important documents like passport, tickets and prescriptions
• Travel insurance, we recommend World Nomads or Travel Guard
• Blood donor/type card

Price per person for Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights:

Important note about cusco journeys service categories:.

• Standard:  All tours ie. City Tours, Sacred Valley, Maras/Moray, Machu Picchu etc. are group tours with transportation to Machu Picchu aboard the Expedition class train.
• Superior:  All tours ie. City Tours, Sacred Valley, Maras/Moray, Machu Picchu etc. are group tours with transportation to Machu Picchu aboard the Expedition class train.
• First Class:  All tours ie. City Tours, Sacred Valley, Maras/Moray, Machu Picchu etc. are private tours with transportation to Machu Picchu aboard the Vistadome (panoramic view) train.
• Luxury:  All tours ie. City Tours, Sacred Valley, Maras/Moray, Machu Picchu etc. are private tours with transportation to Machu Picchu aboard the Hiram Bingham luxury service train.
• Student Discount: US$20.00
• Under 15 years will pay as student: US$20.00
• Under 7 years Discount: US$30.00

Optional Extras (Need to Book in Advance):

• Machu Picchu Mountain climbing:  USD 75.00 (Need to book in advance).
• Huayna Picchu Mountain climbing: USD 75.00 (Need to book in advance).
• Vistadome Train Aguas Calientes-Cusco: USD65.00 – One Way (Need to book in advance, that is only for Standard and Tourist Class Packages).
• Flight Tickets:   Lima – Cusco – Lima to be quoted on the day of enquiry (prices vary from US$185 to US$399 per person depending on the season. can be booked by Cusco Journeys is you wish.

5 Star Hotels 4 Star Hotels 3 Star Hotels

Monasterio Hotel Cusco

The Monasterio Hotel is one of most famous hotels in Cusco city. The main reason comes to being of the Orient-Express Collection, but the property really distinguished itself when it became the first to offer oxygen-enriched rooms to combat the altitude sickness. Situated just...

JW Marriot Hotel Cusco

The hotel is Located in the historic center of the city, the JW Marriott Cusco combines the needs of luxury travelers with a unique design around the colonial convent of San Agustin, built in the sixteenth century and declared Cultural Heritage of Peru. The...

Tambo del Inka Hotel

Situated between Vilcanota River and the mountains of Sacred Valley, Tambo del Inka, a Luxury Collection Resort & Spa, is a 5-start hotel, it is the only in Urubamba with a private train station to Machu Picchu. Facilities include a pool and spa where...

Belmond Hotel Rio Sagrado

In the Sacred Valley of the Incas, among verdant fields and towering mountains, lies the Rio Sagrado Belmond Hotel. Set on the banks Urubamba River, this beautiful hotel is built in natural materials and is located at 4 km outside Urubamba on the way...

Inkaterra Machupicchu Pueblo

Description: The Inkaterra Asociacion was founded to conserve the environment, ecosystems, cultural, archaeological and natural resources and to maintain an ecological balance. It also works to support Peru’s cultural identity and sustainable development. Part of Inkaterra profits are invested in the association activities, such...

Belmond Sanctuary Lodge Machupicchu

This luxurious lodge is the only accommodation located adjacent to the citadel of Machu Picchu, which can offer you the chance to avoid the crowds and be the first and last visitor during the day to explore this wonderful Inca site. By taking a...

Xima Hotel Cusco

The Xima Hotel is situated in a fantastic place for recreation and adventure, close to all the main tourist attractions of Cusco city. This 4-star accommodation provides visitors a pleasant and cozy stay, ideal for vacations, also its strategic location close to banks, shopping...

San Agustín El Dorado Hotel

The San Agustin “El Dorado” is an ideal hotel to visit the tourist attractions in Cusco. It is located in the historical part of Cusco, between the main plaza and “Qoricancha” (Sun Temple); this hotel is in Colonial and Andean style. Its style is...

Novotel Hotel Cusco

Built around the early sixteenth century, which was the home of the Spanish conquistador Pizarro. This historic hotel with so much charm is an ideal starting point to discover the impressive sites of the city. Here you may enjoy the relaxed and calm with...

Casa Andina Private Collection

Casa Andina Private Collection Valle Sagrado hotel is an excellent choice for those seeking a holiday in the mountains of Yanahuara, located between the towns of Urubamba and Ollantaytambo. This hotel in the sacred valley is surrounded by vegetation and offers impressive views to...

Sonesta Posadas del Inca Yucay

The Hotel “Sonesta Posada del Inca Yucay” is a beautiful place to rest. Located in the picturesque Sacred Valley between Ollantaytambo and Pisac at 9000 feet, the Sonesta Hotel is a complete village with its own church inside, quiet town of Yucay. Visitors enter...

Mapi Hotel by Inkaterra

The “El Mapi” hotel offers an efficient and friendly people into a pleasant atmosphere; here you will be welcomed along with other global guests, relax in a wholesome ambience after your long visit to the Machu Picchu archaeological site. El Mapi hotel offers a...

Tierra Viva Machupicchu

Tierra Viva Machu Picchu hotel strategic location ensures our clients the best experience possible of the amazing Inca citadel. Our facilities are located in the quietest area of Aguas Calientes, facing the Urubamba River and surrounded by the Forest of Clouds. We have exclusively...

Taypicala Machupichu

The Taypikala Boutique Machu Picchu is a beautiful and rustic building situated into a privileged location, surrounded by life and nature that invites reflection and contemplation of the creator’s work. The Taypikala Boutique Machupicchu seeks to meet the needs of its customers by providing...

San Agustin Internacional Hotel

The “San Agustin International” is an exceptional hotel in reference to “Gaudiano” style, designed by the famous cusquenian architect “Fernando de la Jara”. The hotel, unique in its style, invites you to enjoy the ultimate blend of both sophistication and mysticism within your stay...

Sueños del Inca Hotel Cusco

The “Sueños del Inca” hotel is located in the heart of the historic downtown of Cusco city, alongside the traditional neighborhood of San Blas and several tourist attractions situated nearby. The unique architecture of this house has original stone walls, floors, stairs and even...

Casa Andina Classic San Blas

The “Casa Andina Classic San Blas” hotel is located in the famous neighborhood of artists, known as San Blas, situated a few steps from the main square of Cusco, it is a right place to admire a panoramic view of Cusco city and its...

San Agustín Urubamba Hotel

The Hotel and Spa San Agustin Urubamba has a privileged location, excellent to start your visit to Machu Picchu, plus the hotel is near the most important ruins of the Sacred Valley the Incas such as Ollantaytambo, Pisac and Maras Moray. The convenient location...

San Agustín Monasterio Recoleta

Hotel San Agustin Urubamba was one of the first Catholic monasteries in Cusco, built in the seventeenth century in the colonial era and administered by the Franciscan fathers. This Hotel spa and conference occupies a historic building, comprises a total of 32 rooms, the...

Eco Andina Hotel

The Eco Andina hotel is situated in the heart of the Sacred Valley of the Incas, with a cozy atmosphere and close to the most important archaeological sites and communities; accommodation and services are separated by blocks in order to offer its guests peace...

Casa Andina Classic Machuicchu

Guests can start their day with a tasty, buffet-style breakfast. The breakfast includes seasonal fruit, cheese, ham, bread, juice, coffee, cereal, and among others. Throughout the rest of the day, you can order your lunch at the restaurants situated nearby. Meals incorporate local ingredients...

Intipunku Inn Hotel

The Inti Punku Machu Picchu hotel has been operating since 2010, featuring a clean, crisp décor in a quiet setting yet conveniently located right near the train station and the handicraft market, with experience of more than five years in the market. This establishment...

Terms & Conditions

By booking or participating in a tour and any related products or services (a Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights ) with Cusco Journeys, you agree to these Terms & Conditions.

• Your booking is confirmed and a contract exists when the Tour Operator or your travel agent issues a written confirmation after receipt of the applicable deposit amount. Please check your confirmation carefully and report any incorrect or incomplete information to the Tour Operator or authorized agent immediately. Please ensure that names are exactly as stated in the relevant passport.
• You will pay a deposit which is completely non-refundable in any situation. There are no exceptions.
• You will be required to show the original passport (not a copy) that you booked with, at the checkpoint to enter the Inca Trail. If you originally booked with an old passport and then renewed your passport, you must also bring your expired passport along with your new, valid passport to permit entry or they will refuse your entrance to the trail.
• The only acceptable ID to receive a Student Discount is your University Card with a clear expiration date that must be the same year as trek. IDs with expiry dates the following year, even though clearly valid, will not be accepted by the Peruvian government. You must submit a copy of this card at time of booking.

Cancellations:

• Cancellations: In order to confirm this Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights , a deposit of 50% is required per person at time of booking. The balance of the trip price is due 90 days before the departure date. Special holiday payment and cancellation terms may apply. Guests who must cancel their Cusco Tours 4 Days 3 Nights for any reason must do so in writing (we do not accept medical notes of any kind) as our out of pocket expenses are non-refundable to us. Standard cancellations are subject to the following per-person penalties, based on number of days prior to departure:

ONCE BOOKED, DEPOSITS ARE NON-REFUNDABLE. CHART BELOW OUTLINES WHAT FURTHER FEES WILL BE DUE.

Inca Trail Tours:

• Permits: Permits for the Inca Trail are in your name and can not be transferred to anyone else under any circumstances. Change of dates is also not possible once a permit has been purchased. Permits are non-refundable and non-transferable. The deposit will be forfeited. Please note that this is a regulation of the Peruvian government and not Cusco Journeys (or any agency).
• In extreme cases when the “Inca Trail to Machu Picchu” is declared closed for safety reasons, Cusco Journeys will replace your trek with an alternative trek.
• Those who booked PERMITS with a Student ID must bring that ID with them on the trek. If they fail to show this card to the Park Rangers, they will not be allowed entry onto the trail.

Medical Information:

• You must advise Cusco Journeys of any medical problems or allergies you may have. You need to be in good physical health, and if your health is questionable, then you should consult a doctor. If you are over the age of 70 years old, then you will need to present us with a current good health medical certificate.
• You are responsible for assessing whether a Tour is suitable for you. You should consult your physician to confirm your fitness for travel and participation in any planned activities. You should seek your physician’s advice on vaccinations and medical precautions. The Tour Operator does not provide medical advice. It is your responsibility to assess the risks and requirements of each aspect of the Tour based on your own unique circumstances, limitations, fitness level and medical requirements.
• Cusco Journeys reserves the right to deny you permission to travel or participate in any aspect of a Tour at any time and at your own risk and expense where the Tour Operator determines that your physical or mental condition renders you unfit for travel or you represent a danger to yourself or others.
• Pregnancy is considered a medical condition and must be disclosed to the Tour Operator at the time of booking. The Tour Operator may refuse to carry pregnant women over 24 weeks. The Tour Operator may refuse to carry anyone with certain medical conditions if reasonable accommodation or alternatives cannot be arranged.
• It is strongly encouraged to purchase Travel Insurance to protect you in case of medical emergency or any tour cancellations.

Tours and Treks:

• All balances need to be paid in either cash, Credit Card, Western Union, Transfer Bank or PayPal (in full) prior to the briefing which will be held the night before your tour. Visa incurs a 5% service fee and if you need to use another card, it must be through PayPal which incurs a 5.5% service fee. You must advise your guide if you wish to leave the group or the camping area for independent walks or sightseeing. If you are experiencing any problems with the services of the guide or tour, please advise the guide in that moment, so that he can resolve any problems.
• All Adventure Treks include transportation to Cusco. The return train route depends on train availability.
• If you become ill or injured on the trail and are unable to continue, a porter will be provided to accompany you back to an area with emergency assistance capabilities. Helicopter air lifts and medical assistance are at the expense of the trekker. If you are unable to complete the tour due to illness, we will assist you in meeting your group at Machu Picchu to recommence your tour at that point. There will be no refund of the original payment. However, we will prepare a document to certify illness which can be presented for your travel insurance.
• Cusco Journeys will take all reasonable care in providing to our clients avoidance of accident, illness, and loss of personal property, and will only employ suitably qualified staff. We accept responsibility for the actions of our own employees. Cusco Journeys cannot, however, be responsible for any action of third parties. You are totally responsible for your own personal property and rented equipment.
• Cusco Journeys does not take responsibility for unfavorable weather conditions, natural catastrophe, strikes, accidents, illness, injury, loss of personal ítems, etc. It is the client’s responsibility to carry insurance to cover these types of events. We reserve the right to modify or cancel the program due to any of the unforeseen conditions listed above.
• Cusco Journeys may modify your itinerary where reasonably required in its sole discretion.
• Group tours might be as large as 16 participants. Groups are open to everyone no matter skill or age. By accepting a Group Tour you acknowledge that others might change the speed and timing of the tour.
• All tours are done in English.
• Any costs, whether direct or incidental, incurred by the Customer as the result of delays caused by bad weather, trail conditions, river levels, road conditions, transportation delays, sickness, government intervention or other contingencies which are beyond the control of southern explorations will not be reimbursed.

Thank you so much for choosing Cusco Journeys!!!

Please make sure to type your e-mail address well otherwise We can not answer it. We promise to always answer within 24 hours (usually within the hour). If for some reason you do not receive any reply within 24 hours check out your spam,junk folder. You can either email address: [email protected]

Please leave your phone number, if you would like to talk with our sales specialist? (optional):

Your Email:

Afghanistan Albania Algeria American Samoa Andorra Angola Anguilla Antarctica Antigua and Barbuda Argentina Armenia Aruba Australia Austria Azerbaijan Bahamas Bahrain Bangladesh Barbados Belarus Belgium Belize Benin Bermuda Bhutan Bolivia Bosnia and Herzegovina Botswana Brazil Brunei Darussalam Bulgaria Burkina Faso Burundi Cambodia Cameroon Canada Cape Verde Cayman Islands Central African Republic Chad Chile China Christmas Island Cocos (Keeling) Islands Colombia Comoros Democratic Republic of the Congo (Kinshasa) Congo, Republic of(Brazzaville) Cook Islands Costa Rica Ivory Coast (Cote d'Ivoire) Croatia Cuba Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Djibouti Dominica Dominican Republic East Timor Timor-Leste Ecuador Egypt El Salvador Equatorial Guinea Eritrea Estonia Ethiopia Falkland Islands Faroe Islands Fiji Finland France French Guiana French Polynesia French Southern Territories Gabon Gambia Georgia Germany Ghana Gibraltar Great Britain Greece Greenland Grenada Guadeloupe Guam Guatemala Guinea Guinea-Bissau Guyana Haiti Holy See Honduras Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Indonesia Iran (Islamic Republic of) Iraq Ireland Israel Italy Jamaica Japan Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Kiribati Korea, Democratic People's Rep. (North Korea) Korea, Republic of (South Korea) Kosovo Kuwait Kyrgyzstan Lao, People's Democratic Republic Latvia Lebanon Lesotho Liberia Libya Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Macao Macedonia, Rep. of Madagascar Malawi Malaysia Maldives Mali Malta Marshall Islands Martinique Mauritania Mauritius Mayotte Mexico Micronesia, Federal States of Moldova, Republic of Monaco Mongolia Montenegro Montserrat Morocco Mozambique Myanmar, Burma Namibia Nauru Nepal Netherlands Netherlands Antilles New Caledonia New Zealand Nicaragua Niger Nigeria Niue Northern Mariana Islands Norway Oman Pakistan Palau Palestinian territories Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Peru Philippines Pitcairn Island Poland Portugal Puerto Rico Qatar Reunion Island Romania Russian Federation Rwanda Saint Kitts and Nevis Saint Lucia Saint Vincent and the Grenadines Samoa San Marino Sao Tome and Príncipe Saudi Arabia Senegal Serbia Seychelles Sierra Leone Singapore Slovakia (Slovak Republic) Slovenia Solomon Islands Somalia South Africa South Sudan Spain Sri Lanka Sudan Suriname Swaziland Sweden Switzerland Syria, Syrian Arab Republic Taiwan (Republic of China) Tajikistan Tanzania Thailand Tibet Timor-Leste (East Timor) Togo Tokelau Tonga Trinidad and Tobago Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan Turks and Caicos Islands Tuvalu Uganda Ukraine United Arab Emirates United Kingdom United States Uruguay Uzbekistan Vanuatu Vatican City State (Holy See) Venezuela Vietnam Virgin Islands (British) Virgin Islands (U.S.) Wallis and Futuna Islands Western Sahara Yemen Zambia Zimbabwe

We’re here for you all day, everyday!

As a global travel company operating tours for clients from all seven continents, Cusco Journeys realizes that questions can arise anywhere at any time. Our reservations team is available to assist you.

Address: ol Avenue #900, Centro Comercial Machu Picchu Al Mundo, Office 213 (2nd floor)

+51 966405 778

+51 980 811 833

Business Hours

Monday - Friday 9am to 8pm

Saturday - 9am to 2pm

Sunday - Closed

TOUR PACKAGES NAME:

Please fill in the passport details. yhis assists us whit the booking of your flights, trains, tours etc.

(You can add more squares if they are more passengers)

PASSENGER DETAILS:

Departure Date: (*)

Alternative Date:

3: Travelers Information

Full Name: (*)

Number of people: :

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

HOTEL CATEGORY

5 Stars 4 Stars 3 Stars 2 Stars

Please advise room preference, indicating number of rooms of each type.

*We cannot guarantee that a matrimonial room will always be available in which case we will book a twin room.

FLIGHT DETAILS

International flight details: arrival

Example: 5:00pm (X) , 17:00 hrs. (✓)

International flight details: departure

Tour Language:

English Spanish Another (extra paid)

OPTIONAL EXTRAS (NEED BOOK IN ADVANCE):

If you wish to climb one of these mountains please mark with the symbol that is located below, any of these mountains has an extra of $75.00 dollars per person.

Huayna Picchu Mount. Machu Picchu Mountain Another (Extra Paid)

Please list any dietary requirements

Contact telephone in case of emergency (please include codes):

College tour season is about to kick off. Here are 10 tips from college tour guides to have a successful campus visit.

• As spring starts, colleges nationwide will welcome parents and students to tour their campuses. 
• College tour guides want people to arrive on time, ask the right questions, and have fun.
• They also recommend students take the tours on their own, without their parents.

Spring break is right around the corner, and for many high-school students and their parents, that means many will be hitting the road to tour colleges around the country.

To make the most of your visit, Business Insider spoke with college students and tour guides. They know the campuses like the backs of their hands, and they know how to walk backward.

Here are the dos and don'ts of college tours from student guides .

1. Get there with no time to spare, but don't be late.

You won't get points for arriving early, so try to arrive on time. But if you do happen to arrive late , there's no need to worry.

"If something comes up and you are late, ask your guide what you missed once the tour finishes," Skyler Kawecki-Muonio, a senior at Sarah Lawrence College in New York, told BI. "They will happily fill you in."

2. Dress to impress, but don't sacrifice comfort.

It's important to look nice, but you don't have to don a jacket and tie. Tour-goers should put their best foot forward with a sturdy pair of walking shoes , and don't forget to dress for the weather.

"At Fairleigh Dickinson, tours go out rain or shine, so make sure to wear clothes that will keep you warm," Emily Bone, a junior at Fairleigh Dickinson University in New Jersey, said .

3. Don't forget to sign in, but skip the résumé .

Most schools have a check-in desk where you'll receive a campus map and other literature. But don't bother furnishing schools with your portfolio.

"Students can leave their résumés at home," Henry Millar, a senior at the College of William & Mary in Virginia, said. "Tour guides generally do not have any sway in the admissions process whatsoever, so feel free to save the paper."

4. Pay attention on the tour, but do it solo if possible.

Some schools offer to let parents and kids take separate tours, which has advantages.

"Get excited about your child's potential future in college, but give them some space to see what they think of that school on their own," Nathan Weisbrod, a junior at Wesleyan University in Connecticut, told BI.

Related stories

Students can comfortably ask questions without a parent present and compare notes afterward .

5. Ask all your questions, but avoid personal interrogations.

This is the time to inquire about any aspect of campus life , and don't feel shy about speaking up.

"Tour guides love getting questions because it allows us to cater the tour, especially in small groups, toward the needs and interests of the families on that specific tour," Halle Spataro, a senior at Bucknell University, said.

But some topics are off-limits, so don't ask your tour guide about their SAT scores , ACT scores , or what they wrote about in their essay .

6. Speak up, but let the student take the lead.

Parents may be tempted to raise their hands again and again, but this tour is about the student, so there should be space to let them shine.

"Try to take the back seat — or the passenger seat — but refrain from driving all of your child's interactions," Julian Jacklin, a junior at Reed College in Oregon, said. "Students who feel they can own that experience usually ask the most questions and engage with the tour more."

7. Say thanks, but don't leave with questions unanswered.

Maybe your guide didn't hear you, or your kid was reluctant to speak up. You can still get the information you want before leaving.

"There's a lot of information students are getting that day and a lot of excitement with being in a new place, which can make people forget to ask certain questions," Lorenzo Mars, a junior at Pepperdine University in California, said.

Therefore, get your tour guide's email address so that you can follow up .

8. You may know exactly what school is right but keep an open mind.

Don't be surprised if a city-living kid is suddenly intrigued by a small-town setting.

"The college search and college experience are all about getting to know yourself better and growing, so on a tour, students have to trust themselves and their judgment of the 'world' they've just stepped into," Thomas Elias, a senior at the University of Scranton in Pennsylvania, said .

9. Take in as much as possible, but remember to have fun.

Sure, preparing for the next four years can be scary and stressful. But it's also an exciting milestone, so enjoy the ride.

"These tours serve as great opportunities to learn more about colleges — along with their cities, culture, and people," Connor Gee, a sophomore at the University of Mississippi, said. "Have fun with it!"

10. Weigh the pros and cons of the school, but don't stop there.

Your tour may be over, but you can still learn other ways to immerse yourself in college life .

"See if the school offers additional experiences, like eating in the cafeteria or attending a class," Emily Balda, a senior at Seton Hall University in New Jersey, said. "Consider it 'food for thought.'"

Watch: What new Citadel military college "knobs" go through on day one at the controversial school

• Main content

4 Days in Rome: Detailed Itinerary (+Map & 2024 Planning Tips)

By Author Jurga

Posted on Last updated: March 5, 2024

Visiting Rome for 4 days and wondering what to see and how to best plan your time? In this article, we share a perfect itinerary for 4 days in Rome , with maps, essential info, and tips to make the most of your stay in the Eternal City. Find out!

Rome is one of the most beautiful places to visit in Italy and an absolute must-see! Whether you are planning a city break in Rome or it’s part of a longer trip through Italy, it’s well worth taking a bit more time to explore this beautiful city and not just rush through the main attractions.

This Rome 4 days itinerary brings you to ALL the must-see places in the city . In addition, it also includes quite a few of Rome’s hidden gems , some of the best views in the city , and some amazing underground sites that will make your visit so much more memorable.

We also share hotel and restaurant recommendations and other useful tips that will help you plan a perfect trip and explore the city just a bit deeper than most standard itineraries.

Good to know: We recently spent 4 days in Rome and this itinerary is based on the trip that we did and is very detailed (including suggestions on where to eat or where to find the best gelato, etc.). In this guide, we share our experience-based tips and advice , the tickets we booked and tours we did, what we’d do differently, and why.

It should save you hours and hours of research and help you plan an amazing visit and make the absolute most of your four days in Rome. None of the activities, restaurants, or accommodations are sponsored, so if we recommend something it’s only because we actually liked it.

Top 4 Tickets & Experiences to Book in Advance:

• Vatican Museums & Sistine Chapel .
• Colosseum, Roman Forum & Palatine Hill .
• Local Food Tour .
• Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs .

TIP: Use this itinerary just as an example of what can be done each day and switch the days around if you have to. Before deciding where to go on which day, be sure to check if all the places you want to visit are open!

For example, we had to adapt our 4-day Rome sightseeing plan because the Vatican Museums weren’t open on the day we wanted to visit.

PRO TIP: For the Vatican and the Colosseum, it’s essential to book your tickets or tours in advance , so be sure to check that first, before planning anything else! If you are planning on visiting top sites on your own, check out this digital Rome Tourist Card . It’s a combined ticket that includes entry to the Colosseum, Roman Forum, Palatine Hill, Sistine Chapel, St. Peter’s Basilica & its Dome.

This card allows you to choose time slots for all the top attractions in one go (so you can immediately see what’s available on which day). It saves you time and money, and it’s simple to use because all tickets are digital.

Below, you will find more information about tickets and tours for these and other sights in Rome.

READ ALSO: Tips for Visiting Rome

How to see the best of Rome in 4 days? With so many landmarks, must-see attractions, and countless interesting sights scattered in and around the city, there’s not one perfect itinerary.

But if you want to see the very best of Rome, this 4-day plan will not disappoint. I spent a lot of time creating this itinerary for our own trip and I’m quite confident that you’ll love it as well! At the bottom of the article, you’ll also find a MAP indicating all the places to see, restaurant suggestions, and even the meeting points of some tours we recommend.

Of course, you can just pick the places that interest you the most, see fewer places, and explore deeper. But this gives you an idea of what to see, how to plan your time, and what can actually be done in four days in Rome.

Good to know: Prepare to walk a lot (wear comfortable shoes!!!) and if you can, make an effort to get up early so that you can see some of the most beautiful places without the crowds. Also, stay in the heart of the city center! We stayed at 9HotelCesari , just a few minutes’ walk from the Pantheon and the Trevi Fountain. We always stay in this area when visiting Rome – it just makes everything so much easier and more enjoyable.

TIP: If you need airport transfers to/from the city center, you can find all the best options here (by train, bus, or pre-booked taxi).

• DAY 1: Historic Center, Colosseum, several hidden gems, Trastevere
• DAY 2: The Vatican, Food Tour & Jewish Quarter
• DAY 3: Markets, the Pantheon, Galleries, Crypts, Shopping, City Views
• DAY 4: Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs Tour, most interesting churches, Colosseum at sunset
• Map & getting around
• Additional suggestions if you have more time
• Where to stay

Here’s what your four days in Rome could look like:

Day 1: Historic Center, Colosseum, Baths of Caracalla, Aventine Hill, Mouth of Truth, Trastevere

PLANNING TIP: Be sure to book the tickets or the tour of the Colosseum in advance! We did and recommend this all-in tour . If you rather go on your own, you have the choice between regular tickets or tickets that include Arena Floor as well . We recommend the latter as standing on the Gladiator Arena is really special.

Here’s what your first of the 4 days in Rome could look like:

7 – 8 AM: Trevi Fountain, Pantheon, Piazza Navona, Breakfast

Start your first day in Rome with an early walk through the city center. I recommend going to see the Pantheon and the Trevi Fountain first thing in the morning. These are the most visited landmarks in the center and they are always crowded. But if you come here early, you have a chance of seeing these places without too many people around.

If you stay in the heart of the city center, it’s really easy to see these places without the crowds. Our hotel was so centrally located that we woke up at around 6.30 AM, took a quick shower, dressed, and were at the Trevi Fountain just before 7 AM. It was magical to see it empty and actually be able to enjoy it and take the time to admire this masterpiece!

It’s also nice to see the Pantheon and Piazza della Rotonda without people. You won’t be able to visit inside the Pantheon this early, but you can come back for that later. If you have a bit more time, you can walk to Piazza Navona and see it without the crowds as well (it’s just a 3-4 minutes walk from the Pantheon, so really not a big detour).

Go back to your hotel for breakfast . Alternatively, you can have breakfast at one of the many cafés in the city center.

READ ALSO: The Best Area to Stay in Rome

8.30 – 10 AM: Piazza Venezia, Capitoline Hill, Via dei Fori Imperiali

Next big stop – the Colosseum . It’s just a 20-30 minutes walk from the city center. You could take a taxi, rent an electrical scooter, or simply walk. We recommend walking because you can see so many other landmarks along the way, especially around Via dei Fori Imperiali .

On your way to the Colosseum, you’ll pass Piazza Venezia . This is a huge and very busy city square with a colossal monument (Altar of the Fatherland) and the equestrian statue of Vittorio Emanuele II. This is one of the must-see places in Rome!

TIP: If you have some extra time, you could visit the monument and take the elevator to the top . The panoramic views are stunning, but it’s not cheap and can take quite some time if it’s busy. Yet, it’s definitely possible to squeeze it in your itinerary if you plan well.

Then, take the wide staircase on the right side of the monument and visit Capitoline Hill (Campidoglio). This staircase and the square were designed by Michelangelo. On top of the stairs, you’ll see impressive palaces that house Capitoline Museums .

With just four days in Rome, you’ll have to be very selective about where to go and what to see. If you want to visit these museums and the Colosseum + Forum Romanum on the same day, it’s definitely possible, but you’ll have to skip most of the other suggestions for this day.

We recommend just passing by here. On top of the hill, check out one of the best viewpoints in Rome , Belvedere di Via Monte Tarpeo which overlooks the Roman Forum. On the other side of the Senatorial Palace, you’ll see a small statue of the Capitoline Wolf . This statue depicts an old legend, according to which a wolf saved and cared for Romulus and Remus, the twins that later founded the city of Rome.

After leaving Capitoline Hill, turn left and walk to the main street – Via dei Fori Imperiali and in the direction of the Colosseum. This road is like a museum in itself – with the Roman Forum on your right, the Forum of Augustus and other historic places on your left, and impressive statues of Roman emperors around you.

10.30 AM – 1.30 PM: Colosseum Tour + Roman Forum & Palatine Hill

If you booked your tickets or a tour of the Colosseum , you can now visit the Colosseum inside. All tickets also include an entrance to the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill . So plan on spending the next 2-4 hours here. In fact, the tickets include a few other places, but those are not a must. Just as with so many other places in the city, you could spend the whole day here, but with just 4 days in Rome, we recommend only focusing on the musts.

There are several options for the Colosseum. Most people just get a regular ticket and visit on their own, but you should also know that there is a slightly more expensive ticket that includes Arena Floor . In addition, I recommend visiting the underground level as well. And for that, you need a guided tour.

I’ll spare you all the details about all the ticket and tour options and to keep things short, just say that after lots of research, we booked a tour like this that includes Colosseum (all levels), Palatine Hill, and Forum Romanum . It was absolutely worth it and I highly recommend it.

Good to know: We booked a tour at 10.30 AM. You could also rush and come here first thing in the morning, but it’s ALWAYS busy at the Colosseum anyway, so it won’t really enhance your experience. And if you prebook your tickets in advance, there’s no need to hurry or worry about anything.

Going with a tour, we didn’t have to stress about where exactly to go, which line to stand in (we actually skipped most of the lines except the security check), or where exactly to go once we were inside the Colosseum.

We saw all the levels of the Colosseum – the Underground, the Arena Floor, and all the regular areas accessible to everyone. It was an amazing experience and our guide made it a smooth, informative, and very enjoyable visit.

Afterwards, we walked to the nearby Palatine Hill and the Roman Forum . Once again, it was great to have a guide here. I’ve been to these places before, without a guide, and it’s only now that I realized how much I missed.

These areas are so vast and there’s so much to see that it’s easy to get overwhelmed and miss some of the highlights. Also, the guide tells you stories and anecdotes and helps put things into perspective and better understand what you are seeing. Our tour ended at the Roman Forum, giving us more time to explore it further on our own.

READ ALSO: Guide to Colosseum Levels & Tickets

1.30 – 2.30 PM: Lunch near Colosseum

After all the walking and sightseeing, you’ll want to sit down for lunch! So find a nice restaurant near the Colosseum and enjoy a quiet lunch. We thought that we’d just get something quick for lunch and go on, but it was actually nice to take a break and I highly recommend you do the same!

We headed to the small neighborhood east of the Colosseum – this is where you’ll find lots of restaurants and cafes. And yes, many of them are really touristy, but there are some good places to eat here as well. The biggest problem is finding a table here in the afternoon…

For a quick bite, you could try L’Antico Forno . If you have some time to sit down, check out Trattoria Luzzi . This is one of the most popular and good-value restaurants near the Colosseum, but if you want to find a table here at lunch, try to reserve in advance.

We had lunch at La Pace del Cervello , which didn’t have the best reviews, but had a free table outside and we didn’t want to waste more time looking around. The service was super fast and friendly, the pizza was one of the best we had in Rome, and the prices were very correct as well.

TIP: The best way to find where to eat in Rome is to simply take a look at the reviews on Google Maps of the nearby restaurants and pick a place that looks more local (to start with, no pictures on the menu). But – once again – it’s usually so busy near the Colosseum at lunch that you will be happy to find a free table. And if you just get a pizza and some drinks, as we did, you can’t really go wrong anyway.

3 – 3.30 PM: Baths of Caracalla

If you want to get a bit off the beaten path in Rome, I highly recommend visiting the Baths of Caracalla . Located about 20 minutes walk from the Colosseum, this is one of the most remarkable Ancient Rome sites that most tourists never see. Yet, it’s absolutely worth a visit!

Caracalla Baths were built at the beginning of the 3rd century and were one the largest Roman public baths. It’s a huge complex that used to house several baths, saunas, an Olympic-size swimming pool, sports facilities, and even a library. The baths were heated via a series of underground ovens and it’s absolutely impressive to see how advanced and luxurious this place was.

Nowadays, it’s an archeological site/ outdoor museum. Some parts are still very well preserved and restored, with some stunning mosaics that give you a glimpse of how grand and decorative these baths were.

To us, the Baths of Caracalla is one of the most special places in Rome. And yes, it’s not an absolute must, but I highly recommend including it in your Rome itinerary. This is one of those places that will make your visit more special. And it’s also a nice place to escape the crowds.

Good to know: The Baths of Caracalla are open daily except on Mondays and some public holidays. Here you can find more info and also get tickets online, but it’s not an absolute must – normally, you can just buy a ticket at the entrance. You can also visit here with a tour ; obviously, it’s quite expensive compared to just the ticket price, but going with a guide always gives you a very different perspective.

After visiting the Baths of Caracalla, you could see some of the lesser-known places in Rome . None of these is a must, but nice to do if you don’t mind a lot of walking and have some time to spare. You can visit all of them or just pick the ones that interest you the most.

TIP: You could also rent one of the electric scooters that you’ll find all over Rome for getting to these places. It would make it much quicker and easier.

4 – 5 PM: Pyramid of Caius Cestius and/or Aventine Hill

The Pyramid of Caius Cestus is about 20 minutes walking distance from the Baths of Caracalla, and you pass some very local areas of the city. The Pyramid looks like the ones you see in Egypt and was actually built as a tomb in 18-12 BC. It is possible to visit the Pyramid inside, but it’s only open a few weekends per month and requires an advance booking, but you can just see it from the outside, as we did.

Next to it, there’s also an old 3rd-century city gate, Porta San Paolo , part of the old city walls. There’s a small museum here and you can walk up to the top of the tower for nice views.

Next, head to Aventine Hill . Best known for the Knights of Malta Keyhole , there are also several churches here and the Orange Garden ( Giardino degli Aranci ) offering nice views of Rome.

The keyhole is the main attraction here and it is exactly as it sounds – a keyhole in an old door. But what makes it special is that through it, you can see the view of the green garden pathway with St. Peter’s Basilica perfectly framed in the middle.

This is one of the more popular hidden gems of Rome and often, there’s a long queue of people waiting to look through this keyhole. I’ll let you decide if it’s worth your time waiting in line for it, but a visit to Aventine Hill is worth it either way. The three churches are really interesting to see, especially Basilica di Santa Sabina all’Aventino , and also the city panorama from the nearby gardens is really nice.

5 – 5.30 PM: Mouth of Truth

Finally, head back towards the river and the city center and stop at Santa Maria in Cosmedin church . Here you’ll find the Mouth of Truth ( Bocca della Verita ), a marble face with an open mouth. The legend has it that the mouth will bite off the hand of any liar.

In the past, you could just stop by here, put your hand in the mouth, take a picture, and move on. However, it’s become a very popular tourist attraction, and so also here, you’ll have to stand in a long queue in order to take a picture with your hand in it. There’s now even a small gate, a donation box, and staff keeping an eye on the crowds and regulating ‘traffic’.

We chose not to waste our time in line and took a picture of the mouth through the gate (you can see it from the street). The church itself is also nice to see, and there’s also an underground crypt of Pope Adrian I (8th century) that’s quite interesting as well. If you don’t have to stand in line for the Mouth of Truth, a visit here will only take 5-10 minutes.

6 PM: Trastevere & Dinner

Trastevere is one of the nicest (local) neighborhoods in the center of Rome. The name Trastevere comes from ‘ trans Tiberim ‘, which means ‘beyond the Tiber’. And indeed, it’s located on the other side of the river, just over the bridge from the Mouth of Truth.

This is a really nice area with narrow cobbled streets, colorful houses, countless restaurants, cafes, and bars. If you are looking for a nice place to have dinner, Trastevere is the best foodie area in Rome!

Before heading to dinner, you could also visit a few churches here. The most famous is Basilica di Santa Maria in Trastevere , located on the most picturesque little square. Don’t miss it!

Also check out Basilica Santa Cecilia in Trastevere – a real hidden gem, best known for the sculpture of St. Cecilia that was originally found in the Catacombs of St. Callixtus (and that we recommend visiting – see day 4 of this itinerary).

TIP: If you like exploring with the locals, you could book a food tour of Trastevere . It covers some of the landmarks of the neighborhood, plus you get to taste some delicious food as well. There are normally tours starting at around 5-7 PM, so it’s possible to fit it into this itinerary.

Or simply find a nice restaurant and enjoy a quiet dinner – you definitely deserve it after all the walking! Some of the best places to eat in Trastevere are Trattoria Da Enzo al 29 (close to Basilica St Cecilia) or Osteria Nannarella (close to Basilica St Maria). Be sure to try fried artichoke ( carciofi alla giudea ), one of the local specialties.

Day 2: The Vatican, Food Tour & Jewish Quarter, Historic Center

PLANNING TIP: Be sure to check if the Vatican is open on the day you want to visit and reserve your tickets / tour for the Vatican Museums (Sistine Chapel) online! See below for the best tour suggestions. The tickets are timed and they always sell out at least a few days in advance. Also, be sure that you wear clothing that covers your knees and shoulders! Also be sure to book the food tour in advance!

Here’s how you could plan your day:

Early morning: St. Angelo Bridge & Castel Sant’Angelo

If you walk to the Vatican from the city center, you’ll pass the Sant’Angelo Bridge and Castel Sant’Angelo . This area gets crowded during the day, but if you come here early, you’ll be able to enjoy it without the crowds.

TIP: Some of the best views of the St. Angelo bridge with St. Peter’s Basilica in the background are seen from the Umberto I Bridge and the southern side of the river between the two bridges.

Morning: Vatican Museums & Sistine Chapel

Together with the Colosseum, the Vatican Museums (where you’ll find the famous Sistine Chapel ) is the most popular tourist attraction in Rome. It’s essential to book your tickets (or a tour) in advance!

Sometimes, if you didn’t think to book in advance and all the regular entrance tickets are sold out, you can still visit with a tour (they have separate access to tickets).

We have been to the Vatican Museums with a tour in the past, and so on this 4-day Rome trip, we just got the regular tickets instead of taking a guided tour. Big mistake! Next time, I’d definitely go with a tour. Here’s why.

Our experience: Once you enter the museums, you find yourself in a beehive with a labyrinth of halls and corridors and staircases… And yes, you get a plan and there are signs pointing to some parts of the museum, but it’s absolutely not clear where to go. All the routes point to Sistine Chapel and so eventually, you do get there (and see a lot along the way), but you have no idea what exactly you are seeing, whether you have missed something or not, and what’s worth it the most…

TIP: So if you want to save yourself all the stress and be sure that you see the best that the Vatican Museums have to offer, consider going with a guided tour . I’m a bit hesitant to recommend a guided tour with the official guide of the museum because we saw lots of frustrated people inside who were sent from one place to the other, looking for the official group tours. Instead, you can book a tour with one of the local companies (see below). That way, you meet your guide outside, enter the museums together, and can actually relax and enjoy your visit.

Here are 3 of the best tours of the Vatican:

• Early Entry to the Vatican & the Sistine Chapel . If you want to see the Sistine Chapel at its quietest , this is the best tour. It starts very early but gives you an extraordinary experience, incomparable to any regular daytime tours. In addition, this tour visits St. Peter’s Basilica and enters it directly through the museum saving you lots of time.
• Skip-the-Ticket-Line Vatican Tour and Sistine Chapel . This is the most popular (and great value) tour of the Vatican Museums & St Peter’s Basilica. A good alternative to visiting on your own.
• Early morning tour that includes everything + the dome . This tour includes ALL the musts of the Vatican : St. Peter’s Basilica with a visit to the underground crypts and the dome climb + the Vatican Museums & Sistine Chapel.

UNIQUE EXPERIENCE: VIP Key Master’s Tour – on select days, it’s possible to visit the Sistine Chapel with a Key Master as he opens the galleries of the Vatican Museums. You spend two hours inside with just a handful of people in your group – it’s a very unique experience (but also with a very high price tag and limited availability). A similar tour is also available through this company but it’s only bookable once or twice a month.

Good to know: The Vatican Museums are closed on Sundays, except on the last Sunday of the month when they are also free to visit (expect even bigger crowds if you visit on a free day). The museums are also closed on most religious holidays and on some other occasions.

When you pre-book your tour or tickets, you’ll immediately see if the date of your choice is not available, and can adjust your itinerary at that time.

Noon: Lunch near the Vatican

After your visit to the Vatican Museums, you’ll definitely want to sit down and rest your legs. All that slow walking is really tiring…

There are several restaurants and a café inside the Vatican museums, so you could have lunch there. But there are also quite a few nice restaurants in the nearby neighborhood. We chose to dine at one of the local restaurants.

We had lunch at La Locanda di Pietro , just a few minutes walk from the museum. It’s a very nice local restaurant with very friendly staff and truly good food. There are quite a few good restaurants in this area. For low-key simple Italian dishes, check out Ristorante dei Musei , or – if you prefer something different- head to La Cucaracha which serves Mexican food.

TIP: Try to go for lunch at around noon. When we visited, most restaurants were still quiet at 12, but half an hour – an hour later, there were hardly any free tables left (and only inside).

1.30 – 4 PM: St. Peter’s Square & Basilica

Unless you book a tour of the Vatican Museums and St. Peter’s Basilica together, I recommend visiting St. Peter’s in the afternoon. In fact, the later in the afternoon you go, the quieter it usually is.

We booked this tour of the Basilica that included a Dome Climb and the Underground , and it started at 2 PM. So after lunch, we headed to St. Peter’s Square , explored it a bit on our own, went to see the Swiss Guards , and sent some postcards from the Post of the Vatican .

At 2 PM, we met our guide and waited for about 15-20 minutes (security line) to enter the Basilica. The lines weren’t nearly as bad in the afternoon as they were in the morning. While you don’t really need a guide to visit the church (and the entrance is free of charge), we actually enjoyed having a guided tour here. Our guide told us so many stories and explained so many things that we would have totally missed otherwise (and actually did miss on the previous visits here).

TIP: If you go without a tour, consider getting an audioguide – that way, you can better appreciate what you are seeing.

We then visited the crypts where some of the Popes are buried. You can also see St. Peter’s Tomb here, but only the tomb that’s officially accessible to the public (the actual St. Peter’s tomb is located yet deeper under the Basilica and can only be visited with official Vatican tours if/when they run and are very limited in numbers).

After exploring the church, you can opt to go to the top of the Dome . Our tour included this, but if you go on your own, you can do this as well. The entrance is located on the far right side of the church and you can buy a ticket here. You can opt for the stairs or the elevator. We suggest taking the elevator to the rooftop because you’ll still have to do over 330 steps to the actual top of the Dome.

A visit to St. Peter’s Dome is one of the most special things you can do at the Vatican. So if you are fit enough for the 330 stairs (up and then down again), don’t miss it! Not only can you see the rooftop of the Basilica and stunning views of the Vatican and the city from the Dome, but you also get to walk inside the actual dome with the whole church right under your feet. People look like little ants from this height and you realize once more how colossal the building is.

A very unique experience!

4.30 PM: Campo de’ Fiori

After the Vatican, head back to the city center and walk to Campo de’ Fiori . It’s about 25-30 minutes walk.

Campo de’ Fiori is one of the nicest town squares in Rome and a bustling market. Visiting here in the afternoon, you can actually see the square and not just umbrellas and the food stalls.

In the center of the square, you can see a statue of Giordano Bruno . He was a 16th-century philosopher who was burned here for his progressive thinking.

However, it’s also a special experience to see the Campo de’ Fiori market when it’s open. So if there’s no market anymore when you visit here in the afternoon, I recommend coming back here the next morning as well. See more info on day 3 of this itinerary.

5 – 8 PM: Street food tour & Jewish Quarter

The street food tour was one of the best experiences of our 4-day visit to Rome. If you want to discover a more local side of Rome, I highly recommend taking a food tour! It’s such a great way to get a bit off the beaten path and taste some local specialties.

We’ve been to Rome many times before, but we still learned new things, tasted some of the most delicious food, and saw some places we would have never seen on our own.

We took this highly-rated food tour and I can highly recommend it! The tour starts at 5.15 PM at Piazza del Biscione, which is a tiny town square right at the northeastern corner of Campo de’ Fiori. Be sure to check the starting times and location at the time of your visit, in case something would have changed!

On this tour, you visit a traditional food store from the 19th century and still run by the same family, have Roman pizza, and try other regional specialties at several excellent local restaurants. Our tour also included a tasting of Italian wine, local beer, and delicious gelato. They can also cater to people who have special dietary requirements and, of course, alcoholic drinks can be replaced by water or soft drinks.

We also passed some really nice local areas and also visited the Jewish Quarter (Ghetto) . Together with Trastevere and Testaccio (a bit further away from the center), this is one of the best neighborhoods for food in Rome. If you are still hungry after the tour (can’t imagine you would be, but you never know), this is a nice place to come back for dinner. Or come here at another time, as we did.

The tour also visits Largo di Torre Argentina and ends close to the Pantheon. It takes about 2.5 hours.

LEARN MORE: Rome Street Food Tour: Review & Tips

Evening: Explore the historic city center in the dark

If you still have some energy afterwards, walk around the city center and see Piazza Navona, the Pantheon, and Trevi Fountain nicely lit in the dark .

How dark it actually is will, of course, depend on the season when you visit. In November, it gets dark at 5 PM, whereas in June, it stays light until after 9 PM.

TIP: If you still have some space left for another gelato, check out Giolitti or Gelateria Della Palma – these are the two best places for ice cream in Rome. We stopped for ice cream here every time we were around…

We ended our day with some drinks on the beautiful rooftop terrace of our hotel . I think you can also come here for drinks even if you are not a guest at the hotel, but I’m not 100% sure. The drinks are quite expensive compared to the prices at the nearby restaurants though. But if you aren’t having dinner (not likely you’ll still be hungry after the food tour), it’s actually not easy to find a restaurant that will want to seat you just for the drinks. So for that, this bar is perfect.

Day 3: Campo de’Fiori, Pantheon, Doria Pamphilj, Capuchin Crypt, Villa Borghese, Terrazza del Pincio, Piazza del Popolo, Shopping, Spanish Steps

PLANNING TIP: Reserve your tickets or a tour of the Borghese Gallery in advance! You may also want to prebook a timed-entry slot for the Pantheon .

Early morning: Campo de’Fiori

In the past, a field of flowers (thus the name), nowadays Campo de’ Fiori is a bustling food market. The market is open Monday to Saturday, usually from around 7 AM to 2 PM.

The market is really touristy, but locals shop here as well. You’ll find stalls selling fruits, vegetables, cheese, meat, pasta, Italian limoncello (and other colorful drinks), and also flowers.

It’s always a nice place to visit when in Rome. The market is lively and colorful, you can buy all kinds of food, fruit, and also stock up on some (edible) gifts to take home.

9 AM: Pantheon

You will have passed the Pantheon several times by now, but it’s one of those places that you really should visit inside. Seeing the famous dome with a hole (oculus to the sky) in the middle is a must when visiting Rome!

Originally built in 27 BC and rebuilt in the 2nd century, the Pantheon is probably the best-kept monument from the old Roman times. The name ‘Pantheon’ means ‘temple of all the gods’ and – originally – it was a pagan temple indeed. In 609, Roman emperor Phocas gifted the Pantheon to the Pope, and it was turned into a church. This is one of the reasons why it’s still so well preserved.

A visit to the Pantheon doesn’t require much time. However, it’s always busy here, so if you don’t want to waste too much time, be sure to come here well before it opens.

Good to know: Nowadays, there is an entrance fee to visit the Pantheon. It’s also possible to book a timed-entry ticket in advance, however, getting the earliest time slots is not easy. You may want to check the official website and also Tiqets and GetYourGuide to see what’s available for your travel dates. In any case, keep in mind that you have to pick up the actual ticket at an external location (they do like to complicate things more than necessary…).

Alternatively, you can just stand in line and hope to get in without too much of a wait (in that case, arrive at least half an hour before it opens). Or make it easy for yourself and book a guided tour (likely later than 9 AM though, so you’ll have to adjust this itinerary accordingly).

10-11 AM: Doria Pamphilj Gallery

One of the hidden gems right in the historic city center, Doria Pamphilj Gallery is a private art collection that belongs to the princely Doria Pamphilj family. This is one of the largest and most impressive private art collections in Rome and it’s open to the public.

This vast art collection was started in the 16th century and contains a large number of paintings, furniture, and sculptures. You can see various works by Caravaggio, Raffaello, Velázquez, and many other famous Italian artists. But what makes it truly special is the sheer number of pieces of art covering the walls from the floor all the way to the ceiling.

TIP: Be sure to pick up an audio guide at the entrance (included with your ticket). It’s a great way to learn more about the palace, the art collection, and the family behind it. The English narrative is spoken by Jonathan Doria Pamphilj, and he shares some fun stories and anecdotes about the family as well.

Good to know: Doria Pamphilj Gallery is located in a 17th-century Palazzo Doria Pamphilj, about halfway between the Pantheon and the Trevi fountain, about 7 minutes walk from either of the two. It’s open daily from 10 AM. Their website says that you need to prebook the tickets in advance (and they are non-refundable). In the low(ish) season, we were able to visit without an advance booking. During busy times, you may have to wait for a while if you don’t have a reservation.

TIP: If you want to be sure to visit when you want to, but also have the flexibility to cancel, you can book cancelable tickets here .

11 AM: Galleria Sciarra

As you walk from Doria Pamphilj Gallery to the Capuchin Crypt (about 15 min walk), you’ll pass another nice secret gem of Rome, Galleria Sciarra . Located just steps from the famous Trevi Fountain, this beautiful place is completely overlooked by most tourists.

Galleria Sciarra is a small glass-covered gallery/patio with beautiful frescos pained on all the buildings surrounding the courtyard. It dates from the late 19th century and is a fine example of the Art Nouveau style.

Good to know: The courtyard is always open, accessible, and free. A visit here only takes a minute or two, so definitely take a look inside!

11.20 – 11.50 AM: Capuchin Crypt

If you like quirky places, you may want to check out another interesting hidden gem of Rome, the Capuchin Crypt (Museo e Cripta dei Frati Cappuccini).

The 500-year-old monastery houses a small museum telling more about the Capuchin monks and the history of the friary. But the main highlight are the underground crypts that contain really special and artistic creations made of human skeletons.

We’ve been to several bone chapels in various places in Europe in the past, but this one really stands out from the rest. There are several different crypts, each with its own unique ‘composition’, and it’s fascinating to see how someone created real art from human bones… It doesn’t even feel creepy or spooky, but more artsy…

Good to know: Capuchin Crypt is open daily from 10 AM to 7 PM, except on some public holidays, and you can just get a ticket at the entrance. More information on their website . They have an audio guide available and also run guided tours.

Lots of organized city tours include a visit here together with some other crypts and catacombs visits in Rome. But if you just want to see the crypts and the museum on your own, 20-30 minutes is more than enough time here.

12 – 1.30 PM: Lunch

After visiting the Capuchin Crypt, continue in the direction of Villa Borghese Gardens (about 10 minutes walk to the entrance of the park or 15-20 minutes walk to the gallery).

On the way, you’ll pass several restaurants. If you are feeling nostalgic for some American food, you can stop at the Hard Rock Café.

Alternatively, there are plenty of local restaurants as well. If you don’t mind splurging a bit and are looking for something special, check out the historic Harry’s Bar . And there are lots of other cheaper and simpler places to eat in this area.

2 – 5 PM: Borghese Gallery & Gardens

Villa Borghese is a large landscaped garden, one of the biggest and most beautiful public parks in Rome. There is a lot to see and do in the park and you could easily spend half a day here, but the most famous place is the Borghese Gallery .

If you are interested in art, this is one of the best museums to visit in Rome ! Here, you can see a big collection of masterpieces by Caravaggio, Raphael, Canova, and many others. Also, the interior of the palace is absolutely impressive!

Good to know: The Borghese Gallery is very popular, the tickets are timed, and usually sell out long in advance (especially if you are visiting in high season). So if you want to be sure to visit here, it’s essential to reserve your tickets in advance!

You can opt for a regular entrance ticket , and there are also guided tours available that cover the museum as well as the beautiful gardens. A tour might actually be a good idea here since the gardens are really large and there’s a lot to see.

Alternative suggestion: If you are not interested in the museum or the gardens, or want to see as much as possible and don’t mind walking quite a bit more, you could also visit the Quartiere Coppedè nearby.

It’s a small neighborhood with some of the most special architecture you can find in Rome. You can read more about it in our guide to Rome’s hidden gems .

This beautiful but rather compact neighborhood is located about 20 minutes walk from Villa Borghese (so you need about 1 hour in total to walk there and back and see the highlights). However, if you could rent an electric scooter, you could probably visit in about 30 minutes.

It’s also easy to combine it with a visit to the Coppede district and that of the Borghese Gallery. It really depends on your interests and how much you are willing to walk.

5.30 PM: Terrazza del Pincio

Terrazza del Pincio is a popular viewpoint offering nice views of Piazza del Popolo, the city center of Rome, and St. Peter’s Basilica in the distance. This is a popular place to come at sunset too.

There are, in fact, two viewpoints here and the views are nice from both (the other one doesn’t have an official name and is located right under Terrazza Viale del Belvedere, but is often confused with Pincio Terrace). Anyway, I indicated them both on our map.

These viewpoints are located about 15-20 minutes walk from the Borgese Gallery, and the walk through the park is really nice in itself.

From Terrazza del Pincio viewpoint right above Piazza del Popolo, take the stairs on the right side and walk down to this town square.

READ ALSO: Best Views & Viewpoints in Rome

6 – 7 PM: Piazza del Popolo & Shopping Streets

Piazza del Popolo (the People’s Square) is one of the largest and best-known town squares in Rome. Located at the Aurelian city walls, there’s still an impressive city gate here.

If you are coming from the hill at Terrazza del Pincio, the city gate will be on your right. If you want to experience the ‘wow’ effect of the square as first-time visitors to Rome did in the past, you can walk through it and come back to the square that way, but it’s really impressive either way.

Piazza del Popolo is a place where three big streets come together. In the center of the square, you can see an Egyptian Obelisk and the Fountain of the Lions . There are two other fountains with impressive statues at the sides of the square. And it’s also flanked by two impressive churches Santa Maria dei Miracoli and Santa Maria di Montesanto .

The area to the south of Piazza del Popolo is one of the most popular shopping neighborhoods in Rome . You’ll find all kinds of fashion stores here – from the cheaper main street brands to the most expensive designer stores like Gucci, Prada, Dolce & Gabanna, Tiffany & Co, and pretty much any other big name in the fashion industry.

The most famous shopping streets are Via del Corso (popular brands) and Via dei Condotti (high-end designer shops), but the whole area is really a shoppers’ paradise. If you are more interested in sightseeing than shopping, check out Via Margutta . It’s a very picturesque and much quieter street that became famous thanks to the film Roman Holiday .

Good to know: Most stores here are open until 7.30-8 PM, but if you are planning to do some shopping here, you’ll probably want to come earlier. You could easily spend an entire day here too, but with just 4 days in Rome, I’d only come here to do some window shopping.

7.30 PM: Piazza di Spagna, Spanish Steps & Dinner

Piazza di Spagna and the famous Spanish Steps is one more of the ‘must-see’ landmarks in the historic city center that you really shouldn’t miss in Rome.

Surrounded by all the shopping streets, this is a very popular area that’s always crowded. In the summer, it’s often difficult to even see the staircase through the crowds. It is now, therefore, forbidden to sit or eat on the stairs.

If you take the staircase up, you’ll be walking in the direction of the Villa Borghese Gardens that you visited earlier today. At the top, there’s also a church – Trinità dei Monti – and you could visit inside if it’s still open.

But, frankly, the stairs are the most impressive when seen from the bottom and the interior of the church is not that special. There are some nice viewpoints at the top, but if you already visited Terrazza del Pincio viewpoint before that, going up the stairs is not really a must. Unless you are here at around sunset and want to see some nice twilight views from above – in that case, definitely go up.

TIP: For dinner with a view, check out Caffè Ciampini di Marco Ciampini , a short walk to the left at the top of the stairs. Otherwise, you will find lots of nice restaurants in the historic city center. I indicated a few nice restaurants on the map.

Day 4: Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs tour, San Giovanni in Laterano, St. Clement Basilica, Basilica di San Pietro in Vincoli, Colosseum at sunset

PLANNING TIP: Book this e-bike tour in advance (possible for all ages). If biking isn’t your thing, this bus/ walking tour has a very similar itinerary and takes less time, but – at least at the moment, it only runs a few times a week and only in high season. Also, keep in mind that St. Callixtus Catacombs are closed on Wednesdays. You can still do the e-bike tour, but you’ll likely visit the Catacombs of Saint Sebastian instead.

9 AM – 3 PM: E-bike Tour of the Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs

On the fourth day in Rome, we recommend that you get a bit outside the city and visit some of the ancient Roman sites nearby. The main highlights that are worth it the most are the Appian Way , the Park of the Aqueducts , and the Catacombs of St. Callixtus (or the nearby Catacombs of Saint Sebastian).

Hands down, this was one of our favorite days of the 4-day visit to Rome! So if you are comfortable on an e-bike, I highly recommend considering this tour .

There are other similar bike tours as well, but we chose this one because it has the most complete itinerary, includes (delicious warm) lunch, uses good quality electric mountain bikes, and has the best reviews. Also (take my word for this), you really don’t want to do the Appian Way with a regular bike!

I’m not going to list the complete itinerary of this tour, but below are some pictures that will give you a short overview of what you can expect to see. Since you go with a local guide, you have nothing to plan or worry about. Just enjoy the day and soak in the incredible 2000-year-old sights.

We loved every minute of this tour and I’d do it again in a heartbeat. Also, my teenage son said that it was the absolute best thing we did on the entire trip (and he really enjoyed the rest of Rome as well, with the food tour on day 2 of this itinerary being his second favorite).

3.30 – 4 PM: Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano

Just 10 minutes walk from where your bike tour ends, you can visit the main church of the city, the Cathedral of Rome, Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano . It is this church (and not the St. Peter’s Basilica in the Vatican) that is considered as the ‘Cathedral of Rome and of the World’. The Pope is the reigning bishop of the city of Rome.

The reasoning behind this is quite simple – while the Pope stands above the cardinals and the bishops, St. Peter stands above the Pope. So St. Peter’s Basilica is a whole other league compared to any other church, and Rome – just as any other city – deserves its own cathedral, of course.

Anyway, the Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano is absolutely impressive. The cathedral is massive, very richly decorated, and the statues of the Apostles inside are just as majestic as the ones at St. Peter’s. In the middle, you can also see the tomb of Pope Martino V , and on the far left corner of the church, there’s an entrance to a 13th-century cloister . You have to pay a few euros to visit here, but consider it as a donation to the church and be sure to check it out.

It took me quite a few visits to Rome before I finally made the time to visit this church, and I can tell you that it’s absolutely worth a detour. And since the bike tour ends just nearby, it’s really easy to add it to your 4-day Rome itinerary. A visit is free of charge, and it’s incomparably quieter here than at the Vatican.

TIP: While you can visit the Cathedral itself for free, you need a ticket to visit the cloisters. You can get this all-in ticket which includes everything there is to see at the Basilica and at the Scala Sancta across the street (more info below).

4 – 4.15 PM: Scala Santa

Just across the street from the Basilica, there’s one more little-known gem of Rome, Scala Santa (the Holy Stairs ). This is a small catholic sanctuary with a papal chapel and three impressive staircases leading to it. The middle of the three staircases is the Holy Stairs.

According to a Christian tradition, Jesus Christ climbed these stairs before his crucifixion . It’s believed that these stairs have been brought from Jerusalem to Rome in the 4th century. This staircase is considered sacred and is reserved for pilgrims who come here to pray and climb to the top on their knees hoping for a plenary indulgence. Millions of people have climbed these stairs on their knees, including many popes.

On top of the right staircase, there is a nice chapel, with an adjacent smaller papal chapel in the middle.

The papal chapel Sancta Sanctorum (the Holy of the Holies) itself is normally closed to the public and can only be seen through a small opening at the end of the middle stairs. It was exceptionally open when we visited, but I’m not sure if it will remain open to the public in the future. It contains lots of relics, some of which have been moved to the Vatican.

Even if you can’t visit the Holy of the Holies, a visit here is more than worth a few minutes of your time. The staircases are really impressive and so is the bigger chapel. And you can see the other one through a small opening too.

Good to know: Scala Santa is open daily in the morning and in the afternoon. There’s no fee to enter and no reservations are needed and you only need a couple of minutes. If you want to visit the papal chapel of Sancta Sanctorum (and it’s open), there’s a small fee (or you can get this ticket for the Cathedral and the Holy Stairs, as mentioned before). You can find more info about this sacred place and the opening times on their website .

4.30 – 5 PM: St. Clement Basilica

After a visit to Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano and the Holy Stairs, walk back in the direction of the Colosseum, and be sure to stop at St. Clement Basilica . From the outside, it might look just like any other of 900+ churches in Rome, but it houses a lot of secrets inside. This is one of the most unique places you can visit in Rome ! Yet, despite its proximity to the Colosseum, only very few tourists know about it or ever come here.

St. Clement Basilica was constructed in the 12th century. With its cozy interior and beautiful mosaics, it looks really nice, but – not that special, you’d think. There are tens of other very similar churches all over the city…

What makes it extraordinary is that underneath there’s an archeological site containing two underground levels. Right under the church, there’s the original Basilica, built in the 4th century. AND – yet another level deeper – there are 1st and 2nd- century buildings used by the members of the cult of Mithras. This seemingly ordinary church actually has three layers that literally take you back in time through centuries of Roman history.

There are several places in Rome where you can literally touch the 2000-year-old walls, but this is probably one of the most authentic sites (it probably feels like that because there are very few tourists) AND it’s so easy to visit! You don’t need any advance reservations, there are no queues, and it’s just a stone’s throw from the Colosseum! So even if you are not doing the bike tour and plan your Rome itinerary differently, you could easily come here when you are visiting the Colosseum.

Good to know: The Basilica’s Archeological Excavations are open daily except on Christmas Day. You can check up-to-date info for the opening times and buy a ticket on their website . Or pay a few euros more and simply get a ticket at the entrance. Kids under 16 are free of charge.

5.15 – 6 PM Domus Aurea

Domus Aurea , aka the Golden House of Emperor Nero, is located just next to the Colosseum and is well worth a visit as well. It’s an ancient archeological underground site where you can see the remains of the extravagant villa built by Nero after the Great Fire in 64 AD had destroyed a large part of the city.

The Golden House was huge, with over 200 rooms, pavilions, gardens, and even an artificial lake in the center, and was built to impress and entertain.

The most remarkable feature was the Octagonal Room with five rooms around it and waterfalls cascading down the walls. The main dining hall – the Octagonal Hall itself – has a big concrete dome with an oculus which is believed to have inspired the architecture of the Pantheon. This room also had a revolving floor – an impressive engineering achievement at that time.

Nero wasn’t loved and his impressive palace was looted and destroyed soon after his death. It was covered in earth and several other structures were built on top of it, including the Baths of Trajan and Titus. The Colosseum was built at a place where Nero’s lake used to be and it also got its name from the Colossus statue that used to stand at the entrance of Domus Aurea.

Good to know: Domus Aurea is normally open daily until 6.30 PM. However, at the moment of writing, it’s only open on the weekends and just a few hours a day. All visits are guided and normally also include a VR experience that gives you a good insight into how grand this palace was. Since it’s an underground site, it’s quite cold inside so you may want to take a sweater.

If you absolutely want to visit here, check the current opening times and reserve your tickets in advance. Normally, you can find info and reserve the tickets on this website , but it’s not always updated and can be somewhat unclear too. In the low season, you could probably just walk to the entrance and see if there are tickets available too. And otherwise, check out this organized tour – they’ll only show the dates and the times when a visit is actually possible.

6.15 – 6.30 PM: Basilica di San Pietro in Vincoli

Basilica di San Pietro in Vincoli is a 5th-century church best known for its relic – the chains of St. Peter and Michelangelo’s statue of Moses that is part of the tomb of Pope Julius II.

Normally, a visit is free of charge and the church is open daily until 7 PM. It’s located just 5 minutes walk from the Colosseum in the direction of the city center. Well worth a few minutes of your time.

TIP: After leaving the church, go to the right and you’ll find a small passage with a staircase on via San Francesco di Paola. It’s a nice hidden gem. If you walk to the center, you can continue via this staircase. Alternatively, head back to the Colosseum for sunset.

Sunset at the Colosseum

Depending on the time of the year (and the time of the sunset), you might find yourself close to the Colosseum at around twilight .

Seeing this landmark in a different light (and usually without the crowds of daytime visitors) might be a nice way to end your Rome city trip.

This itinerary is based on our most recent visit to Rome in November . At that time, the sunset was around 5 PM. So we came to the Colosseum after a visit to St. Clement Basilica, and could indeed enjoy the beautiful light. It wasn’t busy either.

There are many restaurants in the Colosseum area too, so you could have dinner here. We walked in the direction of the Jewish Quarter – there are some really good restaurants serving traditional Italian food here, but you have to reserve most of them in advance, definitely in the high season.

Here are some restaurant suggestions for this area that we got from our food tour guide: Giggetto , Sora Margherita , or Al Pompiere Roma (for local Roman dishes), Emma (for pizza and Roman appetizers).

Since the other restaurants opened for dinner even later, we went to Emma’s and were glad to get one of the last available tables (had no idea it would be fully booked on a weekday in November).

Map & Getting Around

Below, you can see a map of this 4-day Rome itinerary .

It contains all the places mentioned in this article, including restaurant suggestions. You can save this map to your phone and use it during the trip. To make it easier, we used four different colors – one per day.

Getting around: For this itinerary, we simply walked everywhere (except for the airport transfers and the e-bike tour, of course). This is definitely doable if you stay in the city center, plan well, and wear very comfortable shoes. However, prepare to walk A LOT .

You could also cover some of the bigger distances by public transport (buses, metro), take a taxi , or – probably the easiest and quickest – rent an electric scooter . They are scattered all over Rome and it looked like it shouldn’t be a problem to find one where and when you need it. Just drive carefully because the traffic is crazy.

LEARN MORE: Rome Airport Transfers

How to use this map:  Use your computer mouse (or fingers) to zoom in or out. Click on the icons to get more information about each place. Click the arrow on the top left corner for the index. Click the star next to the map’s title to add it to your Google Maps account. To view the saved map on your smartphone or PC, open Google Maps, click the menu and go to ‘Your Places’/’Maps’. If you want to print the map or see it in a bigger window, click on ‘View larger map’ in the top right corner.

If you have more time

If you have more than 4 days in Rome, you could, of course, take it easier and visit some of the places we indicated in our itinerary on different days. There are also many more museums, churches, etc.

However, if you want to make the most of your visit , I recommend booking a few day tours that take you outside the city.

Here are some of the most popular options for the best day trips from Rome :

• Villa D’Este & Hadrian’s Villa in Tivoli
• Pompeii & Mt. Vesuvius OR Pompeii & Amalfi Coast
• Tuscany Taster Tour: Day Trip with Lunch & Wine
• Florence & Pisa in a Day

Where to stay for 4 days in Rome

For this 4-day Rome itinerary, we recommend staying in the heart of the historic city center. Our favorite area to stay in Rome is around Pantheon, but pretty much anywhere between Piazza Navona and the Trevi Fountain is great.

Staying here, you can easily walk to the main landmarks, and pretty much all the main areas of interest are within 15-30 minutes walking distance.

Here are some of the best-rated hotels close to the Pantheon for all budgets (although low-budget options are scarce in this area):

• €€€€€+ The Pantheon Iconic Rome Hotel, Autograph Collection (a very luxurious 5* boutique hotel).
• €€€€ 9Hotel Cesari (a very centrally located 4* hotel; this is where we stayed).
• €€€ Hotel Navona (a popular 3* hotel).
• €€ Hotel Primavera (highly-rated 2* hotel; one of the best lower-budget choices in the historic center).

READ ALSO: Where to Stay in Rome

So, this is our 4 days Rome itinerary. I hope that all the time indications and the details will help you plan an unforgettable trip to the Eternal City and explore a bit deeper, beyond the main attractions.

Have a great trip!

TIP: If you are looking for more information and tips for your trip to Rome , be sure to check out this article with Rome travel tips for your first trip . It contains all the useful info and info that will help you plan a more enjoyable visit. Take a look!

READ ALSO: Best Things to Do in Rome

More travel inspiration for Rome:

• Hidden gems of Rome
• Where to eat in Rome
• 1 day in Rome
• 2 days in Rome
• Best views in Rome
• Best underground sites in Rome

TIP: If you are visiting Italy for the first time and are wondering where to go and how to plan your time, check out this Italy trip itinerary that includes all the must-sees.

If you found this post useful, don’t forget to bookmark it and share it with your friends. Are you on Pinterest? Pin these images!

More travel inspiration for Italy:

• Best places to see in Italy
• Best towns to visit in Italy
• Best Sights & Attractions in Venice
• Best Things to Do in Florence
• Best Things to Do in Milan
• Best Things to Do in Siena
• Best Things to Do in Bologna
• Best Things to Do in Verona
• Best Things to Do in Naples
• Best Things to Do in Ravenna
• Best Things to Do in Montepulciano
• Best Things to Do in Como
• Best Things to Do in Rimini
• One Day in Venice
• Three Days in Venice
• One Day in Milan
• One Day in Florence
• One Day in Cinque Terre
• One Day in Naples
• Florence to Bologna: Travel Info & Itinerary
• Bellagio (Italy)
• Tuscany itinerary
• Amalfi Coast itinerary
• Emilia Romagna itinerary
• Dolomites itinerary
• …. For many more destinations, be sure to check our Italy travel guide . It contains an overview of all our articles for a wide variety of popular places all over Italy.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

John Signorelli

Sunday 15th of October 2023

I used the information here to plan my recent trip to Italy. This article was great (as was every article you have on Italy). If anyone is wondering to plan your trip yourself and use this article or to use a tour company, I have zero complaints about what I learned from Jurga for our trip.

Our next trip will be to Athens, but I didn't see an article on that - can't imaging planning my visit without your advice.

Monday 16th of October 2023

Thank you for your feedback on this and all those other articles where you left comments, John. It's always great to hear from our readers who use the information on our blog on their trips! As for Athens, unfortunately, I still haven't been there. And other trips to Greece are from so long ago that it wouldn't make sense to write about it anymore... So I'm afraid I can't help you much with that. But we have many other destinations covered on our blog if you are looking for some trip inspiration for the future. I can highly recommend you look into visiting Portugal one day. We now go there several times a year and absolutely love it every time. If you were to return to Italy, southern Italy and especially the area around Naples - Amalfi Coast is also incredibly beautiful with lots of very interesting sights. Happy travels!

Monday 17th of July 2023

Hi there, I've been trying to book tickets for collesium, forum and palatine Hill priority entrance + arena floor on tiqets website but it says hi there early bird, tickets are unavailable. I am planning trip next month and am trying to book before too late for non tour tickets due to health reasons I can't do tour because of frequent restroom breaks... is there another site to buy same ticket without tour including arena floor? I can't get a hold of anyone on their website. Thanks.

Tuesday 18th of July 2023

Hi Sam, the Colosseum tickets are normally released 30 days in advance and it's indeed, the best time to buy them - as soon as they are available for your travel date. This summer, things have been crazy. A few weeks ago, there was no availability at all; from mid-August things look a bit better. The official site is coopculture, but it's not really user-friendly, so we personally never use it. We recommend using either Tiqets or GetYourGuide for all your tickets in Rome. When the tickets are released, they are normally available on all these websites at the same time. But you can always check the official site in case they release them a bit earlier. As said, this summer has just been crazy for the Colosseum tickets. That said, I still highly recommend going with a tour if you can manage it. So many people tell me they regret not doing a tour because it wasn't always clear where to go, they missed certain parts but were not allowed to backtrack, etc. etc. Hope this helps.

Saturday 17th of June 2023

I love your blog. This itinerary will be so helpful as we are going to Rome for four days this August. Can you advise me on the following: I arrive at 8 a.m. and can't check into my air bnb until the afternoon. Do you know of a place to store our luggage so we don't waste our first day waiting to check in?

Hi Jill, upon arrival at the airport, take a train or a bus to the central station (see all the options explained in our Rome airport transfers article). Once at the station, you could use this highly-rated luggage storage for your bags. PS One more thing for this summer. The Colosseum tickets are practically impossible to get these days. So be sure to book a guided tour asap if you want to be sure to go inside (see our guide to Colosseum tickets for more info). Rome is very busy at the moment. Have a great trip!

Monday 22nd of August 2022

Hi Jurga, I like your itinerary very much. Thank you for all the info. For Colosseum ticket, it includes Roman Forum and Palatine Hill also. Are there separate entries for the Forum and Palatine Hill? Can I go to the Forum first, get out to have lunch, then go Palatine Hill, and then see Colosseum at the last? Is this doable? The morning tickets are sold out, and no re-entry allowed, but I have to get out to have lunch, then enter to another, I wonder how they handle one ticket for three places. Thank you! -Chen

Hi Jurga, Thank you so much! Booked 12:30 tickets. I got another question. For Appian way, if I walk/hike it, can I see all the places in your pictures? I can't bike, but I can hike 7 miles. Or is there a tour bus? Thank you! -Chen

Hi Chen, you can enter Colosseum separately, but the Roman Forum and the Palatine Hill can only be visited together. So it’s three places but actually two tickets. You can do one of the two in the morning and the other after lunch, but you could also do everything after lunch if you prefer. Hope this clarifies. Enjoy your trip!

The Perfect 4 Days in Ireland Itinerary (+Tips)

Love it? Share it!

In the midst of planning your ultimate Ireland trip and in desperate need of an in-depth itinerary? Well, you’re in the right place for a good time. Let us introduce you to your new best friend — our perfectly curated 4 days in Ireland itinerary.

The Emerald Isle beckons and has a certain allure that other destinations could only dream of. Yes, it features astounding natural beauty from coast to coast, but this gem also boasts stunning cities, a rich cultural history, and unforgettable attractions worthy of your Europe bucket list .

And when all is said and done, you’re in for an adventure that begs the question, “How could you ever experience Ireland in any other way?” Keep reading for a full 4-day Ireland itinerary below. 

4 Days in Ireland itinerary | Perfect Ireland road trip 4 days

Disclosure: This post contains affiliate links. If you click one of them, we may receive a small commission at no extra cost to you.

A quintessential part of any worthwhile European itinerary, Ireland has become a staple destination for anyone looking for a truly memorable trip. From the spectacular natural elements of the west coast to the traditional cities of its southern regions, you’re bound to fall head over heels. 

Ireland Itinerary 4 days: At a glance

We will share a few Ireland itinerary samples – the first one is in the format of a road trip exploring the Republic; the second one has you based in Dublin and then taking day tours from there (no car necessary) and the last one is a mix of Ireland and Northern Ireland in the UK. 

So let’s quickly break down everything you’ll experience and explore as part of your Ireland itinerary.

Ireland Itinerary 4 days (Sample 1): Republic of Ireland road trip itinerary

• Day 1 of 4 days in Ireland: If you’re after some epic scenery, remote landscapes, and must-visit attractions, your first day surely won’t disappoint. Day one is about exploring the enigmatic capital of Ireland — Dublin.
• Day 2 of 4 days in Ireland: What would a trip to Ireland be without visiting the Cliffs of Moher? Well, still pretty impressive, but this is one natural landmark you can’t miss. Beyond that, day two also boasts the village of Doolin and a stop in Galway.
• Day 3 of 4 days in Ireland: When visiting Ireland, taking time to appreciate natural beauty is a must. So on your third day, it’s time to get lost in nature (for a little while at least) at the National Park of the Wicklow mountains. Then it’s time to explore every inch of Glendalough.
• Day 4 of 4 days in Ireland: Finally ending your Ireland trip, it’s time to head back to indulge in the more laid-back and quintessential parts of the isle. Fitting in a few more must-visit hotspots, it’s the perfect end to your adventure.

Ireland Itinerary 4 days from Dublin (Sample 2): Day trip options from Dublin

• Day 1 of 4 days in Ireland: Explore Dublin
• Day 2 of 4 days in Ireland: Go on a day trip to the Cliffs of Moher and Galway
• Day 3 of 4 days in Ireland: Wicklow Mountains, Glendalough & Kilkenny Tour
• Day 4 of 4 days in Ireland : Tour to Cork, Cobh, and Blarney Castle

Ireland Itinerary 4 days (Sample 3): Best of Dublin, Belfast, and beyond  

• Day 3 of 4 days in Ireland: Travel to Belfast and explore 
• Day 4 of 4 days in Ireland: Day trip from Belfast to Dark Hedges, and Giants Causeway 

Planning 4 days in Ireland itinerary: Travel Tips

How to get to Ireland

Getting to Ireland is relatively straightforward as there are two primary ways to reach the isle. The first would be to grab a seat on an international flight bound for Dublin International Airport.

Located roughly 6 miles from the city center, it’s easy to get to and from the airport. Hopping on the city bus 700 (8 euros) will take you right into the heart of Dublin, and from there, you can make your way to your accommodation via a private taxi.

• You can also book a private transfer from the airport to your hotel
• Or book an airport shuttle bus to the city centre

We flew to Dublin airport, but there are other international airports on the island as well – like Cork, Knock, and Shannon airport. 

Alternatively, if you’re making your way to Ireland from England, you can opt for a ferry trip. Ferries to Dublin depart from Liverpool and Holyhead; expect to pay about €200 per seat. 

We recommend choosing the ferry from Liverpool as you have a choice between a fast ferry line and a slower one. 

On a fast ferry, the trip takes about two and a half to three and a half hours. On the other hand, a slow ferry takes about 7 hours, so it’s best to plan accordingly.

How to travel around Ireland

Once you’re firmly footed on the Emerald Isle, the next question is how to get around. Well, luckily, there are three different options available to you. The first is by using public transportation systems , which include a combination of buses and trains. 

While this is a good choice as you can easily navigate your way around the isle via this combo, it does affect your time and pace. Honestly, you’ll be at the mercy of train and bus schedules, and when you only have a few days in a magical place like Ireland, that’s the last thing you want.

The second (and more popular choice) is via rental car. Not only does this satisfy every road trip craving you might have, but it’s also a fantastic way to traverse Ireland’s countryside and city streets. 

If you’re looking for budget-friendly rentals, we recommend services like DiscoverCars, who operate in over 150 countries. 

Lastly, via day tours. We will go deeper into this itinerary option below (options 2 and 3).

Where to stay for the perfect Ireland itinerary

So, now you’re firmly settled into Ireland and considering where to rest your head during your stay. While Ireland brims with fantastic options, some outshine the rest. Here are our recommendations for where to stay while on the island.

A no-brainer choice, but staying in Dublin is as good as it gets. It’s the country’s capital and transportation hub, offering the perfect base for your adventures. Here are a few hotel options, 

• Hendrick Smithfield : We recommend staying at Hendrick Smithfield, the best property for not breaking the bank while having every luxury you need. They got a lovely bar and lobby, and the suites are comfy for a short trip. Check out availability here
• Holiday Inn Express Dublin City Centre: This is another affordable accommodation option in Dublin, located in the heart of the city. They offer free breakfast and simple, yet bright rooms. You can also park your vehicle (for a fee). Check availability here 

Ireland Itinerary 4 days (Sample 1): Republic of Ireland road trip 4 days 

Day 1 of 4 days in Ireland itinerary: Explore Dublin

On your first day in Ireland, it’s only logical (and super exciting) to explore its crown jewel, the capital city of Dublin. Packed with incredible attractions and highlights, the city is one in a million and the perfect starting point for your Ireland itinerary.

While you can easily spend more than one day in this part of the country, one day is enough to take in its highlights.

Marvel at the monuments of O’Connell street

After settling into your hotel room, it’s time to dive headfirst into this Ireland guide. And what better way than by sightseeing some of Dubin’s most iconic landmarks? First up is the Spire of Dublin on O’Connell street.

Locally, this monument is also known as the Monument of Light. It’s a 393-foot stainless steel, pin-like creation that stands in the center of Dublin’s main thoroughfare. 

Construction ended in January 2003, and ever since, it has been a staple attraction among the landmarks of Dublin.

Visit Temple Bar Area

After crossing the historical Ha’penny Bridge, it’s time to head to the famous Temple Bar. This stunning riverside neighborhood spreads across cobbled pedestrian lanes and overflows with highlights. 

From O’Connell street, you’re luckily within walking distance from Temple Bar, as there’s quite a bit to see here. One of Dublin’s most popular areas, you’ll spend a while immersing yourself in traditional Irish pub life and its eclectic bar and boutique store scene. 

And no one would blame you for indulging in a traditional Irish pint while in Temple Bar, regardless of the time of day.

Wander around Trinity College

A highlight of most Ireland itineraries, Trinity College, is up next. A crucial part of the country’s history, this educational institute is much more than your average university. 

Easily one of its must-see places is the Old Library of Trinity College. Its Long Room has been used since 1732 and holds some of Ireland’s most ancient texts. Inside, you’ll find the Book of Kells. 

This illuminated manuscript was made by Irish monks roughly during the year 800 and contains some of the most detailed depictions of the Gospels of the New Testament. 

Explore Dublin Castle

A long-standing feature of a trip to Ireland is a visit (or better yet, a guided tour – like this one) to Dublin Castle . A former motte-and-bailey castle, the building today serves as the Irish government building. 

Constructed during the early 13th century on the grounds of a Viking settlement, it’s an enthralling experience to visit its grounds. If you’re a history buff, then taking the time to explore this glimpse into Ireland’s history is a must.

Visit Christ Church Cathedral

Although not the largest church in Ireland, Christ Church Cathedral in Dublin rivals the title holder, St. Patrick’s Cathedral, in beauty and history. 

More commonly known as The Cathedral of the Holy Trinity, this Gothic and Romanesque jewel of the Roman Catholic church is a must-visit. Here, you can immerse yourself in one of two ways. The first is simply taking in the sights of the exterior and marveling at its stunning architecture. 

However, the second, and by far the best way, is to get yourself the Go City: Dublin Pass, which grants access to this monument at no additional cost. The pass can be bought for 1-5 days. 

Indulge at the Guinness Storehouse

How about a tour through the original Guinness Storehouse for a more buzzworthy blast from the past? This building is a pure display of Irish history — and a tastebud-treating one at that.

The site where Arthur Guinness signed a 9,000-year lease in 1759, it’s made of seven floors,  each dedicated to a specific part of the brewing process. While you can opt for a guided storehouse tour, there’s nothing like going solo.

Tickets to the Guinness Storehouse go for around €19–€24 and give you a tasting and a 1-pint voucher for an ice-cold Guinness. The best part? You can enjoy your drink on the top floor paired with epic views overlooking the city.

Stroll through St. Stephen’s Green

To cap off day one of this Ireland itinerary, it’s time to appreciate the more natural side of Dublin. And there is no better way than by taking a late afternoon stroll through St. Stephen’s Green Park in the city center.

Clocking in at over 20 acres, it’s one of the oldest parks in Ireland, dating back to 1664. While you might think it’s just any old park, it sits right in the heart of Dublin’s shopping district, so you can get some retail therapy while you’re here.

Day 2 of 4 days in Ireland itinerary: Visiting the Cliffs of Moher

Your second day in Ireland is about exploring the west coast of Ireland. It’s a natural playground where stunning landscapes meet a scenic countryside unlike any you’ve seen before.

Beyond the Cliffs of Moher, you’ll fill your day by visiting Doolin and end it with a visit to Galway.

Ireland’s west coast is a premier part of any Ireland itinerary. Thus it’ll be an early morning start followed by a day of sightseeing and exploring.

Early morning at the Cliffs of Moher

You simply can’t visit Ireland without taking the time to explore and experience one of its most spectacular natural attractions. Few places compare to the Cliffs of Moher. 

While you can start the day at Bunratty Castle and then head to the cliffs, they attract quite a crowd. So it’s best just to dive right in (metaphorically, of course).

Why are the Cliffs of Moher so impressive? Well, consider this; six miles of majestic coastline that plummets directly into the ocean. With that image in mind, you can hike the cliff line for some surreal views.

Drive the Wild Atlantic Way

Have you ever heard of the Wild Atlantic Way? This beautiful stretch of road, totaling 2499 km (1,553 miles), runs from the west through parts of Ireland’s north and south coasts. As far as a scenic drive goes, few road trip destinations could compare. 

This road comprises quite a few stellar country highlights, from the Cliffs of Moher, the Ring of Kerry, Connemara, and The Burren. While you won’t be driving the whole Wild Atlantic Way, any distance traveled along its roads is unforgettable.

Explore the tiny village of Doolin

One of the closest towns to the Cliffs of Moher, the tiny village of Doolin is your next stop on this one-day road trip. At roughly 8 km (5 miles) from the cliffs, it’s a charming little addition to your day, and spending time in one (or two) of the classic Irish pubs that line its streets is a must.

No Ireland road trip would be complete without a visit to this quaint town that sits firmly on the Wild Atlantic Way.

Get lost in Galway

After exploring Doolin, it’s time to head for Galway. Depending on how long you choose to spend in Doolin, you’ll arrive in Galway mid to late afternoon. 

This makes it the perfect time to explore the city and take in some of its best sights before deciding on a place to grab some well-deserved dinner.

After spending the day exploring (not just Galway), heading to any of the best pubs in Galway is a must. While each is unique, the Front Door Pub stands out, famous for its beef and Guinness stew.

When you’re done with dinner, the drive back to Dublin might be a bit much to tackle, so it would be a good idea to spend the night in Galway. The cultural hub of Ireland, staying in Galway, is almost equal to staying in Dublin. 

Stay overnight in Galway: It’s got every element of a major city while featuring a traditional side you just don’t get in other places. We recommend booking a room at the Menlo Park Hotel , a 4-star property in the city’s heart.

The following day it’s time to head back to Dublin. We recommend heading out as early as possible to make the most of day three.

Day 3 of 4 days in Ireland itinerary: Wicklow and Glendalough

Kicking off your third day in Ireland, you’ll explore county Wicklow, which holds some of the most natural hidden gems of the Emerald Isle. After taking in the sights of this county close to Dublin, you’ll head to Glendalough, where you can quite literally get lost in nature.

Morning adventure in Baltinglass

Thankfully, county Wicklow is not far from Dublin, so you can start the day a bit later than usual, especially after driving back from Galway. 

Some highlights of the area include the stunning Blessington Lakes, the headliner being Baltinglass. A worthwhile short trip while here is the historic Baltinglass Abbey constructed during the 12th century.

Visit the Glendalough monastic site

After your morning in Baltinglass, it’s time to head for the scenic and lush Glendalough. Beyond its stunning landscapes, it features spectacular views that will stick with you for this entire trip and well after.

Within this glacial valley lies one of the most imposing early medieval monastic settlements in the entire country. Founded as the first Christian settlement in the 6th century, most of the structures you’ll see date back to the 10th century.

Explore Glendalough upper lake

Now for a fun (and somewhat physical) addition to your Ireland itinerary. It’s time for a hike after visiting the Glendalough Monastic site. Although hike might not be the right word, this walk through the lower lake area to the upper Glendalough lake area is a must.

These two lakes are a local favorite, and once you set out, you’ll quickly agree it’s a fantastic way to spend your days in Ireland.

Discover Poulanass Waterfall

For those looking to go chasing waterfalls. You’re in luck. Taking a slight detour off the main trail to the upper lake, you’ll arrive at the stunning Poulanass waterfall. These small falls spill into the upper lake area, creating an almost ethereal atmosphere.

Several spots along the walking trail provide spectacular views of the waterfall. And for those who love fun facts, the name Poulanass comes from old Irish, which translates to “Hole of the waterfall”. Did we mention the epic views you’ll get of Guinness lake?

Day 4 of 4 days in Ireland itinerary: Discover the more laidback side of Ireland

Your final day in Ireland will be a more laid back and relaxed exploration of some of the country’s most enticing highlights. A trip to Killarney National Park, a road trip through the Dingle Peninsula, and some beach bumming at a beach or two await you.

Venture into Killarney National Park

Yes, many come to Ireland for its rich history and even richer love for a pint and some live music. But venture into the Irish countryside and you’ll discover unique places like Killarney National Park.

Experiencing the best of this national treasure can be done via a guided tour like this Killarney National Park tour on a private horse and carriage . Or you can head on a hike to epic spots like Torc Waterfall.

Head out on a drive along the Dingle Peninsula

While most travelers would take the Ring of Kerry road from Killarney, another equally fantastic option is to tackle the scenic drive along the Dingle Peninsula. 

Ringed by sandy beaches and craggy cliffs, this striking natural feature includes mountain ranges and peaks such as Mount Brandon. Beyond that, there is quite a bit to do here, including visiting a few Star Wars filming locations and indulging in Irish culture on a pub crawl.

Take your drive off-road at Inch Beach

A surefire standout of the Dingle Peninsula is Inch Beach. This rugged sand beach is unique because you can take your car and drive along the coastline as far as it stretches. We recommend you do just that.

And after driving a bit, step outside your car, dip your toes into the Atlantic and grab a few snapshots of the stunning beach.

Explore the town of Dingle

As the final stop of your four days in Ireland, head to the charming town of Dingle. It’s a colorful and culture-rich town where cute shops, ice cream parlors, ships bobbing in the bay, and swimming dolphins are highlights.

Speaking of dolphins, the town’s unofficial mascot is a bottlenose dolphin named Fungie, who has welcomed visitors to the village for more than 30 years. 

And if you’re not one for dolphin spotting, pub crawling is almost a national sport here, with a whopping 65 pubs in the small town. 

Tip: If you’re looking for inspiration for your next trip to central Europe, look at our European itinerary .

Ireland Itinerary 4 days from Dublin (Sample 2): Day trips, without a car

Here is an alternate Ireland Itinerary for 4 days, where you can base yourself in Dublin throughout the duration of your Irish trip and not rent a car. 

We recommend the Go City: Dublin Pass for 4 days so that you have a transportation savings card for commuting in the city. This pass also includes one day of the hop-on and hop-off tour, which will allow you to check off all the major attractions in the city in one day. 

Plus you also get access to the Guinness Storehouse. 

Day 1 of 4 days in Ireland: On the very first day explore the city highlights of Dublin.

Day 2 of 4 days in Ireland: On the second day of this itinerary, start on a day trip to the Cliffs of Moher and Galway. 

You can book a day tour such as this one that includes Galway and the Burren, the monastic ruins of Kilmacduagh, and of course the gorgeous Cliffs of Moher. 

This tour is provided by Finn McCools Tours, and we highly recommend their service – their local guides are very knowledgeable and helpful!

Day 3 of 4 days in Ireland: Venture out to check off Wicklow Mountains, Glendalough, and Kilkenny on day 3. On this 9-hour day trip , you will get to soak in the views at Wicklow. 

And then enjoy a walking tour of Glendalough, and finally visit Kilkenny before returning to Dublin. The tour doesn’t include entry to Kilkenny castle. 

But the scenic drive includes sites from movies such as P.S. I Love You and Braveheart. You can book this affordable tour here

Day 4 of 4 days in Ireland : Explore the city of Cork on day 4 of this 4 day Ireland itinerary. You can take the train from Dublin to Cork, or opt for another day tour that includes Cobh and entry to Blarney Castle. 

Cork is Ireland’s southern capital and is known for its arts, music, and literature. The historic city centre is filled with charming Georgian buildings, beautiful 17th-century alleys, and modern architecture. 

Ireland Itinerary 4 days (Sample 3): Best of Dublin, Belfast, and beyond 

This 4 day itinerary includes Northern Ireland, which is a part of the United Kingdom . The UK is not a part of the European Union nor do they follow the Schengen agreement, so you might need a visa to cross over. 

US and Canadian passport holders do not need a tourist visa to enter the UK, but please ensure you carry a valid passport with you at all times. 

Day 1 of 4 days in Ireland: On day one in Dublin, spend time exploring the city’s highlights. 

Day 2 of 4 days in Ireland: Next, go on a day trip to the Cliffs of Moher and Galway. You can book a day tour such as this one that includes Burren, and the monastic ruins of Kilmacduagh. 

Day 3 of 4 days in Ireland: Head straight to Belfast on day 3. It will take less than 2 hour’s drive or 2.50 hour train ride to get there from Dublin.

In Belfast, explore the following spots, 

• Hit the Saint George’s Market
• Visit the Belfast City Hall
• Go on a Black Taxi City Tour, where you will learn about Belfast’s troubled past. The tour lasts 4 hours, and it also includes mural stops. Our guide shared so many stories of the troubles, of political turmoil, and the events leading up to Bloody Sunday, and its impact later. Highly recommend a walking tour either in Belfast or Dublin to learn more about it. 
• Hit the Titanic Quarter . Ensure you book tickets ahead of your visit. 
• Sign off for the night at the Cathedral Quarter 

Read: Here is a detailed list of things to do in Belfast in one day

Where to stay in Belfast? We recommend an overnight stay in Belfast for days 3-4. The Clayton Hotel is a great place to call home for 2 days. It is located within walking distance of the Titanic Quarter and other sightseeing spots. 

Day 4 of 4 days in Ireland: End your Irish road trip of 4 days, with a visit to Northern Ireland’s only UNESCO World Heritage site – the Giant’s Causeway, and then explore the Dark Hedges, and walk over the Atlantic ocean at the Carrick-a-Rede Rope Bridge 

Without renting a car , you can choose this Northern Coast day tour from Belfast that covers all of the places including the ruins of Dunluce Castle whilst enjoying a scenic drive along the Antrim Coast Road. Check it out here

4 Days in Ireland itinerary: Sightseeing Map

Ultimate Ireland Travel Tips for your itinerary

Ireland is a beautiful country you should visit at least once. As for some insider tips to making the most of your adventure beyond getting a rental car and prepping for driving on the left side of the road, we’ve got you covered.

Four days in Ireland is enough time to experience the best of what this wonderful country has to offer. With four days, you can explore Dublin and take a day trip to the countryside tour of some of the most stunning landscapes such as the Cliffs of Moher, Wicklow Mountains, Glendalough, and Kilkenny.  Of course, the more time you have is better.

Ideally 7 days. The number of days needed in Ireland largely depends on what you wish to experience and see. If you would like to explore the entire island, then more than 4 days might be necessary. However, if your time is limited and you’d just like to get a taste of the country, 4 days should be plenty.  Ideally, with 7 days in Ireland, you can spend 2 days in Dublin , followed by scenic stops at some of the most picturesque places like the Cliffs of Moher or the Wicklow Mountains, and then end by visiting Aran islands.

The best time to visit Ireland would be during either of its shoulder seasons. These periods are from March to May and from September to November. During these months, you’ll have the advantage of lower tourist numbers and mild temperatures, not as cold as in winter. While summer is best if you want to be assured of sunny days, this is also the peak season for tourism. Thus most attractions get overcrowded.

What to pack for Ireland?

• Universal adaptor: Europe uses round power pins, so carry a universal adapter. Here is what we have
• Anti-theft backpack: Because we travel in trains, and use other means of public transportation, we recommend carrying an anti-theft backpack (or a daypack). We use the same backpack as a carryon (and – I carry 4-5 dresses, 4 blouses, 2 light jackets, and a small cosmetics bag)
• Comfortable walking shoes : Walking shoes are a must for all of your Europe trips. You will end up walking/wandering/strolling quite a bit (in old towns, transiting through transport, neighborhoods, etc). Many old towns are also carefree, and pedestrian-friendly – so lace up!
• Lightweight rain jackets : Highly recommend carrying a lightweight waterproof jacket at all times of the year, especially on your road trips

4 Day Ireland Itinerary | Final Thoughts

That’s a wrap on your 4 days in Ireland itinerary; a whirlwind adventure that will have you coming back for more. Yes, there is so much more to see on this stunning island, and if you have more time, heading to northern Ireland won’t disappoint.

But if you just have 4 days, this Ireland itinerary brings you right to the doorstep of its best and most memorable attractions. 

PS: Check out our curated list of European travel tips to ensure you don’t miss a beat when planning your next Ireland journey.

Get the inside scoop on European travel – for free!

Europe travel resources vault.

Access our FREE Europe resources library! This is the place for those who want to travel to Europe but don’t know where to start. Our exclusive library has free itineraries, tips, worksheets, guides, and more.

And the best part? You can access it all simply by signing up for our newsletters. We can’t wait to help you plan your perfect European vacation.

More Europe travel itineraries:

• 4 days in Paris itinerary
• 4 days in London itinerary
• 4 days in Rome itinerary
• 4 days in Lisbon itinerary
• 4 days in Vienna itinerary
• 4 days in Budapest itinerary

Pin: Perfect Ireland Itinerary 4 days | Ireland Travel Guide

Mayuri is the founder & editor of ToSomePlaceNew. An Indian-Canadian globetrotter, she has traveled to over 100 cities and 35+ countries. Mayuri has a graduate degree in History and is an MBA. She loves traveling the world, capturing historical nuances, and discussing that over a cup of coffee with her husband, Salil. She currently resides in Edmonton, Canada, and plots travel plans to Europe, the Americas, and beyond. 

Similar Posts

Banff Itinerary 5 Days for all seasons

Banff National Park is one of the oldest and most beautiful national parks in Canada. Located in the Canadian province of Alberta, Banff has a subarctic climate and numerous glaciers and ice fields. Banff also has a diverse wildlife population and maintains over 1600 kilometers of trails. But Banff is more than its wildlife, trails,…

59 Paris Gifts: Amazing Paris Themed Gifts for 2023

Need Paris gifts for someone special in your life? I got you covered. I have been collecting Paris themed gifts for years, and this obsession continues after our visit to the city of love.  The Eiffel Tower insignia is my absolute favorite. I probably own far too many of them – from small metal tower…

10 days in Canada itinerary (with 7 samples)

If you’re looking for an adventure of a lifetime, then spending 10 days in Canada is the perfect way to do it! From exploring the lush green forests and picturesque mountains to discovering unique cities and cultures – your time in Canada will be packed with experiences that you will never forget. And, we have…

Visiting Iceland in April: Everything you need to know

Iceland is a land of extremes. It’s a country of fire and ice, where glaciers, geysers, and hot springs abound. And it’s a place where you can witness some of the most incredible natural phenomena on earth. If you’re wondering when is the best time to visit the country, then our complete guide to visiting…

Best 3 days in Jasper Itinerary + Weekend trip ideas

Jasper National Park in Alberta is a great place to spend a weekend. Located in the Canadian Rocky Mountains, the park offers visitors stunning views of glaciers and soaring mountain peaks. There are plenty of outdoor activities available, including hiking, biking, skiing, and snowshoeing. Here is an epic 3 days in Jasper itinerary with further…

Perfect One Day in Mostar Itinerary (+Map)

Mostar lies some 130 km (80 miles) from the capital city of Sarajevo, and not very far from the border of Croatia. The city got its name from the word ” mostari” meaning bridge-keepers. Thanks to its location, it can be easily added to any Balkan trip. If you are planning a visit, our one…

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

• Search for:
• Login / Register
• Small Group Tours
• Private Tours
• Hanoi Tours
• Hai Phong Tours
• Halong Bay Tours
• Ninh Binh Tours
• Mai Chau Tours
• Moc Chau Tours
• Thanh Hoa Tours
• Cua Lo Tours
• Quang Binh Tours
• Hoi An Tours
• Da Nang Tours
• Da Lat Tours
• Nha Trang Tours
• Saigon – Ho Chi Minh City Tours
• Mekong Delta Tours
• Vung Tau Tours
• Phu Quoc Island Tours
• China Tours
• Indochina Tours
• Cambodia Tours
• Thailand Tours
• Myanmar Tours
• Malaysia Tours
• Indonesia Tours
• Tailor Made Tour
• 5 Star Cruises
• 4 Star Cruises
• 3 Star Cruises
• Day Cruises
• Overnight Cruises
• Catholic Pilgrimage
• Our services
• Why travel with us?
• Travel Blog

Da Nang – Hoi An Tour – 4 Days 3 Nights

$ 350 $ 302 +

Tour Information

Contact information, accommodation, important info, inclusions/exclusions.

• Reviews (7)
• Questions & Answers

Discover the beauty of Da Nang and Hoi An on this captivating 4-day, 3-night tour. Begin your adventure with a warm welcome in Da Nang before immersing yourself in the timeless charm of Hoi An. Delight in the flavors of local cuisine as you explore its narrow streets. Visit the picturesque Cam Thanh Water Coconut Village for an authentic experience. Return to Da Nang and embark on a memorable trip to Bana Hills, where breathtaking views await. Conclude your tour with a departure from Da Nang, filled with cherished memories.

• Pick up & transfer to local restaurant for lunch.
• Discover Hoi An ancient town.
• Visit the famous Japanese Covered Bridges.
• The Pottery Museum, the 200 years old Tan Ky House.
• The Chua Ong Pagoda and the bustling market.
• Visit these sights on an exciting walking tour.
• Dinner & overnight in Hoi An.
• Included service: 1-night hotel-based twin/double sharing, breakfast, lunch and dinner entrance fee, tour guide, transportation.
• Morning visit Cam Thanh Water Coconut Village.
• Take a bamboo basket boat ride on the canal.
• Enjoy the fresh nature and fun activities such as catching crabs and trying rowing the unique boat.
• Learn about the daily life of farmers and fishermen.
• Visit Da Nang city, the fourth largest city in Vietnam.
• Visit the Marble Mountain (1-way lift included), Dragon Bridge, Love Bridge & Han Market.
• Dinner & overnight in Da Nang .
• Visit to Ba Na Hills (35km) and take Cable Car which gains 5 world scores to Ba Na Hills station.
• Visit Vong Nguyet Hills, Linh Ung Pagoda, The Old Villas of French.
• Visit Nui Chua Mountain – the top of Ba Na range.
• Visiting Nginh Phong top, Le Nim Villas, Orchid Garden, Golden Bridge,…
• Buffet lunch at restaurant on Ba Na.
• Free for joining games in Fantasy Park – the third biggest indoor games zone in Vietnam.
• With series of interesting games: 4 – 5D film, skiver, the death race, dinosaur park,… (2 hours).
• Visit Linh Ung Pagoda & Son Tra Penisula.
• Dinner & overnight in Da Nang.
• Included service: 1-night hotel-based twin/double sharing, breakfast, lunch and dinner entrance fee, tour guide, transportation, cable car.
• After breakfast and check out.
• Transfer to Da Nang airport for your departure.
• Included service: Breakfast, airport transfer.

Price is in USD per person

Policy for children

• Child under 2 years old sharing room with two (2) adults without extra bed: Free of charge
• Child from 2 – under 12 years old sharing room with two (2) adults without extra bed: 50% of charge
• Child from 2 – under 12 years old sharing room with two (2) adults with extra bed: 75% of charge
• Child under 12 years old sharing room with one (1) adult: 90% of charge
• Child from 12 years old and above: 100% of charge
• Hotel in twin/triple sharing room basis with daily breakfast
• Transfer by air-conditioned car/van/bus as itinerary
• Meals as indicated
• Complimentary Mineral Water on tour (2 bottles/pax/day)
• Entrance fees, boat trip and excursions
• Round trip cable car to Ba Na Hills
• One-way lift to Marble Mountain
• English speaking guide
• Travel Insurance
• International & domestic air tickets
• Personal expenses
• Fee for visiting Wax Museum, cotton animal game and carnival skill at Fantasy Park on Ba Na Hills
• Compulsory Tipping (Collect from company)
• Others not mentioned nor specified above
• Surcharge for Halal food: USD 5/pax/meal
• Surcharge for public holidays if any (30 Apr – 2 May, 2 – 3 Sep, Da Nang International Fireworks Festival 2020 (date TBA), 24 Dec, 31 Dec)
• Surcharge for Chinese New Year (20 – 26 Jan 2023: 30% of tour fare

7 reviews for “ Da Nang – Hoi An Tour – 4 Days 3 Nights ”

Szűts Zsolt – 23/06/2023

Very interesting insights. Very crowded, but not uncomfortably. Nice wine tasting. Well worth the trip.

Juhász Pál – 23/06/2023

We enjoyed our tour Ba Na hills. Very scenic Location with cool amusement attractions. Cuong was a perfect guide and explained a lot about history and background also added a lot of fun. Unfortunately, lunch was stressy… we went to a very crowded buffet Restaurant – very loud & the food was cold. There are so many other options around – maybe just change lunch location for a perfect Trip 🙂

Szabó Gergő – 23/06/2023

It was so much fun! It was well worth the money and our tour guide Luận went above and beyond to make our day a memorable one and answered our many questions. The bus ride was entertaining and educational as well. The golden hand bridge is so beautiful, the cable car is awesome, and the Sun World Park is like nothing I’ve seen before. It truly was an unforgettable experience, a must do in my opinion!

Lukács Olivér – 23/06/2023

Amazing tour. Andy our tour guide showed us round some beautiful sights. He was very flexible with us and our needs such as giving us extra time to stop at the shops, and very gracious, even taking lots of photos of us along the way. The driver he hired was very safe and took us all the way. Overall, a great adventure!

Boros Alex – 23/06/2023

We had a very enjoyable day with our tour guide Cuong. He was professional, hilarious, friendly and very knowledgeable. Great bloke and we learnt so so much!!!!

We will definitely be back, thank you for the lovely day!!!

Kapolcs Domonkos – 23/06/2023

Great tour. There’s so much to do at Ba Na Hills, totally unexpected! Hoang was a great tour guide, very informative and funny! Great price for what you get, highly recommended!

Németh Dezső – 23/06/2023

This tour was fantastic. Our guide, Mr. Ken, was wonderful, so interesting, informative, and respectful. He ensured we got a real sense of the history and culture of Vietnam. Our driver was very good too and drove with care. I cannot recommend this tour highly enough. I will certainly use this company again when we return to Hoi An as they offer some other interesting tours.

Add a review Cancel reply

Your review  *

Name  *

Email  *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Questions & Answers

There are no questions yet. Be the first to ask a question about this product.

Your question *

Related travel guides

Explore the Hidden Charm of Marble Mountains in Danang

Da Nang Restaurant: A Complete Guide to Satisfy Your Palate

Hoi An Journey: Top 10 Must-Visit Tourist Attractions

10 Incredible Things to Do in Hoi An, Vietnam

Related tours.

Da Nang – Hue – Hoi An Tour – 6 Days 5 Nights

$ 530 $ 485 +

Vietnam Essential Tour – 11 Days 10 Nights

Highlights of Vietnam and Myanmar – 18 Days 17 Nights

Discover Vietnam – Scenic and Short Trek – 15 Days 14 Nights

Zen Moments in Korea

4 days in Seoul: Your ultimate 2024 itinerary

One of the fascinating things about Seoul, and South Korea in general, is the blend between the modern and the old.

On the one hand, Seoul is one of the most developed, high-tech global cities, with futuristic-looking skyscrapers dominating its skyline.

Yet, on the other hand, it is a city of living history, its medieval palaces, and traditional neighborhoods bustling with life.

This great and easy-to-follow 4 days in Seoul itinerary , will allow you to see all sides of the city: the old, the new, and the fun!

This post contains affiliate links. This means if you click on the link and purchase the item, I will receive an affiliate commission at no additional cost to you. Read more about it on our  disclosure page here .

Table of Contents

Things to know when planning a trip to seoul, south korea, day 1 of your 4 days in seoul: palaces and history, day 2 – explore gangnam, day 3 – namsan mountain and itaewon, day 4 – go on a day trip outside of seoul, day 1 buam-dong and lunch + skincare treatment in myeongdong + nanta show, day 2: relax at a jjimjilbang + go on an evening tour of suwon, day 3: have coffee in yeouido park, visit seonyudo island park, and go on a food tour in mangwon, day 4: seoul forest + seongsu neighborhood + evening cruise on the han river, other things worth doing in seoul, where to stay in seoul, seoul money-saving tips, how much money do you need per day in seoul, how to get from seoul to incheon airport, what is the best time to spend 4 days in seoul, understanding seoul, getting around town on your 4 days in seoul, where to eat in seoul – our favorite restaurants + recommendations by a local, cafes with the best view in seoul, 4 days in seoul: your ultimate seoul itinerary.

If this is your first trip to South Korea, there are a few things worth knowing beforehand. As with many other countries, Korea has its particularities and a certain way of doing things, thus having the right apps and information will make your vacation careless.

We recommend you read our comprehensive article packed with useful information for when you are planning a Seoul itinerary.

VISA & K-ETA

Depending on where you are traveling from, you will or won’t need a visa . Check your Visa requirements here!

Currently, South Korea has in place a visa-free online application process for certain eligible countries (you can check the list here ) that you must obtain before your trip.

K-ETA or the Korean Electronic Travel Authorization must be obtained before boarding a flight or ship. Here is some useful information regarding the K-ETA visa:

• The approval process takes more than 72 hours, thus it is useful to apply in advance;
• You will need to have accommodation booked before applying for the K-ETA, the address is one of the required information.
• The validity of the K-ETA visa is of 2 years from the date of approval;
• With the K-ETA you can stay in South Korea for 30 to 90 days;
• However, if you are visiting for travel purposes, and plan to return after your first visit, you will have to come back and update your visa with the new hotel address;
• One person can apply for up to 30 persons and can pay for all at once;
• K-ETA price : 10.000 won (around 9-10 USD)
• Book your AREX Airport Express Ticket ,
• Take the Airport Limousine Bus ,
• Book a private transfer ,
• or read everything about getting from Incheon to Hongdae , Myeongdong , Bukchon Hanok Village , or Gangnam .

Communication and transportation

• Book your SIM Card & T-Money Card with airport pickup
• See if you would rather buy a SIM card or pocket wifi for your trip
• Or get an eSIM card directly in your email, and learn everything you must know about getting around Seoul

Getting around South Korea

• Rent a car in advance – choose an international website where you can use your credit card. Read everything about driving in South Korea
• Travel by fast train and book a multiple-day Korea Rail Pass

Other useful tips & links

• Lugg a ge delivery service – have your luggage delivered from the airport to your hotel and take the all-stop train. It might be cheaper than taking a taxi.
• Luggage storage service
• Don’t travel without insurance – this is a World Wide Travel Health Insurance + Covid suitable for almost anyone, and easy to book. On top of that, they also provide luggage insurance in case your luggage gets lost or damaged. Get the best offer here!
• Accommodation guides : where to stay in Seoul , Busan , and everywhere in between
• Should you get the Discover Seoul Pass ? See our analysis and alternatives for saving on your trip

Your 4-day Seoul itinerary for first-timers overview

Day 1 – Visit central Seoul, its historical area, and the Palaces

Day 2 – Go south of the river and explore Gangnam

Day 3 – Climb to Namsan Tower, visit a cafe in Itaewon

Day 4 – Day trip to DMZ

Today will be a day of exploration and stepping back in time, learning a little bit about Korea’s history, and feeling like a princess or prince.

An option would be to start your day by renting a hanbok (Korean traditional clothing), and you can read everything about our experience here .

However, if you don’t feel like wandering around the streets of Seoul in those clothes, don’t worry, start your day in Bukchon Hanok Village.

Bukchon Hanok Village

If you’d like to see what a 600 years-old traditional village would look like in the middle of a high-tech, global metropolis, you must visit Bukchon Hanok.

Bukchon, literally the North Village, was the residential area of the nobility and high-ranking government officials during the Joseon period; it was the Beverly Hills of its day, the playground of the rich and famous. As its name suggests, it consists of numerous hanoks, traditional Korean houses.

According to polls, it is one of the favorite areas of foreign tourists. However, it became wildly popular with the locals after it was featured in the South Korean reality show ‘ 1 Night 2 Days ’ and the TV series ‘ Personal Taste .’

The area hosts several museums, coffee shops, and restaurants. And it is also a good place to rent a hanbok from. So you can start the day with a coffee in Bukchon Hanok Village, then dress up and walk its history-filled streets under the admiring gaze of the passerby. Once you finish visiting Changdeokgung, Gyeongbokgung, Deoksugung, and Jogyesa, you can return your outfit and enjoy a nice traditional dinner in Bukcheon. It’s worth it!

Address : Jongno-gu, 계동길 37

How to get to Bukchon Hanok Village : Take the subway or bus to Anguk Station. Read the complete guide here!

Bukchon Hanok Village to Changdeokgung Palace :

Changdeokgung Palace

The Palace of Prospering Virtue, known in Korean as Changdeokgung, was the favorite palace of many Joseon rulers. Moreover, it was the site of the royal court during two out of the three centuries that passed between Gyeongbukgung’s first destruction and its eventual reconstruction in 1868.

Changdeok stands out compared to Gyeongbukgung because its buildings blend in with the natural topography instead of dominating it; its construction style retains elements of the previous Three Kingdoms period of Korean history. Actually, the palace was built specifically to replace Gyeongbuk.

One note before going into the details: according to Joseon tradition, newly crowned kings changed their names similar to the practice of Catholic Popes (e.g., the current Pope Francis was Jorge Mario Bergoglio before he ascended to the Papacy; the first Joseon ruler, King Taejo was Yi-Seonggye before being crowned). Also, in Korean naming tradition, the first name is the family name (Yi is the family name of Yi Seonggye).

King Taejong (born Yi Bangwon), the third ruler of the Joseon dynasty, was reluctant to reside at Gyeongbuk because he had bad memories of the place.

Gyeongbuk was the brainchild of Jeong Dojeon, the first official to hold the Yeonguijeong position, a kind of Prime Minister of Joseon.

Jeong Dojeon envisaged a kingdom run by ministers, with the king having a ceremonial role. However, Prince Yi Bangwon, King Taejo’s fifth son and heir-apparent believed that the Monarch should have absolute power over state affairs.

Given their fundamentally diverging views, Jeong Dojeon convinced the founder of the Joseon dynasty, King Taejo, to appoint his eighth son, Yi Bangseok, as his successor instead of Yi Bangwon.

Enraged, Yi Bangwon raided Gyeongbuk palace, killing Jeong Dojeon and some of the other princes, his own half-brothers, in the process. Saddened by the events, King Taejo abdicated and, eventually, Yi Bangwon ascended to the throne as King Taejong.

Understandably, Taejong preferred constructing a new palace rather than living in the place he committed fratricide.

Today circa 30% of the pre-Japanese structure remains; the site has been a UNESCO World Heritage monument since 1997.

Apart from the impressive historical buildings, today’s main points of attraction are Changdeok’s gardens .

The Huwon , or Rear Garden, was originally constructed for the use of the royal family and palace women. The lotus pond is surrounded by hundreds of different trees and plant species; some trees are more than 300 years old. The Jade Stream area contains a U-shaped water channel initially used for floating wine cups; there is a small waterfall above it.

The Gemuwon, or Forbidden Garden, was destined for the exclusive use of the king. Today, many Koreans call it Biwon, or Secret Garden.

One popular historical K-drama, ‘The Jewel in the Palace,’ was mostly filmed at Changdeokgung.

Admission Fees [Changdeokgung Palace] Adults (ages 25-64): 3,000 won / Group (over 10 people): 2,400 won / Youth ( ages 7-18): 1500 won Students (ages 24 and under): Free (* Except for foreign visitors)

On the last Wednesday of the month, and when wearing a hanbok dress, the entrance is free.

Opening Hours : Closed on Mondays; between 9 a.m. and 5.30 p.m. or 6 p.m. depending on the season. See opening hours here!

Address : 99, Yulgok-ro, Jongno-gu, Seoul

Subway : Anguk Station (Seoul Subway Line 3), Exit 3.

Changdeokgung Palace to Gyeongbokgung Palace

Gyeongbokgung Palace

Unlike the Cantonese Chinese names that I easily memorized when we lived in Hong Kong, I had difficulties learning Korean ones after moving to Seoul.

One of the first Korean place names I encountered was Gyeongbokgung, which was a bit tricky for someone like me who didn’t know much about the language. Yet, once I figured out that the names are made up of separate words, it became much easier to learn them.

‘Gyeong’ means Brilliance, Honor, Respect and in Sino-Korean could also mean ‘Capital City’. ‘Bok’ usually means Fortune, while ‘Gung’ means Palace.

Thus, by giving this name to the palace, the government expressed its desire for a bright future.

Gyeongbokgung Palace is one of the most iconic landmarks in South Korea. It was first built by King Taejo, founder of the Joseon Dynasty, in 1395 and served as the dynastic seat until 1592.

Unfortunately, the palace was destroyed during the 1592 – 1598 Japanese invasion of Korea but was reconstructed in 1867 under King Gojong.

Some sources state that Gyeongbokgung was set ablaze by locals, enraged by the King’s actions: he fled the capital to escape the advancing Japanese, leaving its inhabitants to the conquerers’ mercy.

Other sources seem to indicate Japanese responsibility for the destruction. Ozeki, one of the Japanese commanders, described arriving at the now-abandoned palace in his diary and noted its amazing beauty. Ozeki’s account implies that Gyeongbok wasn’t damaged when the Japanese entered the city.

Irrespective of who was to blame for the disaster, the palace complex was left in ruins for the following three centuries.

Eventually, the palace was rebuilt and expanded in 1867, regaining its status as a symbol of Korean national identity. However, after Japanese agents assassinated Empress Myeongseong in 1895, her husband, Emperor Gojong, left the palace; the Royal family never returned.

In 1915, under the pretext of organizing an Industrial Exhibition at the site, the Japanese government systematically demolished 90% of Gyeongbokgung. Furthermore, they built the Japanese General Government Building at the site, trying to eradicate any vestiges of previous Korean independence.

Finally, in 1989, the Korean government initiated a 40 years plan of rebuilding hundreds of monuments and buildings destroyed during the Japanese occupation. As a result, in 1995, the Korean authorities demolished the former Japanese General Government Building, restoring and reconstructing circa 40% of the complex. The authorities plan to fully restore Gyeongbok to its pre-occupation levels in the following decade.

Walking through the complex today while admiring the many visitors dressed in traditional clothing, one wouldn’t guess the place’s violent history.

We loved visiting the palace’s Secret Garden; sitting by the pond can easily transport you to a world without worries. The majestic mountain in the background adds to the serene atmosphere. Furthermore, if you are lucky to visit during the cherry blossom season, you will have the chance of taking great Instragrammable pictures .

If you enjoy military history, there is a changing of the guard ceremony; it happens several times a day, at pre-determined hours – you should time your visit accordingly.

But if you have the chance, nothing beats visiting Gyeongbok (and the other Seoul palaces and Buchan Hanok village) while dressed in traditional hanbok.

Not only can you enter for free at Gyeongbok while wearing it, but you might be requested to pose for pictures by the local ladies. For some reason, Koreans love to take photos of foreigners dressed in traditional Korean clothing; I never felt like a superstar before this experience.

Admission Fees Adults (ages 19-64): 3,000 won / Groups (10 people or more): 2,400 won Children (ages 7-18): 1,500 won / Groups (10 people or more): 1,200 won

Free on the last Wednesday of the month and while wearing a hanbok.

Address : 161, Sajik-ro, Jongno-gu, Seoul

Opening Hours : Closed on Tuesdays; between 9 a.m. and 5 p.m. or 6:30 p.m. depending on the season. See operating time here!

Gyeongbokgung Station (Seoul Subway Line 3) and Exit 5. Anguk Station (Seoul Subway Line 3) and Exit 1.

Would you rather go on a guided tour to see the Palaces in Seoul ? You can learn so much from a local guide! Here are a few of the best options to look into:

Small-Group Seoul Morning Royal Palaces Tour – a 3.5 hour tour that will take you to Gyeongbokgung Palace, Jogyesa Temple, and to watch the royal guard changing ceremony at Gwanghwamun Gate. Apart from entrance fees and a local guide, the tour includes also hotel pick-up.

Seoul City Private Full-Day Tour Including Lunch – a very popular tour, that sells out fast. It includes hotel pick-up and drop-off, a visit to Gyeongbokgung Palace and Bukchon Hanok Village, Jogyesa Temple, and N Seoul Tower, and lunch at a local restaurant.

Gyeongbokgung Palace to Deoksugung Palace

Deoksugung Palace

Deoksugung Palace, also known as  Gyeongungung ,  Deoksugung Palace , or  Deoksu Palace, is one of my favorite palatial complexes built by Joseon in Seoul; maybe because we spent a pleasant afternoon on its grounds, wearing the hanboks, immersing ourselves in Korea’s rich history.

Built in the late 16th century by King Seonjo of the Joseon Dynasty, it was originally called Gyeongun-gung but changed its name to Deoksugung after being reconstructed during the reign of King Gojong.

The palace has been home to several royal families over its long history and today serves as an important cultural landmark for both locals and tourists alike.

The distinctive fusion of traditional Korean and European influences found in the architecture of Joseon-era compounds makes them a truly unique sight.

In the late 19th century, King Gojong of Joseon sought to modernize his kingdom and help it keep up with the rapid changes taking place around the world. To this end, he ordered the installation of electricity in Deoksugung Palace in 1900, making it one of the first buildings in Seoul to receive such a feature. However, during the Japanese occupation, it was transformed into a cafeteria.

Moreover, a European-style, stone palatial building was commissioned, the Seokjojeon. The building was designed by the British architect John Reginald Harding in the Neo-Renaissance style. A typical European garden complements the Seokjojeon. Today, it houses the Korean Empire History Hall.

The Seokjojeon West Building is a later addition; it was opened in 1938 as the House of Yi Art Museum. It continues to serve as the National Museum of Modern and Contemporary Art.

Visitors can explore its many halls, pavilions, gardens, and courtyards while learning about its fascinating past.

You can also book a walking tour and learn about the history of this impressive palace. It is done during the night , for a more impressive view.

Entrance ticket fee:  Adult: 1,000 won ; Children: 500 won

Address : 100-120  99 Sejong-daero, Jung-gu, Seoul

Opening hours : Closed on Mondays; Open daily between 9:00AM ~ 9:00PM

Subway : City Hall Station (subway line 1) exit 2

Book your own unforgettable photo session with a local professional photographer here !

Deoksugung Palace to Jogyesa Temple

Jogyesa Temple

Jogyesa is the chief temple of the Jogye Order of Korean Buddhism.

The Jogye Order is the representative order of traditional Korean Seon Buddhism. Its roots are over 1200 years old when the Latter Silla Master Doui brought Seon from China (‘Seon’ is what we call ‘Zen’ in the West).

The Buddhist Orders were persecuted during the Joseon period. Instead, the new rulers favored Neo-Confucianism as the basis of their society; its strong influences still permeate modern Korean culture, although most religious South Koreans are Christians. According to government statistics from 2015, almost half of the population is irreligious, nearly 30% are Christian, 22% are Buddhists, and less than 1% are Confucianists. You’ll surely notice the numerous churches once you arrive in Seoul.

Although Seon Masters raised troops and protected the country during the first Japanese invasion of 1592-1598, Buddhist monks were not allowed into the cities until 1895.

The Jogyesa temple dates back to the dawn of Joseon in the late XIV century, and it became the center of the Jogye Order in 1936. Initially called Gakhwangsa Temple, it changed its name in 1954 to reflect its central position in the Jogye Order.

Apart from the temple itself, the courtyard hosts a couple of unique trees over 500 years old: a White Pine tree, brought by Chinese missionaries, and a Chinese Scholar tree. Can you imagine that these trees were already hundreds of years old at the time of the American Revolutionary War?

More recently, the Temple grounds witnessed events we usually don’t associate with Zen living. For example, in the 1990s, two different Buddhist factions came to blows, and hundreds of monks engaged in violence using makeshift weaponry. Everyone has a breaking point, it seems.

Guided tours in English , are held daily except Saturdays from  10 AM, 12 AM, 14 PM, and 16 PM . The only day when you can see the temple whenever you want, without a guided tour, is on Saturdays.

Admission Fee : Adults 1000 won; Children: 500 won

Address : 55, Ujeongguk-ro, Jongno-gu, Seoul

Opening Hours : the main hall is open 24 hours

Subway : Jonggak Station (Subway Line 1), Exit 2; Anguk Station (Subway Line 3), Exit 6; Gwanghwamun Station (Subway Line 5), Exit 2.

Jogyesa temple to Insadong

Make your back towards Bukchon Hanok Village passing through Insadong. A mix of old and new, Insadong concentrates the most art and antique shops in Seoul.

It is known for its traditional Korean culture and bustling local shops that line the streets. Here you can find everything from antiques to handmade crafts, as well as delicious street food and unique teahouses.

Stop to buy some valuable souvenirs, grab a bite at one of the traditional restaurants hidden on the narrow streets, or grab a cup of tea at Osulloc Tea House .

Insadong to Cheonggyecheon Stream

Walk along the Cheonggyecheon stream

The Cheonggyecheon Stream is a 10.9-kilometer-long urban oasis that runs through the heart of the city, and you can easily walk there from Jogyesa Temple and Insadong.

The stream is bordered by parks and walkways that are filled with vibrant sculptures and art installations. It was once an open sewer, but in 2005 it was restored to its original beauty as part of an ambitious urban renewal project. Today, it serves as a tranquil refuge for locals and visitors alike who come to take in the natural scenery or enjoy leisurely strolls along its banks.

Southern Seoul, or the south of the river as for the direct translation, is the new and vibrant area in town.

While you will find it hard to see it all in one day alone, I have tried to help you scratch the surface and see its highlights.

Famous because of Psy’s song “Gangnam Style”, Gangnam is a neighborhood and a way of living. Seoul’s most expensive area, and the home to some of the nicest parks and shopping malls in town.

Stroll through Sinsa and Garosu

Take the bus or the subway and cross over to the southern part of Seoul. Hannam Bridge links Yognsan to Gangnam and is one of the most picturesque places along the river.

You can even start your day with a stroll along the river, heading towards the street of Sinsa-dong and Garosu. Home to some of the most famous and luxurious brands, packed with small cafes or perfume and cosmetics stores, you might be shocked to find a horse inside.

Another thing that will surprise and impress is the number of cosmetic surgery clinics crowded in this area – around Tehran-ro (street).

From Sinsa, don’t walk on Dosan-daero (Boulevard) but step on the smaller streets and allow yourself to get lost on your way to Dosan Park.

Have a coffee and brunch at a fancy place or enjoy a SPA treatment

In the area of Dosan Park, you will find plenty of cafes and coffee shops, but also flagship stores for some of the most famous Korean cosmetic brands.

Most offer an experience and some also have SPA facilities.

South Korea is home to some of the most popular and qualitative cosmetics, and you cannot leave without pampering yourself for at least one hour.

Sulwhasoo Flagship Store is hosted in an impressive building right next to Dosan Park. On the ground floor, they host a small museum showcasing the brand’s history and some facts about Korea’s beauty history.

On the second floor, they have a small shop where you can also try most of their products and choose your favorites.

Also, they have a SPA where you can enjoy luxurious treatments with their lush cosmetics, infused with Korean ginseng.

On top of the building, they host a nice rooftop terrace, from where you can enjoy the surrounding area.

Next door, have brunch at Dear Dahlia’s Flagship Store with its girly interior, or reward yourself with a coffee at the Dior Cafe.

Bongeunsa Buddhist Temple

One of the few Buddhist Temples you will find in the city, it is home to 13 smaller temples  each with its history and particularities.

The temple holds a long history (over 1200 years), having been built in 794, the temple is home to 3,479 Buddhist scriptures of 13 types.

Perched on a hill, in between greens, the temple offers temple stays during which you can learn more about Buddhism, sample tea, and learn more about the temple itself.

Before Buddha’s Day in late summer and around the Lunar New Year, the temple is decorated with colorful lanterns. They are actually a symbol of Buddha’s enlightenment and can be admired along with listening to chanting and other processions that take place during this time.

The temple also has a tea house in one of the smaller houses, open since 2018, where you can take a break and savor a cup of delicious tea.

COEX Mall and Starfield Library

Next door to the temple you’ll find the famous Starfield Library hosted inside the COEX Mall.

Follow the signs, walk between Korean and international brands, and get to the photogenic library. The place has been thought of as a place for relaxation and socializing. Even if you would be able to read in Korean, you wouldn’t be permitted to borrow books and magazines, but you can read them inside the library.

Apart from the library, COEX Mall hosts an impressive indoor aquarium where you can enjoy a unique “mermaid performance”. The place is also known for having the highest number of sharks in South Korea.

Lotte World Tower

Hop on the subway and head to Jamsil for South Korea’s tallest building. Try to make it just in time for sunset, and you will be rewarded with a breathtaking view of the city.

The Sky Tower is Korea’s tallest building, and the Lotte World Tower is hosted on 117 – 123 floors. Apart from the stunning views, you can experience one of the world’s fastest elevators.

Another option would be to extend your time spent around the Lotte World Tower, especially when you don’t feel like walking so much.

The itinerary can easily be altered when you purchase the Songpa L-Pass . The pass included entrance to Lotte World Adventure, Lotte World Aquarium, and Seoul Sky. That would mean that you can spend the whole day here, without getting bored.

Lotte World Adventure is a major recreation complex, with the world’s largest indoor theme park, and an outdoor amusement park. No matter if you are traveling with kids or you simply want to have fun, this is the place for you!

Today will be about hiking (or not), views, and one of the most iconic areas of Seoul: Itaewon.

Seullo 7017

Seullo translates to “towards Seoul” or “Seoul street” and is an elevated sky garden in the heart of the city. Get off at Seoul Central Station and take one of the elevators to the former highway overpass.

Especially during spring or summer, a walk on the suspended overpass will both delight and impress you. From here, you can see the beautiful building that hosts the central train station, with its blue cupola, one of Seoul’s gates, but also the wide boulevard and the crazy traffic.

Different types of flowers are cared for every day by workers and await you to discover them on your walk towards Namsan Mountain.

Read also the complete guide for how to get to Namsan Tower !

Namsan Mountain and N Seoul Tower

As you get close to the famous Namdaemun Market, on your right-hand side you will see one of the roads that lead to the park below N Seoul Tower.

Namsan Mountain is the highest peak in the center of Seoul, home to many plants and birds, but also one of the favorite recreation spots for South Korean people.

You can easily get to the top of the mountain by cable car or by bus (no. 02, 03, or 05), but hiking there is rewarding and an experience in itself. The hike is moderate and offers lots of viewpoints where you can stop along the way to catch your breath.

Hiking from either side of the mountain took us around one hour.

On the top of the mountain, the N Seoul Tower will welcome you with an observation deck and plenty of restaurants with an unforgettable view.

In the area surrounding the tower, you will find plenty of photography spots, but also a famous bridge and trees covered with thousands of lovers’ padlocks.

Descending from the mountaintop towards Itaewon will take you through a forest where you will find it hard to believe you are still in the heart of this huge metropolis.

Located in the heart of the city, Itaewon is a vibrant and diverse neighborhood that has something for everyone. Whether you’re looking for some delicious local cuisine, international restaurants, shopping options, or exciting nightlife venues – Itaewon has it all.

The narrow streets are lined with trendy boutiques selling everything from clothes to accessories, while the restaurants range from traditional Korean fare to exotic delicacies from around the world.

For those who enjoy a bit of nightlife, there are plenty of bars and clubs offering an array of entertainment options. Plus, if you want to take in some culture during your visit then there are several art galleries and museums located nearby too.

The neighborhood is also packed with murals, trendy cafes, stunning views, and a Culture Trace Journey where you can learn about Seoul and this part of town.

You can easily spend half day of your itinerary in this part of town.

Visit The Leeum, Samsung Museum of Art; explore the Itaewon Mosque, shop on the antique street, or simply taste some international oriental cuisine.

End your day with a traditional dinner at the Korea House restaurant. The setting is impressive, the food is delicious, and they often have shows or wedding ceremonies you can admire.

While the city offers many more things to do and see, you might want to consider some of the most popular day trips outside of Seoul .

DMZ (the Demilitarized Zone between North and South Korea) is visited every year by hundreds of thousands of tourists, even though Koreans don’t think much of it. Read our complete guide for a day trip to DMZ here!

Nami Island, the Garden of Morning Calm, and Petite France are stunning in every season, but you shouldn’t think twice during spring or fall.

Paju, Incheon, Suwon, or Chuncheon are only a few other places easily reachable by public transportation, and worth visiting from Seoul.

Pin for later

Option 2: 4 Days in Seoul Itinerary off the beaten path

If this is not your first time in Seoul, and you are looking for some off-the-beaten-path attractions and things to do, I will help you with an itinerary option.

These are some of the places I loved exploring once I got to know Seoul better. Of course, I always loved climbing Namsan Mountain or exploring Gangnam, but these are a few things to consider when you want to do something else.

Maybe our favorite Seoul neighborhood, tucked away from the hustle and bustle, packed with nice things to enjoy.

It is an area full of history and culture and has been home to many famous Korean figures over the years.

The area is known for its traditional markets, ancient temples, and vibrant street life.

Visitors can explore this unique part of town by taking a walk through its narrow alleyways or visiting one of its many restaurants or cafes.

Buam-dong also offers a variety of cultural activities such as concerts, art galleries, and festivals throughout the year that make it an ideal destination for travelers looking for something different from the usual tourist spots in Seoul.

For lunch, stop by Jaha Son Mandu , the renowned Michelin-star restaurant is worth every second of the wait in line. With an extensive menu of exquisite dishes, each colorful plate will tantalize your taste buds and leave you wanting more. For a complete dining experience, make sure to save room for one of their signature cinnamon sweet drinks that are sure to satisfy your cravings with a sweet and tart flavor. And for the ultimate treat, snag a table by the window to take in the gorgeous views of the city while you dine.

In the afternoon, pamper yourself with a facial at one of the best-known places in town: O HUI&WHOO SPA in Myeong-dong .

Once you are relaxed, go for the popular Nanta Show at the Theatre in Myeong-dong.

The show has been captivating audiences since 1997, with its unique blend of traditional Korean percussion music, comedy, and improvisation.

It follows the story of four chefs who are trying to prepare a wedding banquet within an impossible time limit while dealing with unexpected obstacles thrown their way. With thrilling performances that combine martial arts and acrobatics, the Nanta Show is sure to provide an unforgettable experience that will leave you laughing and amazed.

One of the best things to do in South Korea, especially after spending a few days or weeks exploring, is to spend a few hours at one of the  best Korean SPA in Seoul .

There are plenty of great options in Seoul, Incheon, or Busan, and offering yourself a few hours of pampering is always a good idea. If you are traveling during  winter in Korea , the  rainy season , or you just love a good SPA, you should not skip this experience.

We loved our experience at Aquafield in Hannam, and you can read all about it and the rules to know in our comprehensive Jimjilbang guide .

End the day with a short trip outside of Seoul. Go on a night tour at Suwon.

It is a 5-hour trip that will take you to see Hwaseong Fortress under the moonlight.

Built between 1794 and 1796 to protect the city of Suwon, the fortress is an outstanding example of Korean architecture and engineering from the late Joseon period.

The fortress walls are 5.52 km long and contain four large gates with two smaller ones within them. Inside the walls, there are several historic sites such as palace buildings, pavilions, command posts, observation towers, and shooting galleries that were all built during this time period.

Hwaseong Fortress has been designated by UNESCO as a World Heritage Site since 1997 due to its significance in Korean history and culture. It stands today as a testament to Korea’s rich cultural heritage and acts as an important reminder of how far Korea has come over the centuries.

Option : If you are passionate about technology, spend the whole day in Suwon, on a guided tour of the Samsung Innovation Museum and Hwaseong Fortress .

Start your day in Seoul’s financial district, but come here for the park along the Han River.

Get your coffee from Tailor Coffee in the Hyundai Department Store, and walk towards the river. From here, you can admire the I Seoul U sign, together with Seoul’s iconic skyline.

Go for a walk along the river all the way to Seonyudo Island Park. The small park is set on an island and it is filled with flowers, especially if you are visiting during spring or summer.

From there, you can take the bus and easily get to Mungwon – a less-known area, very popular with Koreans. You can explore the cafes and night market on your own, but I strongly suggest booking a food tour .

You will be joined by a local guide who will take you to some of the best food stalls in Seoul.

Seoul Forest Park covers more than four million square meters and offers an array of activities and attractions, from nature trails to amusement parks.

The park has been carefully landscaped with over 400 species of trees, shrubs, and flowers as well as numerous lakes and streams that provide a peaceful refuge from the hustle and bustle of Seoul’s streets.

You can enjoy leisurely strolls around the lake or take advantage of educational programs such as bird-watching tours or classes on traditional Korean crafts like paper making or pottery.

During spring, the park is famous for its tulips, while during fall everyone comes here for the ginkgo trees.

Right next to the park, you will find plenty of cool cafes.

From the park, you can easily get to Seongsu-dong .

The neighborhood has been a popular residential district since the 2000s and is known for its trendy restaurants, cafes, and boutiques.

Seongsu-dong is renowned for its vibrant nightlife scene with numerous bars, clubs, and live music venues catering to different tastes. There are also plenty of shopping areas where you can find products from all over the world at reasonable prices.

Moreover, in the area, you can find the Amore Pacific concept store (one of the best places to try and buy Korean skincare ), but also the iconic Dior concept store.

Finish off your day with a cruise on the Han River with a food buffet .

You can admire Seoul’s skyline from the water, and feast on traditional Korean food at a local restaurant.

Foodies will enjoy a cooking class where they can learn how to make some of the most popular delicious Korean dishes. Prepare 3 main dishes and a stew and enjoy them afterward! See more here!

Go on a walking tour with a local guide and gain an insider’s perspective from a local.

If you are feeling more adventurous, Kayaking and Paddle Boarding on the Han River might spark your interest. Alternatively, you can book a sunset cruise on the river and enjoy the skyline while learning about the most important sights.

Pin for later!

No matter if you are visiting the city for the first time or you are returning after a while, these are the best areas to consider staying in.

We have visited the city as tourists and we have had the chance to live there for one year, and have used that experience to help you choose the best place to stay if you don’t want to waste time commuting.

Seoul is a huge metropolis and wasting time in traffic would mean having to skip some of the most important attractions. With only 4 days in Seoul on hand, you must make the best choice when it comes to accommodation location.

Read also: Hongdae or Myeongdong – where to stay as a first-time tourist | Where to stay in Seoul on a budget

If you don’t have the time to read the full article, here are a few of our recommendations for where to stay in Seoul when you visit for the first time and for 4 days. Most first-timers choose to stay in Myeongdong , however, there are other great options as well:

• Namdaemunno  – the area we chose to stay in during our first trip to Seoul, at  Courtyard by Marriott Seoul Namdaemun . It was a nice hotel, with a view of the NSeoul tower and the Sungnyemun Gate, from where I could easily walk to many of the main attractions in town.  Check it out here!
• Insadong  – maybe the most tourist area in town, mainly because it is so close to most of the popular spots.  ibis Ambassador Insadong  offers Seoul Tower views and a beautiful rooftop terrace, and it is located close to Insadong’s Main Street, which has most of its outlets open all night.  Check it out here!
• Myeongdong  –  Nine Tree Hotel Myeongdong  – this was our first choice when we visited for the first time, mainly because of its location and facilities. However, we ended up staying in another hotel, which was quite good. If you would rather stay in Myeongdong, Nine Tree offers great quality vs price ratio.  Check it out here!
• Hongdae – while the area is not right in the heart of the city, it is perfectly connected to most of the important attractions in town. Moreover, this is a vibrant area with plenty of things to do and see. L7 Hongdae by LOTTE  is a 4* hotel, steps away from the subway station, set on the main boulevard. The hotel has a stunning rooftop restaurant and bar from where you can admire the city, but also a rooftop swimming pool for the hot days of summer. Check it out here!

It is widely known that Seoul is one of the most expensive towns in Asia and the world, thus, if you are traveling on a budget, here are a few money-saving tips you should have in mind.

Consider booking your plane ticket at the right moment – not too soon or not too late, but at least 3 months in advance, depending on where you are traveling from. Use an aggregator such as Syscanner in order to find the best options and routes from your destination.

Get the Seoul City Pass when you want to see as much as you can – it will also help you forget about public transportation (it works as a TMoney) and it will offer you free access to a selection of 42 attractions. For a 4-day Seoul itinerary, I would suggest going for the 72-hour City Pass. S e e more here!

Book your activities online in advance – Klook or Trazy are your go-to places for activities in Seoul and South Korea. They cover all of the most important attractions, day trips, guided tours, and more. And they also help you save on your trip!

Eat local food – if you are traveling on a budget and want to save money, choose to eat street food, eat at the local markets, or choose the most local-looking restaurants. Cafe s , barbeque places, and well-known restaurants (local or Western) will always be more expensive.

Some other things worth knowing:

• certain restaurants and cafes will ask you to take off your shoes, and you might even have to sit on the floor
• Google maps don’t   work properly, thus you will need local apps such as  Kakao Maps or Naver . We have always used Naver because we found it more user-friendly. If you step outside of the tourist area, it helps to search for addresses and places in Korean, otherwise ,  you might not find them.
• when taking the subway, always stay on the right side of the escalator.
• during summer or the hot season, Korean women never wore clothes too revealing with the upper part of the body (no cleavage). That doesn’t mean you should do the same, just be mindful of this when packing for South Korea.
• most restaurants won’t provide forks, and you will be expected to eat with Korean chopsticks.
• at a barbeque, Koreans cut meat with scissors, not a knife.
• download and use Papago for translating everything around you. It works perfectly with pictures, even though sometimes it could show you strange things (like the time we thought we had dog soup, when in fact it was ox cartilage).

Eating out in Seoul can be an expensive undertaking, depending on your tastes and preferences. For the budget-conscious traveler, local eateries offer delicious fare at reasonable prices—a typical meal might cost around 50,000 KRW.

On the other hand, if you’re looking to splurge, a visit to a Korean BBQ restaurant could easily set you back 100,000 KRW or more. And of course, that doesn’t include the cost of any attractions you decide to visit during your stay in Seoul.

A day in Seoul can be as expensive or as affordable as you make it. For those looking to save money, there are several options for transportation such as the subway system, buses, and even walking. Eating out is also an option, with local restaurants offering delicious meals at a fraction of the cost of Western-style chain restaurants.

Taxis are also available and can be a convenient way to get around, although they tend to be more expensive than other forms of transportation.

Of course, there are ways in which you can save money (getting the  Go City Seoul Pass  for example), but you can also spend much more when you choose high-end restaurants or enjoy shopping.

Getting from the airport to the city center or to your hotel couldn’t be simpler in Seoul.

We have personally used all options and can compare from experience.

Book a private transfer when you want to have a driver waiting for you at the airport. The price is comparable to the one of taking a taxi, but the driver will already have your final destination address. On top of that, you won’t have to worry about finding a car after a long flight.

Go by AREX ( Airport Railroad Express ) – the fast train conveniently links the Seoul Central Station to both Gimpo and Incheon International Airports. Upon arrival, follow the directions that will take you to the train tracks.

From Seoul Station, you can make your way further to your hotel or final destination.

While convenient, traveling by train and subway could prove to be challenging when you have large luggage or when you don’t stay in a hotel close to the subway station. For those times, you can choose to leave your bags at the luggage storage at Incheon or Gimpo – on top of keeping your luggage for up to one day, they can also transport them to and from your hotel. See all the options here!

The advantage is that you will be able to pay with your T-Money card , and the train is really fast – between 43 and 51 minutes depending on your terminal. Order the card or Seoul City Pass before you arrive in order to make the trip carefree.

Get a taxi from the airport – at Incheon Airport as soon as you exit arrivals you will find a designated desk for booking taxis and transfers. The people there speak English and will be able to assist you in choosing the best car option for you.

Having the address of the hotel written down in Korean will always come in handy.

Airport shuttle bus – a budget option worth taking into consideration when you don’t want to leave your luggage in storage or don’t want to spend too much on transportation.

In Terminal 2 there’s a Bus terminal, while if you arrive in Terminal 1 you can ask at the ticket booth for the location of the bus stops.

Whenever you choose to travel by car or bus, bear in mind the fact that traffic in Seoul can get crazily crowded – something worth keeping in mind, especially on your way out of South Korea.

Read the complete guide here !

With a temperate climate, South Korea has 4 seasons – some more appropriate than others.

The best time to visit Seoul is typically in the spring (April-May) and fall (September-November).

During these times, temperatures are mild and comfortable, and the city is full of vibrant colors from the changing leaves in fall or blossoming cherry blossoms in spring.

With countless festivals, shopping outlets, cultural activities, and outdoor spaces, Seoul is a great place to explore and take in the sights.

Plus, late fall and winter offer opportunities to ski and snowboard at various resorts outside of the city.

Read also : The comprehensive guide for the best time to visit South Korea

Seoul, the bustling city of South Korea, is divided by the majestic Han River into two distinct regions.

To the north lies a region that is steeped in tradition and culture, home to some of the most important and iconic historical monuments and attractions.

Directly across on the other side of the river lies an area full of modernity and vibrancy – the perfect spot for visitors to come and explore Seoul’s hip neighborhoods, trendiest cafe spots, and modern nightlife.

Seoul is split into districts (gu) and neighborhoods (dong), with the river passing below Mapo-gu, Yongsan-gu, and Seongdong-gu.

As already mentioned, Seoul is a big metropolis, but its public transportation system is amongst the best in the world.

Getting around Seoul will be effortless by subway, taxi, or bus. You can pay cash on the bus, but it is highly recommended to have a rechargeable T-Money card .

There are  9 subway lines  in Seoul that will get you also to the metropolitan area.

Also, there are different  types of buses  depending on their itinerary:

• Blue  buses – for long distances within Seoul – basic fare 1300 won
• Green  buses – for transportation between blue bus stops and subway stops – basic fare 1300 won
• Yellow  buses – downtown Seoul – basic fare 1200 won
• Red  bus – inter-city express transit – basic fare 2400 won

You cannot spend 4 days in Seoul without tasting all the local delicious food!

Apart from our favorite restaurant in Buam-dong, here are a few other recommendations you must try if you are in the area:

A Flower Blossom on the Rice (꽃밥에피다) – in Insadong, Korean traditional food customized by the chef: bibimbap and vegetables, please try to have a course or single in lunch.

GlowSeoul (온천집) – Iksundong no.1 Korean traditional restaurant. They also have a cafe nearby you might want to try.

Pildong Myeonok (필동면옥) – No 1. cold noodle (Pyeongyang cold noodle: originated from North Korea, Pyeongyang). Water cold noodle is the main, and Seasoned cold noodle is the second option. Try to eat water cold noodles (물냉면).

두툼 – Delicious Korean BBQ close to Seoul Station and Seullo.

Din Tai Fung – this isn’t a Korean restaurant, however, we strongly encourage you to try it. The Taiwanese Michelin-star dumpling restaurant is famous all over the world. And you can easily find it in Myeong-dong.

Crystal Jade – a Chinese restaurant with delicious food, located in Myeong-dong.

Noop Cafe  is open until midnight and has a terrace with a stunning view over the Namsan Tower.

Seoulism   is another popular  cafe in Seoul  with a view over the Lotte Sky Tower.  Address : 48-7 Songpa-dong, Songpa-gu, Seoul (서울특별시 송파구 송파동 48-7)

Sanmotunggi Coffee  is set in one of the best  off-the-beaten-path destinations in Seoul , our favorite neighborhood, Buam-dong. Address: 153 Baekseokdong-gil, Buam-dong, Jongno-gu (서울특별시 종로구 부암동 백석동길 153).

Type Hangang Cafe  caught my eye with its large windows and the perfect view over the Han River and Yeouido. Address: 5th floor, 128 Tojeong-ro, Mapo-gu ( 서울 마포구 토정로 128 5층).

Molto Espresso Bar  is located in the heart of Myeongdong and has a rooftop terrace overviewing the Cathedral.

PIN FOR LATER

By Ingrid & Alex

Ingrid A former financial professional, I have been passionate about photography since an early age. My fascination with Korean culture was one of the reasons Alex accepted a business role in Seoul. Alex A former corporate business executive, I am a historical fiction writer. My business career allowed us to live in Seoul and explore South Korea for one year. We fell in love with the country, its culture, food, and people, and we strongly believe you will love it too! Because we know how difficult planning a trip can be, especially to South Korea, we are here to help you out and ensure you have an awesome time there.

26 comments

• Pingback: Day trip to DMZ: how to choose the best tour - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Top 8 Best areas to stay in Seoul - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Seeing Seoul in one day - a great itinerary - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Visiting the Five Palaces in Seoul - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Day trips from Seoul: plan your perfect escape from the city
• Pingback: Where to stay in Busan: the best hotels for first-time travelers in 2022
• Pingback: 17 FUN Things to do in Gangnam - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: 2 Days in Seoul, South Korea: The Perfect 48-Hour Seoul Itinerary
• Pingback: 3 days in Seoul: the only itinerary you'll need to see the best of the city!
• Pingback: 30 Most Instagrammable places in Seoul, South Korea - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: 11 FUN Things to do in Myeongdong, Seoul - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: 16 Best Cities in Asia Including Cost of Living       - Venaugh
• Pingback: Getting from Incheon to Hongdae: fast and easy - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: The ultimate list of the best cafes and the best coffee in Seoul
• Pingback: 20 suggested destinations for solo travel in Asia according to pro solo travelers
• Pingback: Incheon Airport to Myeongdong: the best transportation option
• Pingback: How to get to Namsan Tower: your complete guide for 2022
• Pingback: 7 days in Seoul - what to do in Seoul for a week
• Pingback: South Korea 5 day itinerary: an easy to follow guide - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Getting around Seoul: bus, subway, bike, taxi - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: South Korea Bucket List - the complete list of things worth doing
• Pingback: Where to buy skincare in Seoul | Your complete Seoul skincare shopping guide
• Pingback: South Korea 10 day itinerary - 4 great options - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Where to stay in Myeongdong - Best hotels in Myeongdong
• Pingback: 30+ Things to do in Seoul at night - Zen Moments in Korea
• Pingback: Discover Seoul Pass Itinerary - is it worth it? - Zen Moments in Korea

Leave a comment Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Taylor Swift The Eras Tour (Taylor's Version) - Official 4 Days Trailer

In 4 days subscribers of Disney Plus will be able to witness the top-selling concert film of all time with the Taylor Swift The Eras Tour (Taylor's Version). The concert film from the 14-time GRAMMY-winning artist in its entirety for the first time, which includes the song “cardigan” and four additional acoustic songs, will debut exclusively on Disney+ one day early, Thursday, March 14, at 6:00pm PT.

Did you enjoy this video?

In this video.

• Get a Discount Pass
• Buy My Digital Pass
• Buy My Hola BCN Card
• Book Paella at Bodega Joan
• Book My Bus Turistic Ticket
• See a flamenco show
• Attractions Tickets
• Itineraries
• Digital Pass

Sagrada Familia

• Barcelona Card
• Restaurants
• Casa Batllo
• Hop on Hop off
• Magic Fountain

4 Days in Barcelona: A Perfect Four Day Barcelona Itinerary

4 days in Barcelona are enough to soak in its colorful and vibrant atmosphere.

That said, deciding what to see in Barcelona in four days can be complicated if you don’t know the Catalan capital well.

That’s where I come in with my 11 years of city experience – and eight years helping tourists just like you.

Here’s how I’d do a four day itinerary in Barcelona.

How I Planned This Barcelona 4 Day Itinerary

Unlike tons of travel influencers that are globe-hopping – I bring over a decade of actually living in Barcelona to the table, making me the perfect person to build itineraries from the ground up

My approach has been to streamline your four-day visit by minimizing unnecessary metro use and inefficient routing .

I aim to immerse you in the local lifestyle : indulging in late lunches, embracing the siesta, and exploring the city’s sights in the evening, followed by dinner under the stars.

Of course, this outline reflects how *I* would personally enjoy four perfect days in Barcelona

If you need some tailor-made tweaks just write me in the comments below!

Let’s go.

What to See in Barcelona in 4 Days: Day One

Plaça catalunya (catalonia square).

Any four day Barcelona itinerary should start in the square from which much of Barcelona’s social life unfolds.

Plaça Catalunya is one of the largest and liveliest squares in Barcelona , ​​and also a strategic meeting point for moving to other areas of the city.

⚠️  Warning ⚠️ : Barcelona’s top two attractions must now be booked in advance .

You can book fast track tickets to both individually or get them as part of a discount pass:

• ⛪ Buy now:  Sagrada Familia Fast Track Admission (skip the lines)
• 🏞️ Buy now:  Park Guell Fast Track Admission  (skip the lines)
• 🎟️  Buy now: Best of Barcelona Bundle (Sagrada + Park Guell + 10% discount code for all else)

You will not be able to book these tickets on site – lock in your tickets ASAP or you could miss out.

Since its construction in 1927, it has been a meeting place for locals and tourists .

Around Plaça Catalunya there are large department stores (including the emblematic El Corte Inglés), chain restaurants like the Hard Rock Cafe, and fast food outlets.

Las Ramblas and Boqueria Market

South of Plaça Catalunya, towards the sea, stretches the famous La Rambla , one of the most emblematic streets of Barcelona .

This pedestrian street stretches for about 1.2 kilometres , from Plaça Catalunya to Port Vell, the old port.

It is an unmissable walk for those visiting Barcelona for the first time: street artists , mimes, and all sorts of eccentricities feature here, as well as historic flower and candy kiosks .

One of the most loved stops along the Rambla, and one that you can’t miss, is the marvellous Boqueria market .

This massive, covered food market will be your paradise if you love local eats: both for eating and photographing.

Check out its vibrant colours by sampling fruits, vegetables, sweets, and spices .

On the other hand, you can stop by one of the tapas restaurants for a nice breakfast or lunch.

🥘 Looking for food + history + wine + fun? Take one of Barcelona’s best food tours .

Gothic Quarter

4 days in Barcelona Spain wouldn’t be complete without the narrow streets of the Barrio Gótico .

This was the first urban nucleus of Barcelona in Roman times , when the city was called Barcino .

Founded by the Romans in the 1st century BC, Barcino was an important strategic and commercial settlement .

The traces of this ancient city can still be found in today’s Barrio Gótico, such as the stretch of Roman wall surrounding Barcelona Cathedral .

🚲 Want to cover a lot more ground in El Gotico? Consider taking one of Barcelona’s best bike tours .

Today, the Gothic Quarter is a fascinating combination of history, delightful corners such as Plaça de Sant Felipe Neri or the mysterious Pont del Bisbe , and modern art and craft galleries.

Also include in your itinerary a visit to Plaça de Sant Jaume , now the seat of the City Council and the Generalitat of Barcelona, ​​and the center of the most famous folkloric events in the city.

Lunch in El Gotico

After so much strolling through the stories and mysteries of the historic center of Barcelona, ​​you’re probably feeling peckish.

Here’s some great lunch spots:

• Can Culleretes (Carrer d’en Quintana, 5),
• Bodega Vasconia (Carrer d’en Gignàs, 13)
• El Louro (Rambla dels Capuchins , 37)

Optional visit: Barrio del Raval and MACBA

If you prefer multicultural neighborhoods you can visit El Raval , a neighborhood a few steps from the Rambla.

The Raval is a neighborhood full of contradictions , where trendy streets alternate with a lively art scene, excellent restaurants with international cuisine .

In the past, it was considered one of the most dangerous neighborhoods in Barcelona.

Despite its numerous problems to be solved, it’s an area where associations are actively engaged in the promotion of social and cultural inclusion .

Urban redevelopment projects and integration programs have contributed to improving the quality of life in the neighbourhood.

One of its most famous and visited cultural centers is the MACBA ( Museum of Contemporary Art of Barcelona ), which houses a rich collection of contemporary art works.

Again, when considering what to do in four days this is by no means a must – I’d say this is only for the most adventurous travellers.

The final stop on this first day in Barcelona is the Sagrada Familia , the incredible basilica designed by the architect Antoni Gaudí .

This extraordinary modernist-style building is still under construction, which is why some call it “the infinite project”.

It began in 1882 and for the moment it is expected that it will be completed in 2026 , on the occasion of the centenary of the architect’s death.

Despite this, it’s firmly at the top of my list of best things to do in Barcelona .

Admire its splendid facades carved with biblical episodes , the mystical lights of its interior generated by the stained glass windows, and the panoramic view from one of the two Sagrada Familia towers that can be visited.

When talking of the must sees in Barcelona in 4 days this is firmly at the top.

Naturally, Sagrada Familia is one of the most visited monuments in the world , ​​so it is essential to book your ticket in advance.

⛪ Want to unlock the symbolism of Sagrada Familia? Book one of the best Sagrada Familia tours .

How to Spend 4 Days in Barcelona: Day Two

Start the day at Park Güell , a public park with beautiful mosaic terraces and buildings that look like the sugar houses from the Grimm brothers’ fairy tales.

Parc Güell offers a panoramic view of the city and an immersive experience into the mind of Gaudí, who designed the park in 1900 for entrepreneur Eusebi Güell.

Stroll through the park’s gardens and admire the many architectural details that Gaudí has ​​scattered throughout the avenues and green areas.

Start, for example, from the colourful salamander resting slyly on the staircase at the entrance to the park.

Then, don’t miss the other monumental areas: the Plaza de la Naturaleza and it’s incredible mosaic benches , the hypostyle hall with the Doric columns that support it, and the curious Pórtico de la Lavandera .

🍷 Want a drink after Park Guell ? Book one of Barcelona’s best wine tours right now.

With the entrance ticket to Park Güell you can visit the Monumental Zone, declared a World Heritage Site by UNESCO , and stroll through the green and panoramic areas of the park.

Barrio de Gràcia and Casa Vicens

One of the best things to do near Park Guell is exploring the neighborhood of Gràcia .

I love this bohemian neighborhood for its charming streets, sustainable clothing and handicraft shops – as well as a super underrated Barcelona nightlife scene.

Some of its picturesque squares never sleep (much to the delight of the neighbours!), such as Plaça del Sol and Plaça del Diamant : come here if you want to enjoy a coffee or beer in a scene from a movie.

But, Gràcia’s bars and shopping aren’t the only reason to visit: here there is also an architectural jewel called Casa Vicens , one of the first works of Gaudí.

This modernist-style house is a marvel of intricate detailing and nature-inspired floral motifs – its distinctive feature, which will make you recognize it from a distance, is its facade decorated with green and white ceramic tiles .

Also, one of the top things to do in four days is visit the interior of the house – to admire the art and craftsmanship that characterize it.

🧑‍🎨 Want more of Gaudi? Unlock his masterpieces with the top Gaudi tours in Barcelona .

Passeig de Gràcia, La Pedrera, Casa Batlló

After the elegant Casa Vicens, I’d move onto Passeig de Gràcia: Barcelona’s most elegant boulevard .

Here, you can continue your itinerary among the houses of Catalan nobility .

Some of the most elegant boutiques in the city were born on this street and, even today, this street welcomes tourists and business people in its luxury hotels.

It’s also one of the best places for shopping in Barcelona , especially if you’re looking for elite brands.

Casa Batllò is one of the architectural marvels by Antoni Gaudí that attracts millions of tourists every year.

You recognize it by its unique facade, decorated with colourful mosaics, and undulating balconies that look straight out of a fairy tale.

I strongly recommend visiting the Casa Batllo interior .

Even the roof of the building hides surprises, original sculptures, and a panoramic view over the whole city.

Also on Passeig de Gràcia, ten minutes from Casa Batllò, is La Pedrera (official name is Casa Milà), another masterpiece by Gaudí.

It has a sinuous shape and looms over the Passeig looking like a wave in building form – or even a block of jello .

Visit it and get up to the garden of warriors rooftop – one of the most spectacular perches in Europe.

What to Do in Barcelona in Four Days: Day Three

The el born district.

El Born is another of the areas of Barcelona which, like the Gothic Quarter, has been able to harmonize the memory of the past with the lively modernity of the present .

Among its cobbled streets and old buildings of the medieval merchants of Barcelona, ​​you’ll find trendy boutiques, art and craft galleries, and endless Barcelona tapas restaurants .

One of its architectural jewels is the Basilica of Santa Maria del Mar , an imposing Gothic church dating back to the 14th century.

Its majestic Barcelona architecture and large windows create an evocative atmosphere, while its stark and bright interior inspires tranquillity and devotion .

If you are a fan of historical novels, perhaps you have already heard of the Basilica of Santa Maria del Mar thanks to the enormous success of Ildefonso Falcones’ book “ The Cathedral of the Sea “ .

This historical novel set in the fourteenth century tells the story of a young worker building the Basilica. The novel helped spread interest in this magnificent church, making it even more iconic in Barcelona culture and literature .

A few steps from the Basilica is the Picasso Museum (Carrer de Montcada, 15-23), an unmissable stop if you love art.

This museum houses the world’s largest collection of works by Pablo Picasso and offers a fascinating perspective on his artistic evolution and his talent.

Lunch in the Born District

Again, when thinking of places to visit in Barcelona in 4 days restaurants are always my top suggestions.

For a quality foodie foray (because beauty makes you hungry!) you can count on the main market of the neighborhood: the Santa Caterina Market (Avenida de Francesc Cambó, 16).

It’s one of the top markets in Barcelona .

With its distinctive modern structure and colorful undulating roofs , this market is renowned for its wide selection of fresh produce including fruit, vegetables, meat, fish, and local food products .

It’s a perfect place to immerse yourself in the culinary culture of Barcelona and to taste local delicacies.

If, on the other hand, you prefer a more classic sit down restaurant here’s my favourites:

• El Foro (Carrer Princesa 53): Argentinian steak restaurant
• Nou Celler (Carrer Princesa 16): Traditional Catalan cuisine
• Bormuth (Plaça Comercial 1) : Great classic Spanish tapas

Ciutadella Park

After lunch, a nice place to relax is Ciutadella Park (Passeig de Picasso, 21), an oasis of calm just a few steps away from the crowds of the Born.

Here you can relax, take a snooze on the lawn, or take a ride on the lake by renting a rowboat .

With its 17 hectares , Ciutadella Park it is one of the largest + best parks in Barcelona with expansive lawns, ponds, fountains, flower gardens and picnic areas .

Built between 1875 and 1888 , the park also has great historical importance because it was the site of the former military citadel , commissioned by Philip V to dominate the city after the War of the Spanish Succession.

Related : Is Barcelona Worth Visiting?

One of my favorite corners is undoubtedly the Ciutadella Lake which rises at the foot of the Monumental waterfall .

The Waterfall is a sculpture designed and engineered by Josep Fontseré with the help of a very young Antoni Gaudí.

The main motif of the sculpture, which rises in the center under four gilded horses , is the birth of venus – portrayed by the Catalan sculptor Venanci Vallmitjana.

Palau de la Música Catalana

After your relaxing break in the park, I’d kick off the afternoon with a visit to the Palau de la Música Catalana , a building of architectural excellence that hosts concerts and classical music performances .

Personally, as a first-time visitor to the city I’d take in one of Barcelona’s best flamenco shows there.

Designed by the Catalan architect Lluís Domènech i Montaner between 1905 and 1908, the Palau soon became a symbol of Barcelona’s cultural identity .

It was inaugurated on February 9, 1908 , and has been one of the leading theaters for music and the performing arts in the city ever since. Since 1997 it has been proclaimed a UNESCO heritage site .

This is one of my best things to do in Barcelona on a rainy day .

From an architectural point of view, the Palau is a modernist masterpiece and you can see it even if you admire it from the outside.

Its impressive exterior facade, which appears to light up the street, features an intricate design of brick and red stone pillars, mosaics, and stained glass windows .

The interior is wonderful: long rows of windows allow the concert hall to receive natural light while a stained glass dome shines in the center of the ceiling.

Old Port and Barceloneta

How to spend the rest of the third afternoon on your Barcelona 4 day itinerary?

My idea is to dedicate it to the most relaxing neighborhood in Barcelona : go down to the sea and discover the Port Vell and Barceloneta area .

The Port Vell is located in the lower part of the city, a few steps from the end of the Rambla and the monument to Christopher Columbus who, with his right arm extended, points his index finger towards the sea.

Port Vell is the old port of Barcelona : before the restoration that took place for the 1992 Summer Olympics, this was a port area of ​​empty warehouses, marshalling yards and factories.

From the beautiful building of the Autoridad Portuaria , just in front of the Rambla de Mar bridge, you can walk along the marina, admire the moored boats, and walk over to Barceloneta.

Along the way you’ll see sculptures that now characterize the landscape of this area of ​​Barcelona, ​​such as La Gamba (The Shrimp) by Javier Mariscal and La Cara de Barcelona (The Face of Barcelona) by American pop artist Roy Lichtenstein.

In Barceloneta, the seaside district famous for its sandy beaches and fresh fish restaurants , you can treat yourself to a few hours of relaxation to end the day.

Before the 1992 Olympics, this was still a traditional fishing district : its seafaring authenticity has not been completely lost and continues to emerge despite the great changes induced by tourism.

Start from its central square, the one where the neighborhood market is also located: Plaça del Poeta Boscá .

Here, you can still find small treasures of 19th-century building decoration and clear signs of pride on the part of its inhabitants, who often hang the barrio’s yellow-blue flag from their balconies.

One of the symbols of Barceloneta’s post-Olympics transformation can be found on the beach: the famous vertical sculpture known as The Cubes of Barceloneta .

In reality, its real name is Estel Ferit , which in Catalan means “wounded star”.

The four cubes that compose it immortalize the popular huts of the Barceloneta coast and which were eliminated before the Olympics.

Another iconic image of the neighborhood is the iconic Hotel W (Plaça Rosa Del Vents 1), also called Hotel Vela , at the end of the Barceloneta beach. Its sail-shaped profile lights up with different colors in the evening.

If you want to take a walk with the sound of ebbing waves , the Mirador Vela and the Mirador del Mediterránei open up behind the hotel, two long avenues from which it seems you can embrace the sea and all of Barcelona .

If the weather permits, the best way to enjoy Barceloneta is to sunbathe on one of Barcelona’s best beaches .

For an even more chill experience, sit at one of the many chiringuitos (beach bars) with a beer or mojito and watch the world go by.

Dinner in Barceloneta

Close day three of our four day Barcelona itinerary with a traditional seafood or tapas dinner .

In Barceloneta, as I mentioned, there are a ton of Barcelona’s top restaurants here, so you are spoiled for choice.

You can opt for vermouth and classic tapas at Bar Electricitat (Carrer de Sant Carles, 15) or for the slightly more sophisticated ones at Bitacora (Carrer de Balboa 1).

If you don’t want to miss epic seafood, go on the safe side with Can Maño (Carrer del Baluard, 12) or Barraca (Passeig. Marítim de la Barceloneta, 1).

Cova Fumada is another choice – it’s one of my Barcelona hidden gems .

4 Days in Barcelona Itinerary: Day Four

Camp Nou (Carrer d’Aristides Maillol, 12) is the legendary stadium of FC Barcelona , ​​​​one of the most famous and successful football clubs in the world.

Inaugurated in 1957, Camp Nou has a capacity of 99,354 spectators : the optics are impressive, you’re getting the largest stadium in Spain and the third largest in Europe. It is currently under renovation.

This temple of football has hosted many epic matches and unforgettable moments over the years.

If football is your passion, you cannot miss a visit to the stadium.

The ticket includes the possibility to get onto the pitch and sit on the player’s bench, to visit the challenging team’s locker room, the press room and the VIP room.

You can also visit the Barcelona F.C. Museum , with all the trophies, memorabilia, and objects related to the history of the club and its most famous players like Messi.

If, on the other hand, football doesn’t interest you and you much prefer a morning walking in nature , enjoy the beauty of the parks and paths of Montjuïc.

Montjuïc Hill offers spectacular views of the city but also a unique combination of history, nature, and culture .

Its name derives from the Catalan words Mont dels Jueus , which means “Mountain of the Jews”: the name recalls the fact that in the Middle Ages the hill housed a Jewish cemetery.

Garden of Joan Brossa Montjuic

Historically, Montjuïc has played a significant role in the history of Barcelona .

It was the site of several fortifications , including Montjuic Castle , which can still be visited today and from whose terraces you can admire almost the entire city.

During the Spanish Civil War, Montjuïc was also the site of executions and political imprisonments .

Among the most visited attractions is the Poble Espanyol (Avenida de Francesc Ferrer i Guàrdia, 13), a sort of miniature Spain rebuilt with narrow streets and squares representing different regions of the country.

Among the most interesting museums in this area, however, there are the National Art Museum of Catalonia (MNAC) and the Joan Miró Foundation , which houses a vast collection of the Catalan artist’s works.

Lunch at Montjuïc

In the Montjuïc area there aren’t many places to eat, apart from a few tourist-gouging bars.

Our advice, if you plan to be in these parts at a time when your stomach is rumbling, is to bring a packed lunch or something to nibble on .

If you pass by here on a Saturday or Sunday instead, we suggest you stop in a small open-air venue with a superb view of the commercial port of Barcelona: La Caseta del Migdia .

This is essentially a restaurant that BBQs quality food and serves it at picnic tables .

Any four day tour of Barcelona should include this, especially if you love eating meat and drinking cold beer outdoors .

Joan Miró Foundation

The Joan Miró Foundation is a museum dedicated to the famous Catalan artist Joan Miró .

It is located on the slopes of Montjuïc Hill and was inaugurated in 1975, shortly before the artist’s death.

It was born as a foundation by the will of the artist himself, who wanted to create an artistic space of international reference in Barcelona.

Subsequently, the Foundation has become a space to promote research and studies on Miró and contemporary art and to enhance his collection.

Nature is a key element of the foundation’s architectural project.

Joan Miró and Josep Lluís Sert – architect, close friend of the artist and project manager – chose Montjuïc as the site of the museum because they wanted a building integrated into nature.

In short, the vegetation becomes an integral part of the exhibition space here.

Plaza España and the Magic Fountain

End your four days in Barcelona in one of its busiest squares but which hides real jewels: Plaza España.

You recognize it for the iconic panorama dominated by the pair of Venetian towers .

Looking through the towers, at the end of the long avenue of Avenida de la Reina Maria Cristina, the Palau Nacional de Montjuïc stands proudly, which today is also home to the Museu Nacional d’Art de Catalunya (MNAC) .

All these buildings date back to 1929, the year of the Barcelona International Exposition.

The MNAC houses a huge collection of Catalan artwork from the Middle Ages to the 20th century, including paintings, sculptures, frescoes and decorative art objects.

The collections include works by artists such as Rubens, Velázquez, Goya, Tiepolo and Tintoretto.

Among the most famous works are the best examples of Romanesque frescoes , unique in Europe, which represent an important artistic and historical heritage of the region.

If you want to admire the city from above (and free!), go up to the terrace of the Las Arenas shopping center , an imposing circular building that used to be an old bullfighting stadium .

To round off your 4 day stay in Barcelona, ​​wait until the evening for the light show, water games and music of Magic Fountain Barcelona . The shows are free but times vary: check in advance.

Important: the Magic Fountain show is temporarily suspended due to a drought affecting Catalonia (July 2023).

Not into fountains? Check my list of other best things to do at night in Barcelona .

Four days in Barcelona not the right time? 🤯

Check out my other Barcelona itineraries to help you find that budget/time sweet spot:

• 1️⃣ Barcelona in One Day : great layover and short in/out trip that wastes no time
• 2️⃣ Barcelona in a Weekend : double your pleasure with a two day break!
• 3️⃣ Barcelona in 3 Days : stay for a long weekend and lock in more attractions
• 7️⃣ Barcelona in 7 Days : spend a week in Europe’s best city

4 Days in Barcelona Spain FAQ

To spend four days in Barcelona you should mix in the city’s top attractions like Sagrada Familia, Park Guell, and Casa Batllo.

Beyond this, you’ll also want to head to Barceloneta Beach, take a walk around the Gothic Quarter and Montjuic Hill, watch a flamenco show, and eat traditional paella and tapas dishes.

Four days in Barcelona is definitely enough if you’re looking to get your hand on the pulse of the city. With four days you can easily check off the main attractions, see the city’s natural beauty, and sample a big portion of the city’s traditional food.

Must sees for a four day Barcelona trip include Sagrada Familia, Park Guell, Casa Batllo, La Pedrera, Las Ramblas, Boqueria Market, the Gothic Quarter, Montjuic Hill, and Barceloneta beach.

Packing for four days in Barcelona depends completely on the season. In summer, it’s fine to bring only shorts/t-shirts and a light jacket – in spring and fall you’ll need sweaters and long pants. In Barcelona in winter, you’ll need a heavy coat and even gloves and a hat for evening.

Ready to See Barcelona in 4 Days?

It’s not only possible to visit Barcelona in 4 days, it’s actually probably the preferred amount of time.

I hope that my list of things to do in Barcelona in four days has been a help – but don’t be afraid to write me for custom itinerary stops should you feel the need!

Enjoy your four days in Barcelona 🤝

You might be interested in:

Plan the whole darn holiday with one click using our insider itineraries ranging from one to four days – and if you’re not happy we’ll make you one FREE.

So you’ve gone and done something weird and now you’re only spending one day in Barcelona. We won’t hold it against you (for long) – here’s a great list to maximize your 24 hours in Europe’s best city!

Spending a weekend in Barcelona is a fantastic way to get a quick break from your day to day. With this Barcelona weekend itinerary I’m going to make sure you see the city’s top attractions, slip in some beach and outdoor time, and eat the best Spanish food possible. Let’s get your weekend away in […]

COMING OVER EASTER HOLIDAYS?

Remember that this is another high season in Barcelona and tickets sell out way in advance!

Make sure you’ve got your attraction tickets booked before you leave or you run the risk of being shut out.

‘Taylor Swift: The Eras Tour’ Breaks Disney+ Record as No. 1 Most-Streamed Music Film

By Todd Spangler

Todd Spangler

NY Digital Editor

• Joni Mitchell Music Is Back on Spotify, After She Joined Neil Young in Pulling Songs Over Joe Rogan’s COVID ‘Lies’ 24 hours ago
• Michael Eisner Backs Disney CEO Iger Amid Board Fight With Activist Investors: ‘The Company Is Now in Excellent Hands’ 1 day ago
• Candace Owens Is Out at Daily Wire, CEO Says 1 day ago

Taylor Swift has set a new record with the premiere of her “Eras Tour” concert film on Disney+ .

“ Taylor Swift: The Eras Tour (Taylor’s Version)” had 4.6 million views on Disney+ in its first three days of release — making it the No. 1 music film ever on the platform, according to the company. Swifties watched 16.2 million hours of the blockbuster three-and-a-half-hour concert film on Disney+ over this past weekend. Disney+ defines a “view” as total stream time divided by runtime.

Other music films and specials currently available on Disney+ include Swift’s own “Folklore: The Long Pond Studio Sessions,” “Elton John: Farewell From Dodger Stadium,” “Black Is King: A Film by Beyoncé” and “The Beatles: Get Back.”

Disney reportedly paid  more than $75 million for worldwide streaming rights to “The Eras Tour”  concert film, which Swift’s company produced.

In its theatrical release, “Taylor Swift: The Eras Tour” generated $261.7 million at the global box office after its Oct. 13 debut, making it the highest-grossing concert film to date. The film was released digitally via Universal Pictures on Dec. 13, Swift’s birthday, with three bonus songs not in the theatrical release — “Wildest Dreams,” “The Archer” and “Long Live” — which are also in the Disney+ version.

More From Our Brands

Miami’s ultra music festival cuts day one short due to severe weather, winnie harlow seeks $3.7 million for modern farmhouse-style l.a. estate, mlb’s ohtani betting investigation could encounter legal hurdles, the best loofahs and body scrubbers, according to dermatologists, foundation recasts the mule for season 3 with game of thrones actor, verify it's you, please log in.

4 Days In Ireland: 56 Different Itineraries To Choose From

By Author Keith O'Hara

Posted on Last updated: December 29, 2023

Yes, we have  56  different 4-day Ireland itinerary guides for you to choose from…  

Why 56 you ask?! 

The reason for this is that we’ve covered  every  (we hope…) possible want or need you could have. 

Each of our 4-day guides:

• Has been meticulously planned
• Follows logical routes we’re confident you’ll love
• Has a detailed hour-by-hour itinerary
• Makes planning a trip to Ireland easy

In the guide below, you can pick a 4-day Ireland itinerary based on:

Please take 15 seconds to read the graphic above as it’ll help you pick the most suitable Ireland itinerary down below!

As you can see, we have 4-day Ireland itinerary guides that cover every angle we could think of.

All you need to do to find your perfect itinerary is read the section below  carefully .

How to browse our Ireland in 4 days itineraries

The handiest way to browse our itineraries is to select, from the list below, where you’re starting your road trip from/near.

We’ve used the main entry points to Ireland for those of you flying in or arriving by ferry.

Simply click one of the start points below and you’ll be taken to 4 days in Ireland itineraries that start at that location:

4 days in Ireland from Dublin

If you’re looking to explore Ireland in 4 days and you’re starting from County Dublin, this section is for you.

There are two sections below, split depending on how you plan on getting around Ireland .

As we explained in this graphic , ‘Fast Trips’ are for those of you looking to see/do as much as possible and who don’t  mind moving hotel regularly and ‘Slow Trips’ are ones where you’ll move accommodation as little as possible.

For those of you with a car

• A 4-day slow trip for those with good fitness
• A 4-day slow trip for those with low fitness
• A 4-day fast trip for those with good fitness
• A 4-day fast trip for those with low fitness

For those of you using public transport

An overview of the route from dublin.

Photos via Shutterstock

If you’re starting your 4-day Ireland itinerary in Dublin, the route above is hard to beat.

Although it varies slightly depending on how you’re getting around Ireland, both the car rental and the public transport itineraries take in many of Ireland’s top sights.

Over the course of your 4 days in Ireland you’ll:

• Explore the many things to do in Dublin
• Explore the Clare Coast, including Doolin and the Cliffs of Moher
• Take a day trip to Wicklow, Meath and Louth
• See Galway City, Connemara and Cong
• Tackle the Ring of Kerry Drive , explore the Dingle Peninsula and see a chunk of West Cork

4 days in Ireland from Shannon

If you’re looking for a 4-day Ireland itinerary that kicks off in Shannon, this section should tickle your fancy.

We’ve split up the different itineraries to ones for those of you using a car and ones for those of you that aren’t.

As we mentioned in this graphic , our fast 4 days in Ireland itineraries are for those of you looking to explore as much as possible and who don’t  mind moving about a lot.

Our slow itineraries are ones where you’ll move accommodation as little as is physically possible.

An overview of the route from Shannon

A lot of people start their 4-day Ireland itinerary from Shannon due to the convenience of flying into Shannon Airport.

One of the benefits of starting from here is that you’re kicking off your 4 days in Ireland a stone’s throw from some of the country’s most popular attractions.

If you follow our route from Shannon, you’ll:

• Explore Connemara National Park
• See the mighty Inis Mor Island
• Visit Bunratty Castle before heading into the ancient Limerick City
• See Killarney National Park and it’s many attractions
• Visit Blarney Castle and tackle the many things to do in Cobh

Ireland itinerary 4 days from Belfast

Another great way to tackle Ireland in 4 days is to fly/get the ferry into Belfast and take it from there.

Belfast is a great starting point for a road trip as you can explore the Antrim Coast before continuing on to Derry and Donegal.

Like we explain in this graphic , we split up our itineraries below into two sections – 1 section is for those using a car and the other is for those that aren’t.

An overview of the route from Belfast

This 4-day Ireland itinerary is one of my favourites in this guide as it takes in some of the most scenic parts of the country.

You’ll kick things off by spinning along the Antrim Coast, with a whole host of stops to choose from along the way.

If you follow our route from Belfast, you’ll:

• Explore the Causeway Coastal Route
• Tackle some of the best things to do in Belfast
• See the best of the Boyne Valley
• Spin around a good chunk of the Wild Atlantic Way

4 days in Ireland from Rosslare

If you’re spending 4 days in Ireland and you’re arriving into the ferry terminal at Rosslare, we’ve plenty of itineraries ready for you.

Now, as was the case with the ones above, we’ve split them into 2; 1 section is for those of you with a car and another for those of you using public transport.

If you’re wondering what ‘Fast Trips’ and ‘Slow Trips’ are, refer to this graphic at the top of the guide.

An overview of the route from Wexford

Now, this 4-day Ireland itinerary varies a lot  depending on whether or not you’re getting around in a car.

The public transport around some of the more remote parts of Wexford, in particular, are what causes there to be such a contrast in the different itineraries.

If you follow our route from Wexford, you’ll:

• See the glorious Hook Peninsula
• Ramble around the town of Kinsale
• Tackle some of the best things to do in Killarney
• Explore the mighty Dingle Peninsula

4 days in Ireland from Cork

Our 4-day Ireland itinerary guides that kick off in Cork take in some of the best that Ireland has to offer.

You can choose (or opt out of) some magnificent walking trails, soak up spectacular scenery and step back in time at heritage sites.

These are some of our more popular 4 days in Ireland itineraries. As usual, we’ve split them up for those of you with a car and for those of you without one.

An overview of the route from Cork

Photo left: The Irish Road Trip. Others: Shutterstock

Cork is a great starting point for a road trip. At the start of the trip, you can spend a bit of time in the city before moving into the wilds of West Cork.

Our itineraries from Cork then take you around the coast, into Kerry and up towards Limerick before heading to Dublin and back to Cork.

If you follow our route from Cork, you’ll see:

• The beautiful Beara Peninsula
• Wild West Cork
• The Ring of Kerry
• A chunk of Limerick, Tipperary and Clare

Ireland in 4 days from Knock

Although there likely won’t be a huge number of people looking for a 4-day Ireland itinerary that starts in Knock, we felt it important to include it as a start-point.

I can safely say that the public transport road trips from Knock were  very  tricky to research and map out. However, it was worth it.

Below, you can pick a 4 days in Ireland itinerary kicking off in Mayo based on trip speed, your fitness and how you’ll get around (we explain how to browse the itineraries in this graphic ).

An overview of the route from Knock

If your 4-day Ireland itinerary kicks off in Knock, you’re in luck – Mayo is home to an endless number of adventure opportunities.

Now, the public transport itineraries vs the car itineraries vary a fair bit due to the lack of buses and trains in places, but both versions pack a punch.

If you follow our route from Knock, you’ll:

• Explore Achill Island
• Tackle some of the best things to do in Galway
• See some of the finest beaches in Ireland
• Spend time in Sligo and plenty more

4 days in Ireland from Donegal

The last of our 4-day Ireland itinerary guides kicks off in Donegal.

This was by far the hardest one to map out for public transport and as a result the itineraries vary a lot.

As always, we’ve split the different itineraries up into sections for those of you with a car and for those without.

An overview of the route from Donegal

The route from Donegal for those of you driving is a peach. You’ll see parts of the county that rarely make it into tourist guidebooks and you’ll see many of Donegal’s historic sites.

You’ll then move into Sligo before heading to Mayo, Galway and beyond. For those of you using public transport, the route is  very  different due to Donegal’s poor public transport.

If you follow our route from Donegal, you’ll:

• Explore some of the best things to do in Donegal
• Soak up some of Sligo’s finest views
• See the Connemara coast

FAQs about exploring Ireland in 4 days

We’ve had a lot of questions over the years asking about everything from ‘Is 4 days in Ireland enough?’ to ‘What route should I follow?’.

In the section below, we’ve popped in the most FAQs that we’ve received. If you have a question that we haven’t tackled, ask away in the comments section below.

Is 4 days in Ireland too long?

No. If anything, it’s no where near enough. Although Ireland is small in comparison to the likes of the US, there’s endless things to see and do scattered right the way across the island. 4 days will only scratch the surface.

What to do in Ireland for 4 days?

This will depend on whether you want a a busy or an easy 4 day Ireland itinerary. You could see a lot of Ireland in 4 days, but you’d be driving constantly. You’re best off following one of our itineraries in this guide.

Where to spend 4 days in Ireland?

Again, this depends on you and what you want to see and do. If you follow our route from Dublin, Belfast or Shannon in this guide, you won’t go wrong.

Keith O’Hara has lived in Ireland for 34 years and has spent most of the last 10 years creating what is now The Irish Road Trip guide. Over the years, the website has published thousands of meticulously researched Ireland travel guides, welcoming 30 million+ visitors along the way. In 2022, the Irish Road Trip team published the world’s largest collection of Irish Road Trip itineraries. Keith lives in Dublin with his dog Toby and finds writing in the 3rd person minus craic altogether.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

4 Days in London: The Perfect Itinerary (First Time Visitors)

How to spend 4 days in london: the best itinerary + where to stay.

You’re planning to spend 4 days in London and you’re looking for the best things to do?

You’re at the right place!

In order to help you plan your stay , I have prepared for you this 4-day itinerary in London.

During your trip, you will discover all must-see attractions of the city such as Big Ben, Westminster Abbey, Buckingham Palace, Soho, Camden Town and a lot more!

In addition to the best places to visit and activities for each stage of your itinerary, I will also give you all my best tips and accommodation suggestions depending on your budget.

So, what are the best places to visit in London in 4 days? Where to stay?

Let’s find out!

1. The London Pass

4 days in london: must-see attractions:, one last tip for a perfect 4-day stay in london, b. westminster abbey, c. buckingham palace, d. trafalgar square/the national gallery, e. london eye, f. tate britain and/or tate modern museum, a. saint paul’s cathedral, b. the city, c. the tower of london, d. tower bridge, e. the shard, a. notting hill, b. the natural history museum, c. hyde park, d. oxford street, f. piccadilly circus, g. covent garden, a. hampstead village, b. camden town, c. regent’s park, d. abbey road (optional), e. madame tussauds or the british museum, where to stay in london, london in 4 days with kids, more things to do during your 4 days in london, map of your 4-day itinerary in london, find the best flight prices for your 4 days in london, you’re traveling to england these articles will help you , how to avoid waiting in line (and save a lot of time) at london’s tourist attractions.

Since London is one of the most popular tourist destinations in the world , it’s really useful to know how to avoid queuing for hours to see the iconic landmarks of England’s capital.

Every day, thousands of visitors flock to the Tower of London or Westminster Abbey.

You probably agree that there’s nothing more irritating than seeing your plans for your 4 days in London shattered because you lost 3 hours waiting around!

Fortunately, there are 2 very simple solutions to avoid the inconvenience and not miss any of the must-see sites during your 4 days in London.

Here are the details:

To save as much time (and money!) as possible during your 4-day itinerary in London, the first option is to buy the London Pass.

This type of city pass exists for all the most touristic cities around the word.

The London Pass will give you direct access to the most famous sites without having to queue to get your tickets first.

The great thing is that it’s a digital pass , so you can download your London Pass directly on your smartphone and scan it at the entrance of each attractions included in the pass.

Valid for between 1 and 10 days (depending on the option you choose), the London Pass works by giving you tourist credits. They are deducted each time you visit a tourist site in London:

For example the 4-day London Pass comes with 515 credits, which corresponds to 515€ in entrance fees even though the pass costs only 147€ to buy!!

It’s undoubtedly the most comprehensive pass if you’re spending 4 days in London!

What’s included in the London Pass:

• Entry to the main must-see attractions of my itinerary: Westminster Abbey, Tower of London, Tower Bridge… It’s quite simple: the 80 best attractions in London are included!
• A trip on the hop-on hop-off tourist bus, which is a great way to see London without wearing yourself out, especially if you’ve decided to visit London with your kids or don’t want to walk too much.
• Discounts in certain souvenir shops
• A tourist guide to the city, including opening hours and how to get to each attraction.

To buy your London City Pass, you simply need to click on the button below:

As an alternative, there’s also the London Go City Explorer Pass which works a bit differently.

You will need to purchase a pass based on the number of attractions you want to see. So you can buy a pass for 2, 3, 4, 5 or 7 attractions.

You can book it by clicking here!

2. Fast track tickets for London’s best tourist attractions

To visit London in 4 days, you can also buy skip the line tickets individually.

Just like the London Pass, they will allow you to access the monuments and tourist attractions without queuing.

There’s a really long list of fast track tickets available for the main historic landmarks and activities you can do in London during your 4-day trip.

For your convenience, I have listed a few of them below . You’ll also find them mentioned throughout this article.

To book, simply click on the attractions names (in orange) or on the green buttons you will find in this guide.

• Westminster Abbey
• Changing of the Guard at Buckingham Palace
• Tower Bridge + Tower of London VIP Visit
• Tower of London
• Cruise on the Thames
• See a musical
• Madame Tussauds
• St Paul’s Cathedral
• Harry Potter-themed guided tour – Awesome if you like Harry Potter’s universe!
• The hop-on hop-off double-decker bus

If you already know your travel dates (or as soon as you will have them!) , you should really book your accommodation.

As London is one of the most touristic cities in the world , the hotels offering the best value for money are often fully booked months in advance.

As a seasoned traveler, I can assure you that it’s always by planning as far in advance as possible that I’ve found the best hotels or apartments deals.

You agree that it would be a shame to somewhat ruin your stay in London by ending up in a not-so-great hotel that costed you a fortune, right? 😅

So your best bet is to take 5 minutes now to have a look at  traveler’s favorite hotels in London.

And if you like one of the hotels you find, book it!

It’s fast, it’s easy and most accommodation offer free cancellation. That’s the best way to protect yourself from the inconvenience of finding nothing but mediocre rooms at exorbitant prices.

To check the best hotels deals in London , simply click on the green button below:

After securing your dream stay, it’s time to continue reading this guide!

4 days in London: the ultimate itinerary

Now let’s see what you can do during your 4-day itinerary in London

For each day of your stay, I will give you all the details you need to organize your visits , as well as a map showing the attractions of the day.

I assume that you’ll be spending 4 full days in London and that you’ve already purchased your London Pass or your fast track tickets.

This way, you won’t waste time waiting in line to buy tickets and will be able to see as many places as possible during your 4 day stay.

And if you have any questions once you’ve read this article or just need help planning your holiday, don’t hesitate to ask me in the comments section located at the end of this article.

So, what should you see during your 4 days in London?

First day – the historic centre

Day 1 tourist attractions:

A. Big Ben B. Westminster Abbey C. Buckingham Palace D. Trafalgar Square E. London Eye F. Tate Britain and/or Tate Modern

The best way to start your 4 days in London is for sure to go admire the city’s most iconic landmark.

So first, let’s head to the famous Big Ben , located in London’s historic centre.

Built on the banks of the Thames in 1858, the 106 metres high Elizabeth Tower (Big Ben is actually the name of the bell inside the tower!) features 4 clocks located on each faces of the tower. Each clock is 7 metres in diameter!

Big Ben is part of the Palace of Westminster , perhaps better known as the Houses of Parliament.

If you were thinking of going to the top of the Elizabeth Tower and admiring the view from up high, it’s sadly not that simple: to get to the top of Big Ben, you have to submit an official request.

There’s a few months waiting list and, in addition, you have to be a UK resident.

Continue your visit on foot by heading to Westminster Abbey , located right next to Big Ben.

This historic landmark is the place where many kings and queens have been crowned , including the current monarch Queen Elizabeth II.

Inside the abbey, you can see the tombs of many past kings and queens, including the one of the famous Mary, Queen of Scots .

If you want to learn more about the history of the abbey, you should take an audio guide at the entrance.

The audio guide can be configured to do one of the several tours offered: a short 30 minutes tour, the standard 1 hour tour or the “more fun” tour for families with children.

If you’re visiting Westminster Abbey during your 4 days in London, you really need to buy your fast track ticket if you want to avoid queuing for 2 hours at the entrance!

If you’ve bought the London Pass , entrance is included. Otherwise, you’ll need to buy a fast track ticket by clicking on the button below:

Given your itinerary for the day, you should get to the abbey at the opening (9.30 am on weekdays, 9.00 am on Saturdays and closed on Sundays).

You can also book a 2-hour guided tour by clicking here!

Let’s now head to Buckingham Palace .

The royal residence is another historic landmark you must see during your 4 days in London!

Situated about 1km from Westminster Abbey , it will only take you around 15 minutes to get there on foot.

For a more immersive experience, you should go in the morning so that you can watch the Changing of the Guard ceremony. It takes place on Mondays, Wednesdays, Fridays and Sundays.

It’s an impressive show that follows the rhythm of the band, and that will delight young and old alike.

The Changing of the Guard begins at 11.00 am and lasts for around 40 minutes, but you should get to Buckingham early to secure a good spot. The ceremony attracts thousands of spectators every day, so you won’t be alone!

The Changing of the Guard ceremony is cancelled if it rains . You can check whether it’s taking place on the online calendar .

You can only visit the interior of Buckingham Palace during 2 months of the year, generally in August and September. As the places are very limited, you will need to book as early as possible.

You have a choice between 3 different tickets (click on the orange links):

• Ticket for the State Rooms , so you can see the reception chambers
• Entrance to the Queen’s Gallery featuring a large collection of works of art
• Entrance to the Royal Mews (stables) , where the Royal Family’s carriages are kept.

Once you’ve enjoyed watching the Queen’s soldiers parade to the sound of the band, continue your 4-day trip to London by heading to Trafalgar Square.

It’s a 15-20-minute walk to get there through St James’s Park, a public park with lovely flowerbeds just opposite the Palace.

You’ll probably recognise this famous square with its 4 big statues of black lions . It’s a lively spot where you can watch street performances and enjoy a bite to eat.

While you’re at Trafalgar Square, you should visit the National Gallery.

Like all the national museums in London, entrance is free of charge . So you have no excuse to miss one of the city’s most beautiful museums , founded in 1824 and renowned throughout the world.

Here, you’ll discover a rich collection of European paintings, including original works by Van Gogh, Monet, Cézanne, Rembrandt, Picasso, Leonardo da Vinci and more.

You can grab and audio guide at the entrance , and then opt for one of the several itinerary options to see the museum (including a 1-hour tour designed with children in mind).

Opening times can be found on the official website.

After this culture break, let’s continue your 4-day stay in London by returning to the historic centre (a 15 to 20-minute walk – or you can of course take the bus).

The London Eye is located on the banks of the Thames , very close to Big Ben. You have probably already spotted during the morning!

While you’re in London, you shouldn’t miss the opportunity of a ride on the London Eye: the biggest Ferris wheel in Europe allows you to enjoy an incredible panoramic view over the whole of London.

Get ready to ascend to more than 130 metres high in spacious enclosed capsules that can accommodate up to 25 people. As the wheel turns very slowly, the full ride takes 30 minutes.

You need to book your ticket for the London Eye in advance by clicking on the button below:

If you prefer, you can opt for a combined ticket which offers a great value for money: London Eye + Thames Cruise + Hop-on Hop-off Bus.

To end your first day in London on a cultural touch, you can visit 2 more must-see London museums.

The Tate Britain and Tate Modern museums are both located by the Thames , one on the north bank and the other on the south bank.

A river bus operates between the two galleries every 30 minutes, so you can easily visit them one after the other if you wish to.

Opened in 1897, the Tate Britain houses a magnificent collection dedicated to classical British art . You can appreciate works by Turner, Hogarth and William Blake in particular.

The Tate Modern is dedicated to modern art .

Entry to the two museums is free of charge, and the opening hours can be found on the official website.

If you want to see London by night , you can switch the Tate museums with the London Eye and do the Ferris wheel at the end of the day.

Once you leave the National Gallery , head for Embankment Pier , located on the Thames. Take the river bus to Millbank Pier , it will drop you at the entrance to the Tate Britain. For the Tate Modern , get off at Bankside Pier.

2nd day: Things to do and see in London

Day 2 tourist attractions:

A. St Paul’s Paul’s Cathedral B. The City of London C. The Tower of London D. Tower Bridge E. The Shard

Located in the City of London business district, St Paul’s Cathedral is a must-see landmark if you have the chance to spend 4 days in London.

This baroque-style cathedral was built in the 17th century to replace the old church that was destroyed by fire in 1666.

In St Paul’s Cathedral, you can discover:

• The wonderful nave
• The mysterious Whispering Gallery and its incredible acoustics
• The Stone Gallery
• The Golden Gallery and its fantastic panoramic view over the city
• The crypt , featuring tombs of several famous British figures, including the Duke of Wellington and Sir Christopher Wren, the architect of St Paul’s Cathedral.

Entry to St Paul’s cathedral is included in the London Pass .

If you don’t have the City Pass, you can book fast track tickets by clicking on the button below:

After visiting the cathedral, you will stay a bit more in the City of London district.

London’s business district , which is also its geographical centre, is well worth spending some time in.

Take a stroll through the streets and admire the area’s most iconic landmark : nicknamed The Gherkin , this unusually shaped skyscraper is also sometimes called “The suppository”!😆

If you book your place in advance on the Sky Garden website , you can also enjoy a fantastic and free 360° panoramic view over London from the city’s highest public garden.

This 155-metre high skyscraper , nicknamed the “Walkie-Talkie”, is situated at 20 Fenchurch Street, in the heart of the City of London.

There are limited spaces available each day and you can only book 3 weeks to 1 month in advance.

The City district is also home to the famous Tower of London .

The fortress siting on the banks of the Thames (not far from Tower Bridge, your next stop) is just a 15-minute walk from The Gherkin .

Built in 1066 and designated a UNESCO World Heritage Site, the Tower of London was once a royal residence , but has also served as a prison and place of execution.

Today, it’s a museum dedicated to medieval history, and focuses in particular on the macabre aspects.

Tales of execution told by guides in period costume , a tour of the torture chamber and other gory details immerse you in one of the darkest chapters in London’s history.

All in good fun, of course, and with a touch of British humour! The visit is totally suitable for children.

Everyday, hordes of visitors come to see the top attraction of the Tower: The Crown Jewels. You can see the crowns of several kings and queens, including Queen Elizabeth II.

And don’t miss taking a look at the beautiful gardens outside the Tower.

Guided tours start from the main entrance every 30 minutes.

And of course, you should purchase your entrance tickets in advance so you don’t waste time in the often endless queue!

Entry to the Tower of London is included in the London Pass . You can also buy your tickets separately by clicking on the button below:

The Tower Bridge , the next stop on your 4-day trip to London is located close to the Tower of London.

With its 2 huge towers and sky blue ironwork , you will instantly recognise this landmark of the city!

Built over the Thames in the 19th century, this impressive Gothic-style bridge connects the north and south banks of London. It’s a bascule bridge, that means it will open up to let big boats through!

When it was built, Tower Bridge was the most sophisticated bascule bridge in the world.

Take your time to admire Tower Bridge from the banks of the Thames over a snack or a drink (there’s plenty of shops around), or simply enjoy the moment.

You can also walk across the bridge and even visit the old engine rooms located inside one of the towers.

If you go up to the highest level , you can walk across the glass walkway and get the feeling you’re floating above the Thames.

Entry to Tower Bridge is included in the London Pass.

At the foot of the Tower Bridge, the charming little marina of St Katharine Docks is a lovely place to take a stroll and enjoy something to eat in one of the many restaurants overlooking the Thames.

To end your second day in style, you should go to the top of The Shard to enjoy panoramic views.

The Shard is the name of London’s newest landmark, a skyscraper standing over 300 metres high located a 10-minute walk from Tower Bridge.

It’s also the highest viewing platform in Western Europe , allowing you to enjoy an incredible 360° view across the whole city.

In addition to the spectacular panorama, you can also learn more about London through multimedia displays within the building.

The Shard is well worth a visit, and you need to book your tickets by clicking on the button below:

3rd day in London: The best places to visit

Day 3 tourist attractions:

A. Notting Hill B. The Natural History Museum C. Hyde Park D. Oxford Street E. Soho F. Piccadilly Circus G. Covent Garden

For your 3rd day in London, you will head to Notting Hill district, located in the western part of the city.

This fashionable part of London, made famous by the film of the same name – “Notting Hill” has more the feel of a quiet and elegant village. If you’re a fan of the movie, you’ll for sure recognise a number of the locations where it was shot!

There, you can admire beautiful houses featuring pastel-coloured façades and take a stroll to Portobello Road Market (open every morning).

This market is actually the main attraction of the area, and is always busy. You will find Second-hand clothes, vintage items, antiques , diverse accessories and even culinary specialties. You will see, it’s lovely place to stroll around!

If you have the chance to spend 4 days in London in August, don’t miss the major annual event held here in the last weekend of the month: Notting Hill Carnival , a festive parade of over 5 km to the sounds of Caribbean music.

To get to Notting Hill, you can take the metro to Notting Hill Gate underground station.

And if you want to be certain you don’t miss anything, you should book this guided tour:

Following your morning in Notting Hill, let’s continue your day with a visit to London Natural History Museum , one of the biggest and most beautiful museums in the city.

It will take you around 20 minutes by bus to get there.

This museum is literally huge, and attracts over 5 million visitors each year. It’s the most visited natural history museum in Europe!

The Gothic building housing the displays is as magnificent from the outside as it is on the inside . During your visit, you’ll discover exceptional exhibits and learn all about zoology, botany, volcanology, archaeology, the dinosaurs, and much more besides.

You can’t actually see everything in one go unless you spend the whole day there. There are also lots of fun activities for kids.

You should spend a maximum of 2 hours in the museum so you have enough time left for the rest of your day’s visits.

Visiting London in 4 days on foot also gives you time to take in some fresh air.

So now, why not enjoy a little greenery in London biggest park: Hyde Park.

It’s one of the most beautiful city parks in the world, the perfect place to enjoy a picnic, have lunch on a terrace or simply take a walk.

And in the north-east corner of the park, you can see a little London oddity: The Speakers’ Corner . Every Sunday, anonymous speakers give a speech to passers-by , often with a touch of humour.

If you’re in London towards the end of the year , you can explore Hyde Park’s huge Christmas Market . There’s also a Winter Wonderland fair and the biggest outdoor skating rink in the United Kingdom.

If your stay in London happens to be during the summer , you can also enjoy the festivals and concerts that are held in the park each year.

After this short break in Hyde Park, you should head to Oxford Street , a continuation of the north-east entrance to the park (Marble Arch).

This 2.5 km long commercial avenue attracts hordes of tourists, and can be likened to Paris’ Champs-Élysées.

This is your chance for a bit of shopping or window-shopping in the 600 stores that line the street, including the big British names like Marks & Spencer, TopShop, Mush, Primark, Urban Outfitters and more.

If you continue along Oxford Street, you’ll arrive in Soho.

This is the most vibrant part of London , and the favourite place for Londoners and tourists to come to party!

It’s a small area, but it’s home to an impressive concentration of pubs, theatres, restaurants, cinemas and clubs. It’s the perfect place for a good night out and to enjoy the party atmosphere on any day of the week.

You can even watch a musical in one of the many theatres in the area, an unmissable experience during your 4 days in London!

If you want to see the famous musical “Les Misérables” at the Sondheim Theatre in London, make sure you buy your tickets in advance here.

And if you prefer to see the no less famous “Phantom of the Opera”, you need to book by clicking there!

If you want an original experience in Soho, you really should opt for the Harry Potter-themed guided tour .

Your guide will take you to the cult locations from the films including Diagon Alley, Gringotts, platform 9 3/4, Knockturn Alley and much more besides. The guide is brilliant and the tour is really well put together.

This tour is so good that it’s labelled “GetYourGuide Originals” . It means that if you’re not 100% satisfied of your guided visit, you can ask for a full refund!

To book your Harry Potter guided tour , simply click on the button below:

Your walk in Soho will inevitably lead you to Piccadilly Circus , the famous London square recognisable from its gigantic advertising screens.

It can be considered as the Times Square of London . Here too, there’s always a lively party atmosphere.

Continue walking east until you reach Covent Garden (a 10-minute walk from Piccadilly Circus).

Covent Garden was once the site of London’s covered market, before it was relocated in the 1970s.

Fortunately, the very beautiful glass roof was kept and the building now houses several shops, restaurants, artists’ studios as well as the brilliant London Transport Museum.

The area attracts crowds of tourists, and you can watch lots of street performances making it the perfect way to end the day.

4th day – Walk around London

Day 4 tourist attractions:

A. Hampstead Village B. Camden Town C. Regent’s Park D. Abbey Road (optional) E. Madame Tussauds or the British Museum

To conclude your 4-day itinerary in London , you should explore the north of the city.

Start with a stroll in Hampstead Village , a delightfully green and quiet area sat on a hill above London. Hampstead is actually an old village that has retained all its charm.

It’s an integral part of London today, but you really feel like you’ve left the city when you’re there.

As quaint and peaceful as a provincial village, it’s full of flower-filled gardens, beautiful Victorian houses, shops, restaurants and cafés. You will see, Hampstead Village is really a calm and relaxed place to take a stroll .

Just 20 minutes by metro from central London, Hampstead Village is a great place to get away from the hustle and bustle of the city.

Continue exploring the north of the UK’s capital with a tour around Camden Town.

This very trendy area of London is home to alternative cultures and alter-globalisation . It’s a blend of punk, Gothic, hip-hop and hippie cultures all in a condensed array of shapes, colours and eccentric shops.

It’s one of the busiest and liveliest areas of the city, especially thanks to Camden Lock Market which is open every day from 10.00 am to 6.00 pm.

There are all sorts of stalls, unusual clothes and accessories , live music, plus stands selling street food from all over the world.

You can grab something to eat and go by Regent’s Canal, where there’s always a really friendly atmosphere.

Walk south from Camden Town for 10 minutes and you’ll arrive in Regent’s Park.

Of all the parks in London, Regent’s Park boasts the finest flower beds. Covering 166 hectares, this park once belonged to the royal family and was originally (in 1811) intended to accommodate several lavish properties, including a palace.

A lack of funds meant the project was never completed, but not before several neo-classical residences had been built around the park by the architect Josh Nash.

Today, Regent’s Park is one of the most beautiful public green spaces in the city.

A lot of Londoners come here for their daily or weekly running session or to play other sports in the landscaped grounds.

It’s also the perfect place for couples or families to hire a rowing boat or a pedalo , enjoy a picnic or simply stroll through the greenery.

There are also children playground for the little ones, a magnificent rose garden (Queen Mary’s Gardens – not to be missed in the summer!), cafés and restaurants.

If you’re a Beatles fan, you’ll have been waiting for this moment to come!

Abbey Road and its legendary pedestrian crossing is less than 2 km to the west of Regent’s Park. Follow in the footsteps of countless fans, and take a photo on the pedestrian crossing, just like on the famous cover of the group’s Abbey Road album.

You may well face a crowd, and risk annoying drivers who often have problems driving on this very busy street. Opposite the pedestrian crossing, you can see the studios where The Beatles recorded the album as well as a souvenir shop.

So here you are at the final stop of your 4-day itinerary in London .

To end your visit of the city, you can choose one of these two museums:

• Madame Tussauds: 20 minutes by bus from Abbey Road, and one of the most visited museums in London.

It’s a bit like Paris’ Grévin Museum, but fancier and on a bigger scale!

You’ll need 2 to 3 hours here , the idea being to get photographed with the top celebrities …or rather with their wax lookalikes. Most of them are incredibly realistic!

You need to book your tickets in advance by clicking on the green button below:

• The British Museum: if you’re more interested in culture and history , this museum located 20 minutes by metro from Regent’s Park is the perfect way to end to your holidays.

Entry is free of charge and you’ll learn about the history of civilizations, in particular through the many archaeological relics (including the famous Rosetta Stone).

The museum has one of the richest collections in the world with more than 7 million exhibits on display.

Don’t hesitate to book a guided visit (click here) to discover the best of the main exhibitions in 2 hours!

You now have all the information and tips you need to see London in 4 days!

Now you know what to do in London in 4 days, but there’s one crucial question to answer: where to stay for these few days?

I’m not going to lie, the cost of accommodation in London is pretty high and it’s not easy to find affordable hotels, especially in central London. The best deals are always booked months in advance.

That’s why you really do need to book as early as possible to get the best rates!

If you already know your travel dates, you should thus really book your accommodation now.

Here is my selection of the best hotels in London depending on your budget:

• The Chamberlain: Close to Tower Bridge, the Tower of London and the banks of the Thames. This British-style hotel offers cosy, comfortable double rooms from 120€ per night, breakfast 12€. Strong points: a smartphone is made available, excellent locations, the welcoming staff and the comfortable bed linen. It’s my favourite for its excellent value for money!
• Hotel Indigo London – Kensington: This hotel is in the borough of Kensington and Chelsea, and very close to a tube station. Well-equipped, quiet and warm double room from 200€, breakfast from 19€. Strong points: the quiet area, cosy ambience cosy, the smiling and efficient staff.
• Haymarket Hotel, Firmdale Hotels: 5* hotel close to London’s “theatreland”, minutes on foot from St James Park and 15 minutes from Buckingham Palace. Really comfortable, spacious and quiet double room from 390€ per night, breakfast 20€. Strong points: perfect location, charming staff and excellent bed linen. The best choice for a romantic stay in London!
• The Soho Hotel, Firmdale Hotels: A luxury hotel right in the heart of London, 5 minutes from Oxford Street and Soho, and just 10 minutes from Piccadilly Circus. Really spacious designer and magnificently decorated double room from 500€ per night, breakfast 29€. Strong points: the perfect geographical location, magnificent bedrooms, the sumptuous breakfast. The best hotel in London for a luxury stay!

If you’d prefer an hotel in London that isn’t too expensive, you should check out the “Z Hotel” chain. You can find them in lots of different areas of London, and prices start of 60€ per night. They’re the best bet for budget accommodation in London.

• The Z Hotel Shoreditch
• The Z Hotel Gloucester Place
• The Z Hotel City
• The Z Hotel Victoria
• The Z Hotel Piccadilly
• The Z Hotel Soho

If you plan to spend 4 days in London with your children , you can be assured they won’t get bored, and they’ll really love most of attractions. You may however need to adjust the itinerary slightly to suit their age and interests.

Here are a few ideas for a 4-day stay in London with kids:

• Spend a bit less time in the museums and more time in the parks (if the weather permits). Nevertheless, you can visit the majority of London’s museums with your youngsters because most of them offer short, fun tours for children.
• The Tower of London, with its medieval ambience, is one of the attractions children love the most
• A ride on the London Eye will make them feel like they’re on a giant merry-go-round.
• The Changing of the Guard on the forecourt of Buckingham Palace will put a sparkle in their eyes
• An evening seeing a family musical in Soho is also a lovely way to spend time together
• Travel by red double-decker bus and sit upstairs, and right at the front if you can! For kids, this sort of journey is a real adventure in itself. Book this double-decker hop-on hop-off bus tour by clicking here!

You also have a choice of several theme parks: the Shrek Adventure Tour at Dreamworks , Legoland or Kidzania.

If you or your kids are Harry Potter fans , you can also spend a day at Harry Potter Studios , located a bit outside the city.

It’s really a magical experience!

The best tour include the entrance ticket to Harry Potter Studios as well as the transportation from your hotel.

You need to book this tour by clicking on the button below:

If you’ve followed my itinerary for 4 days in London and still want to explore more, you should read my guide of the 20 best places to visit in London .

You can read it here: The 20 Best Things to do in London .

It might even leave you wanting to stay longer in London! Why not spend 5 days, or even a whole week there?

To help you visualize your daily itineraries during your 4 days in London, I have created this map with all the places to visit day by day . You can view the legend of the map by clicking on the top left button, the one with a little arrow.

You can thus see the suggested itineraries for each day.

As always, you should book your plane tickets as early as possible to get the best prices.

To check the rates and schedules for flights to London, you can use our flight comparator, in partnership with Skyscanner:

Discover all my articles about London : All my articles to help you plan your trip to England are listed there.

• London: Top 20 best things to do
• 2 days in London – The perfect itinerary for 48h!
• 3 Days in London – The best 72h itinerary
• 4 Days in London – The defitinive guide to plan your trip
• 5 Days in London – How to plan your itinerary + My best tips!
• One week in London – The perfect 7-day itinerary
• Where to stay in London? My guide of the best places to stay for all budgets

You’re using Pinterest? Here is the picture to pin!

Creator of the Voyage Tips blog, travel and photography lover. I give you all my best tips to plan your next trip.

Related Stories

5 days in Edinburgh: the perfect Itinerary (first time visit)

Gozo quad rental: The definitive guide

Visit Gozo: Top 10 Things To Do and Best Places to Visit

Discussion 4 comments.

Hi there! Thanks for writing this very interesting article. Will be visiting in May for 4 days and will use this as a base for my visit. Just a question about the London Pass: does it also allow you to book a time slot? Or you just go and have a separate entrance then? For example the tower of london, will it really help to avoid the long queu? Thanks for the help 🙂

Hi Michele,

Thanks! I’m glad that my 4-day itinerary in London helps you to plan your visit.

For the London Pass, it will depend on the attractions. For the Tower of London, you don’t need to book a time slot, just join the queue of people who already have their ticket, at the security checkpoint. But for The View from the Shard for example, you do need to book a time slot. When you receive your London Pass, it also comes with a digital guide giving you full details of each attraction.

Enjoy your 4-day stay in London!

Thank you for this informative itinerary & tour guide to London We are planning our trip in September & looking forward to our visit My question – I want to visit the Pursley Farm in Shenley, do you have any information about it? I am a Pursley descendant & would love to have the history of this old historical place & possibly visit if possible Thank you very much & God bless!

Thanks Catherine! I’m glad that my 4-day itinerary in London helps you to plan your stay.

About the farm, I didn’t know about it as it’s not a touristic sites and there’s virtually no information about it online. The best is to contact them directly and see what it’s possible to do. Here is the phone number that you can find online: +44 1923 855760

Leave A Reply Cancel Reply

Your Name (required)

Your Email (required)

Your Website (optional)

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

• Middle East
• North America
• Cheap car rentals: my best advice
• Back to Homepage

4-Day, 4-Park Magic Ticket from $99 Per Day, Plus Tax (Total Price from $396, Plus Tax)

View All Special Offers

Experience 4 days of magic and thrills across the Walt Disney World theme parks when you purchase a specially priced 4-Park Magic Ticket starting from $99 per day , plus tax (total price starting from $396, plus tax).

This ticket does not require a theme park reservation to enter a park.

Date-based ticket with start dates from April 2 through September 22, 2024. Ticket must be used within 7 days of selected start date.

Fun in the Theme Parks

Discover new experiences and classic favorites in all 4 Walt Disney World theme parks when you purchase a 4-Park Magic Ticket. Read More

Discover new experiences and classic favorites in all 4 Walt Disney World theme parks when you purchase a 4-Park Magic Ticket.

As a reminder, the 4-Park Magic Ticket provides one visit to each of the 4 Walt Disney World Resort theme parks (one theme park per day).

• NEW! Stroll along a lush trail where you can explore the wonders of water and discover its playful personality at Journey of Water, Inspired by Moana .
• NEW! Watch the skies come alive in Luminous The Symphony of Us , a nighttime spectacular with fireworks, fountains, lights and music.
• Spring into fresh flavors, lively entertainment and fun for all ages at EPCOT International Flower & Garden Festival —now through May 27, 2024.
• Sip, savor and celebrate a world of flavor at EPCOT International Food & Wine Festival —returning in fall 2024.
• Bring the whole family to zip, dash and scurry through Gusteau's kitchen as you take in the sights, sounds and even smells from Remy's world on Remy's Ratatouille Adventure .
• Board an ancient Norwegian vessel and be whisked away to the kingdom of Arendelle during a Frozen Ever After adventure.
• Soar across the sky during a hang-gliding adventure on Soarin' —with spectacular sights, pleasant scents and the graceful sensation of flight that take you to incredible heights.

Disney's Animal Kingdom Theme Park

• Celebrate the magic of nature at Pandora - The World of Avatar . Here, you can fly on the back of a banshee on Avatar Flight of Passage, hike amid floating mountains in the Valley of Mo'ara and take a mystical boat ride into a bioluminescent rainforest on the Na'vi River Journey.
• Set off in an open-air vehicle across a lush African savanna teeming with exotic animals on Kilimanjaro Safaris.
• Witness Finding Nemo: The Big Blue... and Beyond! —a vibrant stage show set in the underwater world of Finding Nemo .
• Speed through the Himalayas on a runaway train while avoiding the clutches of the Yeti on Expedition Everest - Legend of the Forbidden Mountain .
• Behold Festival of the Lion King —a larger-than-life show filled with pageantry, puppetry and classic songs from The Lion King .
• Splash your way through a lush Asian jungle on Kali River Rapids .

Magic Kingdom Park

• Leave the real world behind for a high-stakes race across the Grid—the dark, computerized world from TRON —on TRON Lightcycle / Run presented by Enterprise.
• Explore iconic attractions and experiences in 6 incredible lands—including Seven Dwarfs Mine Train , a swaying family coaster ride that will have you racing through a diamond mine.
• Be dazzled by music, dancing and vivid pageantry during the Festival of Fantasy Parade —a grand tribute to the tales and inhabitants of Fantasyland.
• Meet some of your favorite Disney pals , enjoy a royal reception from Disney princesses and so much more. You may even spot Mirabel or Bruno from the animated film Encanto !
• Take off on an exhilarating coaster ride on Space Mountain and Big Thunder Mountain Railroad .
• Rediscover beloved classic Disney attractions such as Jungle Cruise, Haunted Mansion and more.
• Feast your eyes on a nighttime fireworks spectacular featuring lights, lasers and special effects.

Disney's Hollywood Studios

• Live your adventure in a galaxy far, far away at Star Wars : Galaxy's Edge ! Experience 2 thrilling attractions, build your own droid or lightsaber, savor Batuu's tasty food and beverages, shop for themed merchandise and more!
• Discover big fun for kids and grown-ups alike at Toy Story Land . Take a wild ride on Slinky Dog Dash and go for a whirl on Alien Swirling Saucers.
• Pack your imagination, switch tracks and take a ride on the cartoon side like never before when you hop aboard Mickey & Minnie’s Runaway Railway.
• Hurtle up and down on a haunted elevator ride at The Twilight Zone Tower of Terror™.
• See some favorite Characters around the park—including Toy Story Characters, Disney Junior pals, Frozen friends and Star Wars Characters.

Stay in the Magic... and Save!

Turn your visit into an unforgettable vacation with a special offer at select Disney Resort hotels. Read More

Turn your visit into an unforgettable vacation with a special offer at select Disney Resort hotels.

Stay in the magic with the Disney Resorts Collection—and save with this offer:

Spring and Early Summer Room Offer

Save up to 30% on rooms at select Disney Resort hotels when you stay 5 nights or longer, valid for stays most nights through July 7, 2024. Other savings may be available for shorter stays. View offer details .

Why Stay in the Magic?

When you book this room offer, you can enjoy a Walt Disney World vacation filled enchantment.

As a Disney Resort hotel Guest, you can:

• Experience the same legendary storytelling, detail and service found in the Walt Disney World theme parks
• Stay close to the theme parks
• Enjoy extra time in the theme parks — view details about this benefit for Disney Resort hotel Guests
• Get around Walt Disney World Resort with ease using complimentary transportation options—like bus, boat and monorail services
• Delight in other great benefits !

Check out Walt Disney World room offers to learn more about these benefits—and save on your stay!

Make the Most of Your Day

Save time waiting in line with Lightning Lane entry .

• Admission is subject to capacity closures and other restrictions.
• Parks, attractions and other offerings are subject to availability, closures and change or cancellation without notice or liability. Admission to a theme park is not guaranteed.
• Tickets are subject to the Walt Disney World Resort Ticket Store Terms and Conditions .

Stay in the Magic at Select Walt Disney World Resort Hotels by booking a non-discounted room with a discounted 4-Park Magic Ticket now through 9/22. To book, call 407-934-7639 and speak with a vacation planning expert or call your travel agent. The number of rooms allocated for this offer is limited.

†Guests under age 18 must have parent or guardian permission to call.

Other Offers You May Like

Use CoBrowse to Share Your Screen?

Even as the Disney Cast Member guides you around our site, they will be unable to access or view any files or information on your device or anything you type.

To stop the session, click the X in the screen-sharing window at any time. You can remain on the phone with the Cast Member.

Enter the code provided by the Cast Member and Accept to get started.

Invalid code. Please reenter

Not on the Phone with a Cast Member?

A Perfect Itinerary for 4 Days in Scotland

Categories Scotland , Scotland Itineraries

I spent just 4 days in Scotland on my first trip here.

Table of Contents

While this may sound like a short amount of time, it is often the way when you have limited holidays and want to fit in a visit to other countries in the UK and Europe.

The truth is, you can see and experience a lot with just 4 days in Scotland. And it may be comforting to know that your first trip to Scotland will not be your last.

I am living proof of this- after my first 4 day trip to Scotland I moved to Edinburgh two years later!

This 4 day Scotland itinerary is a replica of my first trip here.

I’ve made some amendments [I know Scotland a whole lot better now] but 80% of this itinerary is where I went and what I did. This itinerary includes a little bit of everything: castles, historic buildings, lochs, street art, a whisky distillery, a drive through the highlands and more!

So if you’re looking for inspiration on what to see in Scotland in 4 days read on for my tried, tested and refined 4 day Scotland itinerary!

>> Read more: The ultimate guide to planning a trip to Scotland

4 days in Scotland: An Itinerary

Where to stay.

For this itinerary you will spend 2 nights in Edinburgh and 2 nights in Glasgow. Here are a few of my accommodation recommendations:

• Budget: Castle Rock Hostel
• Mid-range: The Dunstane Houses
• Bed and breakfast: JustB
• Luxury: The Witchery by the Castle

Glasgow: 

• Budget: Glasgow Youth Hostel
• Mid-range: Ibis Styles George Square
• Luxury: Kimpton – Blytheswood Square Hotel

Day 1: Explore Scotland’s capital, Edinburgh

• Edinburgh Castle
• The Royal Mile
• National Museum of Scotland

After starting your day with a hearty breakfast [you’ll need it] you’ll first head to Edinburgh Castle to explore Scotland’s most famous castle [grab your skip the line ticket here – it’s quicker and cheaper to buy online]. Inside Edinburgh Castle you’ll see pieces of Scotland’s history such as Mons Meg , St Margaret’s Chapel , the Stone of Destiny and the Scottish Crown Jewels .

Afterwards you’ll walk The Royal Mile , which is actually a Scottish mile. There are plenty of touristy shops to satisfy your needs, as well as pubs and restaurants.

Here’s a tip- shops on The Royal Mile are a lot more expensive, so if you want to buy souvenirs I recommend buying them away from here and Princes Street.

Read more: 10 Must-Sees in Scotland You Can’t Miss

There is so much to see on The Royal Mile and you’ll find yourself diverting from it to explore closes [narrow residential streets with through access] and side streets.

Make sure you check out Victoria Street , a gorgeous winding street that is located a short detour from The Royal Mile.

After lunch I recommend you spend a couple of hours in my favourite museum, the National Museum of Scotland . Here you’ll have the opportunity to see ancient Pictish carvings , the Cramond Lioness [a rare Roman sculpture that was found in Edinburgh] and the Lewis Chess pieces – one of the best archaeological discoveries in Scotland.

If you still have some time before dinner I recommend walking up Calton Hill for magnificent views on the city.

Read more: The best things to do in Edinburgh

Edinburgh Castle, in spring!

Where to eat in Edinburgh

For breakfast I recommend The City Cafe.  My favourite lunch spots include Black Medicine  and Black Ivy . There is a fabulous juice bar and cafe on Victoria Street called Hula that I recommend either for lunch or a healthy snack.

For afternoon tea I recommend The Witchery by The Castle or  Mimi’s Bakehouse .

For an atmospheric dinner I recommend The Witchery by The Castle [fine dining- reservations required], the Caley Picture House [a Wetherspoons brand in a huge old picture theatre- cheap food and drinks!] or Howies on Victoria Street.

SCOTLAND RESOURCES ✨ On a budget? Grab my Scotland Bucket List Planner ✨ Organising a big trip? Grab my Ultimate Scotland Planner ✨ Want to tick off all the must-sees? Grab my Must-See Scotland Essential Travel Planners ✨ Have a question about travelling around Scotland? Join my Facebook groups Scotland Travel Tips and Scotland Travel Tips for Locals ✨ Love podcasts? Listen to my Scotland podcast Life in Scotland ✨ Want more Scotland? Join my exclusive Scotland community Secrets of Scotland to unlock bonus content

Day 2: Take a day trip to Falkirk

The Kelpies

• Callendar House

On the second day of your 4 day trip to Scotland, you’ll ride the train from Edinburgh to Falkirk. From here you’ll catch a bus to The Kelpies , the world’s largest equine sculptures. There is a lovely gift shop and a cafe next to the sculptures.

Afterwards you’ll catch the bus again to Callendar House , a mansion in Falkirk set in beautiful grounds with an incredible history. Entry is free and there is a cafe upstairs.

Part of Antonine’s Wall is also located within the grounds. Antonine’s Wall was built after Hadrian’s Wall as a barrier to raiding Caledonian tribes. Ask the people at the information desk to point you in its direction- the wall isn’t actually a wall anymore, but a ditch.

You’ll then catch the bus back to the Falkirk train station, and ride the train back to Edinburgh.

Day 3: Drink whisky and be merry in Glasgow

• Visit a whisky distillery
• See Glasgow street art
• Glasgow Cathedral
• Experience the colourful nightlife in Glasgow

On day three of my 4 day Scotland itinerary you’ll catch the train from Edinburgh to Glasgow Central or Glasgow Queen Street [whichever is closest to your accommodation].

My first visit to Glasgow didn’t go all that well, you can read my post about why I didn’t like Glasgow but why I love it now. I’ve revised my itinerary for this day to show you some of the best parts of Glasgow that I missed on my first visit.

Read More: 50 Travel Tips for Scotland

After dropping your luggage off you’ll then catch a taxi or an Uber to Auchentoshan Distillery for a tour of the single malt whisky distillery. They have a 60 minute tour for just £12, which includes a tasting, or a 90 minute tour with 4 tastings for £35.

You’ll make your way back to the city centre for lunch, and then explore Glasgow on foot. The walk to Glasgow Cathedral takes under 30 minutes, and there is lots of street art to see along the way on the Glasgow City Mural Trail .

You can find a map of the street art here .

After exploring the beautiful cathedral, be sure to go for a wander through the Glasgow Necropolis , an old Victorian cemetery, located just behind the cathedral.

You’ll wander back into the city centre to experience one of my favourite things about Glasgow: it’s vibrant nightlife. Have some dinner and sample a few of the pubs and fantastic cocktail bars the city has to offer. I love Revolution on Mitchell Street  for a meal and cocktails.

Just don’t get too carried away because you’ve got a big day ahead of you tomorrow!

11 secret places in Scotland

How to trave l scotland on a budget, what to pack for a trip to scotland.

Admiring Glasgow Cathedral from the Necropolis

Day 4: Go on a road trip to Glencoe

• Loch Lomond
• Shopping in Luss
• Drive through Glen Coe
• Hike Glencoe Lochan
• Falls of Falloch

On the final day of your 4 days in Scotland you’ll hire a car for a road trip to Glencoe in the Scottish Highlands . Today you’ll get a taste of one of the most dramatic parts of the Scottish Highlands as you drive through Glen Coe !

You’ll pick up your rental car from Glasgow [I recommend hiring a car from Auto Europe ] and drive to Luss , a wee village on the banks of Loch Lomond .

Stretch your legs and take a stroll to admire Scotland’s largest loch; there are also some cute gift shops in Luss where you can pick up unique Scottish gifts.

You’ll continue on, passing The Green Welly Stop in Tyndrum. The Haggis loves pointing out the giant green gumboot painted on the building every time we drive past. It’s a good snack stop!

After you pass through Tyndrum the scenery will begin to open up and you’ll be greeted by mountains and forest.

Before long you’ll spot Buachaille Etive Mòr [commonly called ‘The Buachaille’] which is one of Glen Coe’s most dramatic mountains. Be sure to look out for the iconic ‘ Wee White House ‘ on your left; photographs of this building with the iconic backdrop of Buachaille Etive Mòr grace many biscuit tins and Scotland guidebooks. There is parking so you can pull over to take a snap yourself.

As you continue on you’ll pass The Three Sisters , three beautiful mountain peaks. Pull into the Three Sisters Car Park to take in the three peaks and visualise The Lost Valley nestled between two of the sisters. If you had more time you could hike to the valley, however you’ll continue on to Glencoe village for something to eat.

I recommend having lunch at the Clachaig Inn , one of the best pubs in Scotland , which is nestled in the heart of Glencoe, surrounded by magnificent views of the mountains.

You’ll then have another chance to stretch your legs when you go for a walk around Glencoe Lochan . The lochan is surrounded by peaceful woodland and easy waymarked trails. It was landscaped to look like the Canadian Rockies, and the lochan looks like a miniature Lake Louise!

On your way back to Glasgow I recommend visiting the Falls of Falloch before stopping for dinner at The Drovers Inn , a traditional Scottish hotel with a restaurant and pub that was established in 1705.

The Wee White House in Glen Coe

Did you know that my husband and I provide private driving tours in Scotland? We can take you on this exact tour! We also have a range of itineraries you can choose from our range of itineraries or we can take you wherever you want to go! Visit our website Kiwi and Haggis Tours for more information.

With just 4 days in Scotland you can see plenty; my 4 day Scotland itinerary is a busy one, however on my first trip to Scotland I was keen to experience as much as possible and I had zero regrets.

There is so much more in Scotland to see, but hopefully this gives you a taste and leaves you wanting to come back explore more of this amazing country!

Read more: The Ultimate 10 Day Scotland Itinerary

Have you tried my 4 days in Scotland itinerary? Leave me a comment below- I’d love to hear what you think!

SAVE TO PINTEREST

Related posts

Saturday 1st of July 2023

4 day travel to scotland

Monday 25th of September 2023

@Indu garg,

Hi Yvette, I would like to take the ferry from Glasgow to Dublin. Thoughts?

🏆 Men's Tournament

3:15 p.m. et.

(4) Kansas vs. (5) Gonzaga

😼 Arizona first to Sweet 16

5:30 p.m. ET

(1) UNC vs. (9) Michigan St.

NCAA.com | March 23, 2024

2024 march madness: men's ncaa tournament schedule, dates.

Here is the schedule for March Madness 2024, which started with the Selection Sunday on March 17. The NCAA tournament games continue with the second round on Saturday, March 23:

• Selection Sunday: 6 p.m. ET Sunday, March 17 on CBS
• First Four: March 19-20
• First round: March 21-22
• Second round: March 23-24 
• Sweet 16: March 28-29 
• Elite Eight: March 30-31 
• Final Four: Saturday, April 6 at State Farm Stadium in Glendale, Arizona.
• NCAA championship game: Monday, April 8 at State Farm Stadium in Glendale, Arizona.

You can get a printable 2024 NCAA bracket here .

Here is the game-by-game schedule for the 2024 men's tournament, including TV networks. Click or tap on each game to be taken to the live streams.

2024 NCAA tournament schedule, scores, highlights

Saturday, March 23 (Round of 32)

• (2) Arizona vs. (7) Dayton | 12:45 p.m. | CBS
• (4) Kansas vs. (5) Gonzaga | 3:15 p.m. | CBS
• (1) North Carolina vs. (9) Michigan State | 5:30 p.m. | CBS
• (2) Iowa State vs. (7) Washington State  | 6:10 p.m. | TNT
• (11) NC State vs. (14) Oakland | 7:10 p.m. | TBS
• (2) Tennessee vs. (7) Texas | 8 p.m. | CBS
• (3) Illinois vs. (11) Duquesne | 8:40 p.m. | TNT
• (3) Creighton vs. (11) Oregon | 9:40 p.m. | TBS

Sunday, March 24 (Round of 32)

• (2) Marquette vs. (10) Colorado | 12:10 p.m. | CBS
• (1) Purdue vs. (8) Utah State | 2:40 p.m. | CBS
• (4) Duke vs. (12) James Madison | 5:15 p.m. | CBS
• (3) Baylor vs. (6) Clemson | 6:10 p.m. | TNT
• (4) Alabama vs. (12) Grand Canyon | 7:10 p.m. | TBS
• (1) UConn vs. (9) Northwestern | 7:45 p.m. | truTV
• (1) Houston vs. (9) Texas A&M | 8:40 p.m. | TNT
• (5) San Diego State vs. (13) Yale | 9:40 p.m. | TBS

Thursday, March 28 (Sweet 16)

• TBD vs. TBD

Friday, March 29 (Sweet 16)

Saturday, March 30 (Elite Eight)

Sunday, March 31 (Elite Eight)

Saturday, April 6 (Final Four)

Monday, April 8 (National championship game)

• TBD vs. TBD | 9:20 p.m.

Tuesday, March 19 (First Four in Dayton, Ohio)

• (16) Wagner 71 , (16) Howard 68
• (10) Colorado State 67 , (10) Virginia 42

Wednesday, March 20 (First Four in Dayton, Ohio)

• (16) Grambling 88 , (16) Montana State 81
• (10) Colorado 60 , (10) Boise State 53

Thursday, March 21 (Round of 64)

• (9) Michigan State 66 , (8) Mississippi State 51
• (11) Duquesne 71 , (6) BYU 67
• (3) Creighton 77 , (14) Akron 60
• (2) Arizona 85 , (15) Long Beach State 65
• (1) North Carolina 90 , (16) Wagner 61
• (3) Illinois 85 , (14) Morehead State 69
• (11) Oregon 87 , (6) South Carolina 73
• (7) Dayton 63 , (10) Nevada 60
• (7) Texas 56 , (10) Colorado State 44
• (14) Oakland 80 , (3) Kentucky 76
• (5) Gonzaga 86 , (12) McNeese 65
• (2) Iowa State 82 , (15) South Dakota State 65
• (2) Tennessee 83 ,   (15) Saint Peter's 49
• (7) Washington State 66 , (10) Drake 61
• ( 11) NC State 80 , (6) Texas Tech 67
• (4) Kansas 93 , (13) Samford 89

Friday, March 22 (Round of 64)

• (3) Baylor 92 ,   (14) Colgate 67
• (9) Northwestern 77 , (8) Florida Atlantic 65  (OT)
• (5) San Diego State 69 , (12) UAB 65
• (2) Marquette 87 ,   (15) Western Kentucky 69
• (1) UConn 91 , (16) Stetson 52
• (6) Clemson 77 , (11) New Mexico 56
• (10) Colorado 102 , (7) Florida 100   
• (13) Yale 78 , (4) Auburn 76 
• (9) Texas A&M 98 , (8) Nebraska 83
• (4) Duke 64 , (13) Vermont 47
• (1) Purdue 78 , (16) Grambling 50
• (4) Alabama 109 , (13) College of Charleston 96
• (1) Houston 86 , (16) Longwood 46
• (12) James Madison 72 , (5) Wisconsin 61
• (8) Utah State 88 , (9) TCU 72 
• (12) Grand Canyon 77 , (5) Saint Mary's 66

These are the sites for the men's tournament in 2024:

March Madness: Future sites, dates

Here are the future sites for the NCAA Division I men's basketball Final Four:

• Latest bracket, schedule and scores for 2024 NCAA men's tournament

• The fine margins of March Madness' thrilling opening round

• TNT Sports and CBS Sports Announce Tip Times and Matchups for Second Round Games on Sunday, March 24

March Madness

• 🗓️ 2024 March Madness schedule, dates
• 👀 Everything to know about March Madness
• ❓ How the field of 68 is picked
• 📓 College basketball dictionary: 51 terms defined

Greatest buzzer beaters in March Madness history

Relive Laettner's historic performance against Kentucky

The deepest game-winning buzzer beaters in March Madness history

College basketball's NET rankings, explained

What March Madness looked like the year you were born

Di men's basketball news.

• 2024 March Madness: Men's NCAA tournament schedule, dates
• A complete history of HBCU men's basketball in the NCAA tournament’s round of 64
• Gohlke puts Oakland on the map as Kentucky's March woes continue
• CBS Sports and TNT Sports Announce Tip Times and Matchups for Second Round Games on Saturday, March 23
• A complete history of HBCU men's basketball in the NCAA tournament’s First Four and play-in games
• UConn, other three No. 1 seeds are top fan picks to make 2024 Final Four
• New Mexico, JMU and McNeese are the country's most popular Cinderella picks

Follow NCAA March Madness